DISCLAIMER

This Phoenix Journal was generated by scanning a printed edition using optical character recognition (OCR). Although efforts have been made to correct errors readers should refer to the image-based or printed version if discrepancies need to be resolved.

/Ground Crew

Version 1.0

This version was converted from a MS Word document and should work fine on any newer devices (Smartphones, Tablets, etc.)

COPYRIGHT POSITION STATEMENT AND DISCLAIMER

The Phoenix Journals are intended as a “real time” commentary on current events, how current events relate to past events and the relationships of both to the physical and spiritual destinies of mankind.

All of history, as we now know it, has been revised, rewritten, twisted and tweaked by selfishly motivated men to achieve and maintain control over other men. When one can understand that everything is comprised of “energy” and that even physical matter is “coalesced” energy, and that all energy emanates from God’s thought, one can accept the idea that the successful focusing of millions of minds on one expected happening will cause it to happen.

If the many prophecies made over thousands of years are accepted, these are the “end times” (specifically the year 2000, the second millennium, etc.). That would put us in the “sorting” period and only a few short years from the finish line. God has said that in the end-times would come the WORD--to the four corners of the world--so that each could decide his/her own course toward, or away from, divinity--based upon TRUTH.

So, God sends His Hosts--Messengers--to present that TRUTH. This is the way in which He chooses to present it, through the Phoenix Journals. Thus, these journals are Truth, which cannot be copyrighted; they are compilations of information already available on Earth, researched and compiled by others (some, no doubt, for this purpose) which should not be copyrighted. Therefore, these journals are not copyrighted (except SIPAPU ODYSSEY which is “fiction”).

The first sixty or so journals were published by America West Publishing which elected to indicate that a copyright had been applied for on the theory that the ISBN number (so necessary for booksellers) was dependent upon the copyright. Commander Hatonn, the primary author and compiler, insisted that no copyrights be applied for and, to our knowledge, none were.

If the Truth is to reach the four corners of the world, it must be freely passed on. It is hoped that each reader will feel free to do that, keeping it in context, of course.

ECSTASY TO AGONY

THROUGH THE PLAN 2000

ISBN 1-56935-007-8

First Edition Printed by

PHOENIX SOURCE PUBLISHERS, Inc.

P.O. Box 27353

Las Vegas, Nevada 89126

July 1993

Printed in the United States of America

www.phoenixsourcedistributors.com

TO OUR SPONSORS

This book has been sponsored and published by ones asking to remain without personal gratitude in honor of their children and now, especially, their GRANDCHILDREN.

They specified no particular document in their willingness to offer help to produce a JOURNAL, but I asked that it be THIS particular volume which would be dedicated to the CHILDREN. This is a legacy to be treasured, children, left by Grandparents who have done all they could do to preserve your place of freedom only to see that you no longer have access to Truth nor are allowed to know your own documents of freedom, as the New World Order has phased out all open education on such matters, while expressing only the lies and rewritten histories of a world in chaos.

May you some day realize the gift of Grandparents to you-the-children in a generation (the last) which can bring the Light of Freedom again unto your nations and bring man again unto the path in Lighted Truth of that which IS.

To Our Grandchildren

Lindsey I., Danielle P. & Michelle P.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DEDICATION

FOREWORD

TUESDAY, MAY 4, 1993

THE WISDOMKEEPERS

EDITOR’S NOTE

CHAPTER 1

SUNDAY, APRIL 11, 1993, EASTER

TAKE TIME TO SEE By Ray F. Zaner

CONTINUATION: THE NEWSTATES CONSTITUTION

ARTICLE IV: THE PLANNING BRANCH

ARTICLE V: THE PRESIDENCY

ARTICLE VI: THE LEGISLATIVE BRANCH

A. THE SENATE

B. THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES

CHAPTER 2

SUNDAY, APRIL 11, 1993, EASTER

NEWSTATES CONSTITUTION (CONTINUATION OF)

ARTICLE VII: THE REGULATORY BRANCH

ARTICLE VIII: THE JUDICIAL BRANCH

ARTICLE IX: GENERAL PROVISIONS

ARTICLE X: GOVERNMENTAL ARRANGEMENTS

ARTICLE XI: AMENDMENT

ARTICLE XII: TRANSITION

CHAPTER 3

MONDAY, APRIL 12, 1993

CHAPTER 4

FRIDAY, APRIL 16, 1993

WHEN A TEAM MEMBER IS MISSING

MONDAY COURT SESSION

DR. YOUNG

NEW VOLUMES

GAIANDRIANA

LUKE PERRY

OTHER NEWS AND CONFIRMATIONS

CONFIRMATION OF NUCLEAR DEVICE AT TRADE CENTER

MININUKE TERROR STARTING?

CHAPTER 5

FRIDAY, APRIL 16, 1993

BY WHAT AUTHORITY COME I?

THE “WORD” WAS PREPARED

And so dawned “THE WORD”

WORLD ARMY

TRILATS DEMAND WORLD ARMY

LONGTIME MEMBERS

DESTRUCTION OF AMERICAN JOBS

WHO SPOKE?

PERMANENT UN FORCE

ENTER SOVEREIGN NATIONS, UNINVITED

GLOBAL REGIME “DOWN THE ROAD”

BUREAU OF ALCOHOL, TOBACCO AND FIREARMS

A BOTCHED MISSION IN WACO, TEXAS

STOCKPILER

CHAPTER 6

SUNDAY, APRIL 18, 1993

TODAY!

L.A.: NO RIOTS

SHUTTLE

WACKO WACO “STAND-OFF

OTHER BOOKS

CHAPTER 7

SUNDAY, APRIL 18, 1993

TODAY!

OUR INVISIBLE FRIENDS

WRITING By Ralph Waldo Trine

CHAPTER 8

WEDNESDAY, APRIL 21, 1993

WACO, TEXAS

COURT AND JAIL-TIME

NOW, FOR BO GRITZ

GOVERNMENT IN ACTION

NEXT: 1ST, 5TH AND 14TH AMENDMENT

THE “INSTITUTE” AND USES

MAJOR ECONOMIC COLLAPSE

CONSTITUTION SALVATION

ON “THE LAW”

SOME “THOUGHTS”

LOST TRAILS (A Verse)

TODAY

CHAPTER 9

SAT, APRIL 24, 1993

CONTACT!

COUNTER CHARGES AND STEEL NERVES

PHONE LINE

THINGS YOU WILL HAVE MISSED!

C.A.N. IMPLICATED IN WACO BLOODBATH By Harley Schlanger

POST-RAID COVER-UP

CHAPTER 10

SUNDAY, APRIL 25, 1993

CESAR CHAVEZ

FILTHY POLITICS

CHAPTER 11

In CONGRESS, July 4, 1776.

The unanimous Declaration of the thirteen united States of America

CHAPTER 12

5/14/90 #1 HATONN

THE CONSTITUTION OF THE uNITED STATES OF AMERICA

PREAMBLE

ARTICLE 1: LEGISLATIVE DEPARTMENT

5/14/90 #2 HATONN

THE CONSTITUTION CONTINUED

5/17/90 #1 HATONN

NOW, BACK TO WHERE WE LEFT OFF WITH YOUR CONSTITUTION

ARTICLE 2: EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT

5/17/90 #2 HATONN

ARTICLE 3: JUDICIAL DEPARTMENT

ARTICLE 4: THE STATES AND THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT

ARTICLE 5: METHOD OF AMENDMENT

ARTICLE 6: GENERAL PROVISIONS

ARTICLE 7: RATIFICATION OF THE CONSTITUTION

CHAPTER 13

1/30/91 #1 HATONN

THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO

11 U.S. EXECUTIVE ORDERS NOW IN EFFECT

CHAPTER 14

10/14/90 HATONN

WE DIDN’T SAY “JEWS”

ZIONISTS VS. “JEWISH RACES”

ISRAEL/PALESTINE--THIS

5/5/90 HATONN

BECAUSE IT’S NOT HOW YOU THINK IT IS!

KHAZARS--SOME HISTORY OF ORIGINS

KHAZARS IN COLOMBIA?

THE PROTOCOLS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ZIONIST MEN OF WISDOM

PROTOCOL NO. I

PROTOCOL NO. II

PROTOCOL NO. III

PROTOCOL NO. IV

PROTOCOL NO. V

PROTOCOL NO VI

PROTOCOL NO VII

PROTOCOL NO. VIII

PROTOCOL NO IX

PROTOCOL NO X

PROTOCOL NO XI

PROTOCOL NO XII

PROTOCOL NO. XIII

PROTOCOL NO. XIV

PROTOCOL NO. XV

PROTOCOL NO. XVI

PROTOCOL NO. XVII

PROTOCOL NO. XVIII

PROTOCOL NO. XIX

PROTOCOL NO. XX

PROTOCOL NO. XXI

PROTOCOL NO. XXII

PROTOCOL NO. XXIII

PROTOCOL NO. XXIV

10/14/90 HATONN

DEFINITION: ZIONISM

CHAPTER 15

4/1/93 #1 CERES ‘ATONN

CHAPTER 16

INTRODUCTORY NOTE

CHARTER OF THE UNITED NATIONS

Chapter I: PURPOSES AND PRINCIPLES

Chapter II: MEMBERSHIP

Chapter III: ORGANS

Chapter IV: THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY

Chapter V: THE SECURITY COUNCIL

Chapter VI: PACIFIC SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES

Chapter VII: ACTION WITH RESPECT TO THREATS TO THE PEACE, BREACHES OF THE PEACE, AND ACTS OF AGGRESSION

Chapter VIII: REGIONAL ARRANGEMENTS

Chapter IX: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL CO-OPERATION

Chapter X: THE ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL COUNCIL

Chapter XI: DECLARATION REGARDING NON-SELF-GOVERNING TERRITORIES

Chapter XII: INTERNATIONAL TRUSTEESHIP SYSTEM

Chapter XIII: THE TRUSTEESHIP COUNCIL

Chapter XIV: THE INTERNATIONAL COURT OF JUSTICE

Chapter XV: THE SECRETARIAT

Chapter XVI: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

Chapter XVII: TRANSITIONAL SECURITY ARRANGEMENTS

Chapter XVIII: AMENDMENTS

Chapter XIX: RATIFICATION AND SIGNATURE

STATUTE OF THE INTERNATIONAL COURT OF JUSTICE

Chapter I: ORGANIZATION OF THE COURT

Chapter II: COMPETENCE OF THE COURT

Chapter III: PROCEDURE

Chapter IV: ADVISORY OPINIONS

Chapter V: AMENDMENT

DEDICATION

I ask that this volume be dedicated to the efforts and ceaseless work of one Dr. Al Overholt. I asked him to compile this document from the myriads of writings so that the most could be placed before you for close evaluation one against another. Dr. Overholt has done the layout for all of the PHOENIX JOURNALS, assisted by the Editors who work freely day and night to accomplish the “impossible”. I honor them all and wish at this writing to honor Al for the work is hard and long and sometimes no reward or recognition for the work is visible.

Please note; Dr. Overholt is a DENTIST who relocated, purchased and self-taught himself the elusive workings and language of the computer species--in order to bear this burden of love for you-the-people, that you might have the written WORD. Thank you, Al; we are grateful and can find no words adequate for expressing appreciation for this service.

FOREWORD

REC #1 CERES ‘ATONN

TUE., MAY 4, 1993 10:32 A.M. YEAR 6, DAY 261

TUESDAY, MAY 4, 1993

This book shall be called ECSTASY TO AGONY--THROUGH THE PLAN 2000. We cannot go back to the “beginning” of all time in a short volume to look at guidelines, instructions (Constitutions) for mankind. Therefore we shall dwell on the intent at chaos and enslavement of a planet and a species of human through PLANNED steps to eventual Elite Anti-Christ goals.

This volume does not outlay all of the information, even that which we have presented in typed outline, but it compiles the most important documents as recognized by groups as “Constitutions” of one sort or another.

You will be able to look at your Constitution of the (u)nited States of America along side the NEWSTATES CONSTITUTION of the New World Order Newstates of America as interim LAW until such time as all the globe comes under dictatorship of the United Nations Charter in full. You are already “there”, you just continue to disbelieve it could happen “to you”. It has happened and daily you can see what is coming down around your ears as your freedoms of expression and experience are laid aside through FORCE. This is taking place all around the globe before your eyes and still you fail to SEE and HEAR.

You as a people gave oath and contract to your children and their children that you have and hold a Constitution in the United States of America and hold a lamp of freedom and guidance to all the world to light the path to sovereignty of “man” and freedom to the oppressed. You have lied, cheated and brought down that light into extinction and the world now calls the U.S.--“THE GREAT SATAN”. You have failed your progeny, your selves and your God--while you have sold away your nation for a pittance. If it were not so sad I would guess the Native Americans whom you thwarted and degraded are laughing in their hogans, even as you try to take away that which remains of theirs through your worthless and cheating treaties. You may think God has deserted YOU--forget it--YOU deserted GOD long, long ago. “If you can and do do things of ungodly horror against another, so shall it come to pass that ye shall reap of the same reward tenfold”--and thus sayeth the Lord. Well, I’d say it’s coming back now as you read the pages of Plans and manipulations intended to bring you into bondage. I’d say, in the similar words of Ross Perot: You are in deep doo-doo voo-doo.

By the way, to you who find my terminology and language a bit harsh and unthinking as being of Godliness--I note that you DO understand it--enough to hide your eyes, your ears and turn away back unto the dark-side liars and cheats. Even your preconceived notions about religion and God are lies and you still hold to them like super-glue to the bonding into Hell. Hell has many descriptions, brothers and friends--MANY. The worst is the separation away from God in Light--to wallow in the darkness of evil intent and physical enslavement--over and over and over again. You ones think that I curse if I say “damn”--so be it. When I say “damn” I MEAN “DAMN”, and it would behoove you to attend the reason for the statement. I warn you--GOD DAMNS THE EVIL WHICH HAS BROUGHT HIS MOST WONDROUS CREATIONS INTO ENSLAVEMENT AND EVIL CORRUPTION--AND THE SWORD OF TRUTH SHALL CUT THROUGH LIKE NOTHING UPON THE EARTH BEFORE OR SINCE CREATION. To you who are prissy judges of all, especially beings and other human forms--you err!! You err very greatly, I might add! If you cannot understand a presentation from the MESSENGERS, then you certainly are not going to make the journey home as you THINK you have secured your goodly ticket under the “new” rules voted in by MAN. It is your business that which you “think” but I KNOW what is valid and what purchases the ticket “home”. So be it.

You who think you can accuse this one or that one--are wrong--go look in the mirror! You who say, “Well, those Jews....” and “those influxing Asians have done it” and “the politicians have done it...”--while never seeming to look unto the very RELIGIOUS goody liars who have misled you through your very souls to the brink of destruction--shall pay dearly for the oversight.

I would like to quote the Editor’s NOTE from a book gifted to my scribe: THE WISDOMKEEPERS. I often use reference to the Lakota’s and other tribes of native Americans and it was noted and we thank our observant friend for sharing:

THE WISDOMKEEPERS

EDITOR’S NOTE

Today, many Native American Elders must use English in order to communicate their wisdom to others. This is not easily done with a second language. One of the greatest difficulties regarding translation of Native languages into English lies with understanding the Native American concept of a First Cause.

Sakoiatisan, Wakan Tanka, Taiowa, and Kitche Manitou [I emphasize “Taiowa” because however the label has been expressed in lettering--it IS the first portion of Little Crow’s BIRTH-name. No quarrels are necessary, brother.] are, respectively, Iroquois, Lakota, Hopi, and Ojibwa tribal names that incorporate an understanding that all things are part of an incomprehensible totality which always was and always will be. Onondaga Chief Oren Lyons expresses this eloquently and simply by stating that all things are equal because all things are part of the whole.

Terms now commonly used such as God, Creator, and Great Spirit are not adequate names for Sakoiatisan, Wakan Tanka, Taiowa, and Kitche Manitou. That is the failure of the English language, not of the idea. God is a term that connotes an anthropomorphic being who dwells outside of humans and nature. Creator is a term that also assigns a male gender to the First Cause and does not take into consideration that there were other creators which sprang forth, such as Sotuknang of the Hopi creation account. These supernatural beings--who could create worlds and other forms of life--could be male and-or female (or “ALL”) Taiowa and Wakan Tanka are NOT male deities. These names represent the sum total of all things. It is what Black Elk described as the spirits of all things living together as one, but even spirit has it limitations--in English. The English term Great Spirit attempts to define what is incomprehensible.

Reading the words of the Wisdomkeepers, we must understand that these terms--God, Creator, and Great Spirit--have been used to convey the concept that all things are interrelated and an equal part of the whole: that we are like drops of rain which will one day return to the ocean, that we are like candles lit by the fire of the sun, forever part of it.

The Wisdomkeepers all share the idea that the four-legged and winged nations, the creeping and crawling ones, the plant and tree nations, and those who dwell among the stars, are descended from and are a part of this Great Holy Mystery. [Note the term “mystery” and not “mysticism”.]

White Deer of Autumn

* * *

The contents of this volume of writings will PROVE to you that only ONE document bears representation of equality, sovereignty and FREEDOM.

I can only ask and suggest that you study this book most carefully for you are about to lose the last shred of freedom for man of earth terra Shan. Salu.

GYEORGOS CERES ‘ATON’

CHAPTER 1

REC #2 CERES ‘ATONN

SUN., APRIL 11, 1993 11:51 A.M. YEAR 6, DAY 238

SUNDAY, APRIL 11, 1993

EASTER

Dharma, I am so sorry to have you have to not only not have holiday--but again, double up on the work-load--but we have to have this for you will be in court in Fresno tomorrow and this is the ONLY day we have to prepare for this edition of the paper--WE MUST HAVE THIS “CONSTITUTION” IN THIS ISSUE, PLEASE.

In the interest of space and time, however, I will ask you to simply copy the Constitution itself and we will forego comments and comparison with your “now” Constitution and the United Nations Charter and Protocols until next time.

Please don’t leave me, chela, as we offer this next verse to open the writing (readers, we have already been hours in writing of critical legal documents so Dharma Wokini is not in the most gracious and receptive mood for the many hours ahead today. Tomorrow on her way to Fresno, I ask her to ponder this verse sent to us from Fay and Sally Salter--by Ray F. Zaner:

TAKE TIME TO SEE

It seems so hard to understand

As I look out across the land

That all I view belongs to ME

I ought to take more time to see!

The distant hills and mountains high,

The rolling clouds and bright blue sky.

No one can take these views from me

As long as I have eyes to see.

A timid deer with haunting look

Who stands refreshed by yonder brook

Knows not that he belongs to me

Oh, what a thrilling sight to see!

The song of birds so gay and clear

That fill the morning air with cheer.

And fragrant flowers of every hue,

That stand erect bedecked with dew.

All these and more belong to me

If I but use my eyes to see.

When evening shadows gather nigh

And twinkling stars light up the sky,

I hear My Master say to me

“I made it all for you to see.”

My heart grows warm with faith and pride

To know that HE is by my side.

Salu

* * *

I ask that you readers follow the prior “comment” notations and read EVERY word with a question mark as we have done.

CONTINUATION:

THE NEWSTATES CONSTITUTION

(Already in use even though unratified.)

ARTICLE IV

THE PLANNING BRANCH

SECTION 1. There shall be a Planning Branch to formulate and administer plans and to prepare budgets for the uses of expected income in pursuit of policies formulated by the processes provided herein.

SECTION 2. There shall be a National Planning Board of fifteen members appointed by the President; the first members shall have terms designated by the President of one to fifteen years, thereafter one shall be appointed each year; the President shall appoint a Chairman who shall serve for fifteen years unless removed by him.

SECTION 3. The Chairman shall appoint, and shall supervise, a planning administrator, together with such deputies as may be agreed to by the Board.

SECTION 4. The Chairman shall present to the Board six and twelve year development plans prepared by the planning staff. They shall be revised each year after public hearings, and finally in the year before they are to take effect. They shall be submitted to the President on the fourth Tuesday in July for transmission to the Senate on September 1st with his comments.

If members of the Board fail to approve the budget proposals by the forwarding date, the Chairman shall nevertheless make submission to the President with notations of reservation by such members. The President shall transmit this proposal, with his comments, to the House of Representatives on September 1.

SECTION 5. It shall be recognized that the six and twelve year development plans represent national intentions tempered by the appraisal of possibilities. The twelve-year plan shall be a general estimate of probable progress, both governmental and private; the six-year plan shall be more specific as to estimated income and expenditure and shall take account of necessary revisions.

The purpose shall be to advance, through every agency of government, the excellence of national life. It shall be the further purpose to anticipate innovations, to estimate their impact, to assimilate them into existing institutions, and to moderate deleterious effects on the environment and on society.

The six and twelve year plans shall be disseminated for discussion and the opinions expressed shall be considered in the formulation of plans for each succeeding year with special attention to detail in proposing the budget.

SECTION 6. For both plans an extension of one year into the future shall be made each year and the estimates for all other years shall be revised accordingly. For nongovernmental activities the estimate of developments shall be calculated to indicate the need for enlargement or restriction.

SECTION 7. If there be objection by the President or the Senate to the six or twelve year plans, they shall be returned for restudy and resubmission. If there still be differences, and if the President and the Senate agree, they shall prevail. If they do not agree, the Senate shall prevail and the plan shall be revised accordingly.

SECTION 8. The Newstates, on June 1, shall submit proposals for development to be considered for inclusion in those of the Newstates of America. Researches and administration shall be delegated, when convenient, to planning agencies of the Newstates.

SECTION 9. There shall be submissions from private individuals or from organized associations affected with a public interest, as defined by the Board. They shall report intentions to expand, or contract, estimates of production and demand, probable uses of resources, numbers expected to be employed, and other essential information.

SECTION 10. The Planning Branch shall make and have custody of official maps, and these shall be documents of reference for future developments both public and private; on them the location of facilities, with extension indicated, and the intended use of all areas shall be marked out.

Official maps shall also be maintained by the planning agencies of the Newstates, and in matters not exclusively national the National Planning Board may rely on these.

Undertakings in violation of official designation shall be at the risk of the venturer, and there shall be no recourse; but losses from designations after acquisition shall be recoverable in actions before the Court of Claims.

SECTION 11. The Planning Branch shall have available to it funds equal to one-half of one percent of the approved national budget (not including debt services or payments from trust funds). They shall be held by the Chancellor of Financial Affairs and expended according to rules approved by the Board; but funds not expended within six years shall be available for other uses.

SECTION 12. Allocations may be made for the planning agencies of the Newstates; but only the maps and plans of the National Board, or those approved by them, shall have status at law.

SECTION 13. In making plans, there shall be due regard to the interests of other nations and such cooperation with their intentions as may be approved by the Board.

SECTION 14. There may also be cooperation with international agencies and such contributions to their work as are not disapproved by the President.

ARTICLE V

THE PRESIDENCY

SECTION 1. The President of the Newstates of America shall be the head of government, shaper of its commitments, expositor of its policies, and supreme commander of its protective forces; shall have one term of nine years, unless rejected by 60 percent of the electorate after three years; shall take care that the nation’s resources are estimated and are apportioned to its more exigent needs; shall recommend such plans, legislation, and action as may be necessary; and shall address the legislators each year on the state of the nation, calling upon them to do their part for the general good.

SECTION 2. There shall be two Vice-Presidents elected with the President; at the time of taking office the President shall designate one Vice-President to supervise internal affairs; and one to be deputy for general affairs. [C: I cannot pass this one without calling special attention to what you have RIGHT NOW in the form of Hillary and Al Gore. You already HAVE THE TWO!] The deputy for general affairs shall succeed if the presidency be vacated; the Vice-President for internal affairs shall be second in succession. If either Vice-President shall die or be incapacitated, the President, with the consent of the Senate, shall appoint a successor. Vice-Presidents shall serve during an extended term with such assignments as the President may make.

If the presidency fall vacant through the disability of both Vice-Presidents, the Senate shall elect successors from among its members to serve until the next general election.

With the Vice-Presidents and other officials the President shall see to it that the laws are faithfully executed and shall pay attention to the findings and recommendations of the Planning Board, the National Regulatory Board, and the Watchkeeper in formulating national policies.

SECTION 3. Responsible to the Vice-President for General Affairs there shall be Chancellors of External, Financial, Legal, and Military Affairs.

The Chancellor of External Affairs shall assist in conducting relations with other nations.

The Chancellor of Financial Affairs shall supervise the nation’s financial and monetary systems, regulating its capital markets and credit-issuing institutions as they may be established by law; and this shall include lending institutions for operations in other nations or in cooperation with them, except that treaties may determine their purposes and standards.

The Chancellor of Legal Affairs shall advise governmental agencies and represent them before the courts.

The Chancellor of Military Affairs shall act for the presidency in disposing all armed forces except militia commanded by governors; but these shall be available for national service at the President’s convenience.

Except in declared emergency, the deployment of forces in far waters or in other nations without their consent shall be notified in advance to a national security committee of the Senate hereinafter provided.

SECTION 4. Responsible to the Vice-President for Internal Affairs there shall be chancellors of such departments as the President may find necessary for performing the services of government and are not rejected by a two-thirds vote when the succeeding budget is considered.

SECTION 5. Candidates for the presidency and the vice-presidencies shall be natural-born citizens. Their suitability may be questioned by the Senate within ten days of their nomination, and if two-thirds of the whole agree, they shall be ineligible and a nominating convention shall be reconvened. At the time of his nomination no candidate shall be a member of the Senate and none shall be on active service in the armed forces or a senior civil servant.

SECTION 6. The President may take leave because of illness or for an interval of relief, and the Vice-President in charge of General Affairs shall act. The President may resign if the Senate agree; and, if the term shall have more than two years to run, the Overseer shall arrange for a special election for President and Vice-President.

SECTION 7. The Vice-Presidents may be directed to perform such ministerial duties as the President may find convenient; but their instructions shall be of record, and their actions shall be taken as his deputy.

SECTION 8. Incapacitation may be established without concurrence of the president by a three-quarters vote of the Senate, whereupon a successor shall become Acting President until the disability be declared, by a similar vote, to be ended or to have become permanent. Similarly the other Vice-President shall succeed if a predecessor die or be disabled. Special elections, in these contingencies, may be required by the Senate.

Acting Presidents may appoint deputies, unless the Senate object, to assume their duties until the next election.

SECTION 9. The Vice-Presidents, together with such other officials as the President may designate from time to time, may constitute a cabinet or council; but this shall not include officials of other branches.

SECTION 10. Treaties or agreements with other nations, negotiated under the President’s authority, shall be in effect unless objected to by a majority of the Senate within ninety days. If they are objected to, the President may resubmit and the Senate reconsider. If a majority still object, the Senate shall prevail.

SECTION 11. All others, except those of other branches, shall be appointed and may be removed by the President. A majority of the Senate may object to appointments within sixty days, and alternative candidates shall be offered until it agrees.

SECTION 12. The President shall notify the Planning Board and the House of Representatives, on the fourth Tuesday in June, what the maximum allowable expenditures for the ensuing fiscal year shall be.

The President may determine to make expenditures less than provided in appropriations; but, except in declared emergency, none shall be made in excess of appropriations. Reduction shall be because of changes in requirements and shall not be such as to impair the integrity of budgetary procedures.

SECTION 13. There shall be a Public Custodian, appointed by the President and removable by him, who shall have charge of properties belonging to the government, but not allocated to specific agencies, who shall administer common public services, shall have charge of building construction and rentals, and shall have such other duties as may be designated by the President or the designated Vice-Presidents.

SECTION 14. There shall be an Intendant responsible to the President who shall supervise Offices for Intelligence and Investigation; also an Office of Emergency Organization with the duty of providing plans and procedures for such contingencies as can be anticipated.

The Intendant shall also charter nonprofit corporations (or foundations), unless the President shall object, determined by him to be for useful public purposes. Such corporations shall be exempt from taxation but shall conduct no profitmaking enterprises.

SECTION 15. The Intendant shall also be a counselor for the coordination of scientific and cultural experiments, and for studies within the government and elsewhere, and for this purpose shall employ such assistance as may be found necessary.

SECTION 16. Offices for other purposes may be established and may be discontinued by presidential order within the funds allocated in the procedures or appropriation.

ARTICLE VI

THE LEGISLATIVE BRANCH

(The Senate and the House of Representatives)

A. THE SENATE

SECTION 1. There shall be a Senate with membership as follows: If they so desire, former Presidents, Vice-Presidents, Principal Justices, Overseers, Chairmen of the Planning and Regulatory Boards, Governors having had more than seven years service, and unsuccessful candidates for the presidency and vice-presidency who have received at least 30 percent of the vote. To be appointed by the President, three persons who have been Chancellors, two officials from the civil services, two officials from the diplomatic services, two senior military officers, also one person from a panel of three elected in a process approved by the overseer, by each of twelve such groups or associations as the President may recognize from time to time to be nationally representative, but none shall be a political or religious group, no individual selected shall have been paid by any private interest to influence government, and any association objected to by the Senate shall not be recognized. Similarly, to be appointed by the Principal Justice, two persons distinguished in public law and two former members of the High Courts or the Judicial Council. Also, to be elected by the House of Representatives, three members who have served six or more years.

Vacancies shall be filled as they occur.

SECTION 2. Membership shall continue for life, except that absences not provided for by rule shall constitute retirement, and that Senators may retire voluntarily.

SECTION 3. The Senate shall elect as presiding officer a Convener who shall serve for two years, when his further service may be discontinued by a majority vote. Other officers, including a Deputy, shall be appointed by the Convener unless the Senate shall object.

SECTION 4. The Senate shall meet each year on the second Tuesday in July and shall be in continuous session, but may adjourn to the call of the Convener. A quorum shall be more than three-fifths of the whole membership.

SECTION 5. The Senate shall consider, and return within thirty days, all measures approved by the House of Representatives (except the annual budget). Approval or disapproval shall be by a majority vote of those present. Objection shall stand unless the House of Representatives shall overcome it by a majority vote plus one; if no return be made, approval by the House of Representatives shall be final.

For consideration of laws passed by the House of Representatives or for other purposes, the Convener may appoint appropriate committees.

SECTION 6. The Senate may ask advice from the Principal Justice concerning the constitutionality of measures before it; and if this be done, the time for return to the House of Representatives may extend to ninety days.

SECTION 7. If requested, the Senate may advise the President on matters of public interest; or, if not requested, by resolution approved by two-thirds of those present. There shall be a special duty to expressions of concern during party conventions and commitments made during campaigns; and if these be neglected, to remind the President and the House of Representatives that these undertakings are to be considered.

SECTION 8. In time of present or prospective danger caused by cataclysm, by attack, or by insurrection, the Senate may declare a national emergency and may authorize the President to take appropriate action. If the Senate be dispersed, and no quorum available, the President may proclaim the emergency, and may terminate it unless the Senate shall have acted. If the President be not available, and the circumstances extreme, the senior serving member of the presidential succession may act until a quorum assembles.

SECTION 9. The Senate may also define and declare a limited emergency in time of prospective danger, or of local or regional disaster, or if an extraordinary advantage be anticipated. It shall be considered by the House of Representatives within three days and, unless disapproved, may extend for a designated period and for a limited area before renewal.

Extraordinary expenditures during emergency may be approved, without regard to usual budget procedures, by the House of Representatives with the concurrence of the President.

SECTION 10. The Senate, at the beginning of each session, shalt select three of its members to constitute a national Security Committee to be consulted by the President in emergencies requiring the deployment of the armed forces abroad. If the Committee dissent from the President’s proposal, it shall report to the Senate, whose decision shall be final.

SECTION 11. The Senate shall elect, or may remove, a national Watchkeeper, and shall oversee, through a standing committee, a Watchkeeping Service conducted according to rules formulated for their approval.

With the assistance of an appropriate staff the Watchkeeper shall gather and organize information concerning the adequacy, competency, and integrity of governmental agencies and their personnel, as well as their continued usefulness; and shall also suggest the need for new or expanded services, making report concerning any agency of the deleterious effect of its activities on citizens or on the environment.

The Watchkeeper shall entertain petitions for the redress of grievances and shall advise the appropriate agencies if there be need for action.

For all these purposes, personnel may be appointed, investigations made, witnesses examined, post audits made, and information required.

The Convener shall present the Watchkeeper’s findings to the Senate, and if it be judged to be in the public interest, they shall be made public or, without being made public, sent to the appropriate agency for its guidance and such action as may be needed. On recommendation of the Watchkeeper the Senate may initiate corrective measures to be voted on by the House of Representatives within thirty days. When approved by a majority and not vetoed by the President, they shall become law.

For the Watchkeeping Service one-quarter of one percent of individual net taxable incomes shall be held by the Chancellor of Financial Affairs; but amounts not expended in any fiscal year shall be available for general use.

B. THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES

SECTION 1. The House of Representatives shall be the original lawmaking body of the Newstates of America.

SECTION 2. It shall convene each year on the second Tuesday in July and shall remain in continuous session except that it may adjourn to the call of a Speaker, elected by a majority vote from among the Representatives-at-large, who shall be its presiding officer.

SECTION 3. It shall be a duty to implement the provisions of this constitution and, in legislature, to be guided by them.

SECTION 4. Party leaders and their deputies shall be chosen by caucus at the beginning of each session.

SECTION 5. Standing and temporary committees shall be selected as follows:

Committees dealing with the calendaring and management of bills shall have a majority of members nominated to party caucuses by the Speaker; other members shall be nominated by minority leaders. Membership shall correspond to the parties‟ proportions at the last election. If nominations be not approved by a majority of the caucus, the Speaker of the minority leaders shall nominate others until a majority shall approve.

Members of other committees shall be chosen by party caucus in proportion to the results of the last election. Chairmen shall be elected annually from among at-large-members.

Bills referred to committees shall be returned to the House with recommendations within sixty days unless extension be voted by the House.

In all committee actions names of those voting for and against shall be recorded.

No committee chairman may serve longer than six years.

SECTION 6. Approved legislation, not objected to by the Senate within the allotted time, shall be presented to the President for his approval or disapproval. If the President disapprove, and three-quarters of the House membership still approve, it shall become law. The names of those voting for and against shall be recorded. Bills not returned within eleven days shall become law.

SECTION 7. The President may have thirty days to consider measures approved by the House unless they shall have been submitted twelve days previous to adjournment.

SECTION 8. The House shall consider promptly the annual budget; if there still be objection by a two-thirds majority, the House shall prevail. Objection must be by whole title; titles not objected to when voted on shall constitute appropriation.

The budget for the fiscal year shall be in effect on January 1. Titles not yet acted on shall be as in the former budget until action be completed.

SECTION 9. It shall be the duty of the House to make laws concerning taxes.

1. For their laying and collection:

a. They shall be uniform, and shall not be retroactive.

b. Except such as may be authorized by law to be laid by Authorities, or by the Newstates, all collections shall be made by a national revenue agency. This shall include collections for trust funds hereinafter authorized.

c. Except for corporate levies to be held in the national Sharing Fund, hereinafter authorized, taxes may be collected only from individuals and only from incomes; but there may be withholding from current incomes.

d. To assist in the maintenance of economic stability, the President may be authorized to alter rates by executive order.

e. They shall be imposed on profitmaking enterprises owned or conducted by religious establishments or other nonprofit organizations.

f. There shall be none on food, medicines, residential rentals, or commodities or services designated by law as necessities; and there shall be no double taxation.

g. None shall be levied for registering ownership or transfer of property.

2. For expenditure from revenues:

a. For the purposes detailed in the annual budget unless objection be made by the procedure prescribed herein.

b. For such other purposes as the House may indicate and require the Planning Board to include in revision of the budget; but, except in declared emergency, the total may not exceed the President’s estimate of available funds.

3. For fixing the percentage of net corporate taxable incomes to be paid into a National Sharing Fund to be held in the custody of the Chancellor of Financial Affairs and made available for such welfare and environmental purposes as are authorized by law.

4. To provide for the regulation of commerce with other nations and among the Newstates, Possessions, Territories; or, as shall be mutually agreed, with other organized governments; but exports shall not be taxed; and imports shall not be taxed except on recommendation of the President at rates whose allowable variations shall have been fixed by law. There shall be no quotas, and no nations favored by special rates, unless by special acts requiring two-thirds majorities.

5. To establish, or provide for the establishment of, institutions for the safekeeping of savings, for the gathering and distribution of capital, for the issuance of credit, for regulating the coinage of money, for controlling the media of exchange, and for stabilizing prices; but such institutions, when not public or semipublic, shall be regarded as affected with the public interest and shall be supervised by the Chancellor of Financial Affairs.

6. To establish institutions for insurance against risks and liabilities for communication, transportation, and others commonly used and necessary for public convenience.

7. To assist in the maintenance of world order, and, for this purpose, when the President shall recommend, to vest jurisdiction in international legislative, judicial, or administrative agencies.

8. To develop with other peoples, and for the benefit of all, the resources of space, of other bodies in the universe, and of the seas beyond twelve miles from low-water shores unless treaties shall provide other limits.

9. To assist other peoples who have not attained satisfactory levels of well-being; to delegate the administration of funds for assistance, whenever possible, to international agencies; and to invest in or contribute to the furthering of development in other parts of the world.

10. To assure, or to assist in assuring, adequate and equal facilities for education; for training in occupations citizens may be fitted to pursue; and to reeducate or retrain those whose occupations may become obsolete.

11. To establish or to assist institutions devoted to higher education, to research, or to technical training.

12. To establish and maintain, or assist in maintaining, libraries, archives, monuments, and other places of historic interest.

13. To assist in the advancement of sciences and technologies; and to encourage cultural activities.

14. To conserve natural resources by purchase, by withdrawal from use, or by regulation; to provide, or to assist in providing, facilities for recreation; to establish and maintain parks, forests, wilderness areas, wetlands, and prairies; to improve streams and other waters; to ensure the purity of air and water; to control the erosion of soils; and to provide for all else necessary for the protection and common use of the national heritage.

15. To acquire property and improvements for public use at costs to be fixed, if necessary, by the Court of Claims.

16. To prevent the stoppage or hindrance of governmental procedures, or other activities affected with a public interest as defined by law, by reason of disputes between employers and employees, or for other reasons, and for this purpose to provide for conclusive arbitration if adequate provision for collective bargaining fail. From such findings there may be appeal to the Court of Arbitration Review; but such proceedings may not stay the acceptance of findings.

17. To support an adequate civil service for the performance of such duties as may be designated by administrators; and for this purpose to refrain from interference with the processes of appointment or placement, asking advice or testimony before committees only with the consent of appropriate superiors.

18. To provide for the maintenance of armed forces.

19. To enact such measures as will assist families in making adjustment to future conditions, using estimates concerning population and resources made by the Planning Board.

20. to vote within ninety days on such measures as the President may designate as urgent.

* * *

TO BE CONTINUED.

CHAPTER 2

REC #3 CERES ‘ATONN

SUN., APRIL 11, 1993 1:52 P.M. YEAR 6, DAY 238

SUNDAY, APRIL 11, 1993

EASTER

NEWSTATES CONSTITUTION

CONTINUATION OF:

ARTICLE VII

THE REGULATORY BRANCH

SECTION 1. There shall be a Regulatory Branch, and there shall be a national Regulator chosen by majority vote of the Senate and removable by a two-thirds vote of that body. His term shall be seven years, and he shall make and administer rules for the conduct of all economic enterprises.

The Regulatory Branch shall have such agencies as the Board may find necessary and are not disapproved by law.

SECTION 2. The Regulatory Board shall consist of seventeen members recommended to the Senate by the Regulator. Unless rejected by majority vote they shall act with the Regulator as a lawmaking body for industry.

They shall initially have terms of one to seventeen years, one being replaced each year and serving for seventeen years. They shall be compensated and shall have no other occupation.

SECTION 3. Under procedures approved by the Board, the Regulator shall charter all corporations or enterprises except those exempted because of size or other characteristics, or those supervised by the Chancellor of Financial Affairs, or by the Intendant, or those whose activities are confined to one Newstate.

Charters shall describe proposed activities, and departure from these shall require amendment on penalty of revocation. For this purpose there shall be investigation and enforcement services under the direction of the Regulator.

SECTION 4. Chartered enterprises in similar industries or occupations may organize joint Authorities. These may formulate among themselves codes to ensure fair competition, meet external costs, set standards for quality and service, expand trade, increase production, eliminate waste, and assist in standardization. Authorities may maintain for common use services for research and communication; but membership shall be open to all eligible enterprises. Non-members shall be required to maintain the same standards as those prescribed for members.

SECTION 5. Authorities shall have governing committees of five, two being appointed by the Regulator to represent the public. They shall serve as he may determine; they shall be compensated; and he shall take care that there be no conflicts of interest. The Board may approve or prescribe rules for the distribution of profits to stockholders, allowable amounts of working capital, and reserves. Costing and all other practices affecting the public interest shall be monitored.

All codes shall be subject to review by the Regulator with his board.

SECTION 6. Member enterprises of an Authority shall be exempt from other regulation.

SECTION 7. The Regulator, with his Board, shall fix standards and procedures for mergers of enterprises or the acquisition of some by others; and these shall be in effect unless rejected by the Court of Administrative Settlements. The purpose shall be to encourage adaptation to change and to further approved intentions for the nation.

SECTION 8. The charters of enterprises may be revoked and Authorities may be dissolved by the Regulator, with the concurrence of the Board, if they restrict the production of goods and services, or controls of their prices; also if external costs are not assessed to their originators or if the ecological impacts of their operations are deleterious.

SECTION 9. Operations extending abroad shall conform to policies notified to the Regulator by the President; and he shall restrict or control such activities as appear to injure the national interest.

SECTION 10. The Regulator shall make rules for and shall supervise marketplaces for goods and services; but this shall not include security exchanges regulated by the Chancellor of Financial Affairs.

SECTION 11. Designation of enterprises affected with a public interest, rules for conduct of enterprises and of their Authorities, and other actions of the Regulator or of the Boards may be appealed to the Court of Administrative Settlements, whose judgments shall be informed by the intention to establish fairness to consumers and competitors and stability in economic affairs.

SECTION 12. Responsible also to the Regulator, there shall be an Operations Commission appointed by the Regulator, unless the Senate object, for the supervision of enterprises owned in whole or in part by government. The commission shall choose its chairman, and he shall be the executive head of a supervisory staff. He may require reports, conduct investigations, and make rules and recommendations concerning surpluses or deficits, the absorption of external costs, standards of service, and rates or prices charged for services or goods.

Each enterprise shall have a director, chosen by and removable by the Commission; and he shall conduct its affairs in accordance with standards fixed by the Commission.

ARTICLE VIII

THE JUDICIAL BRANCH

SECTION 1. There shall be a Principal Justice of the Newstates for America; a Judicial Council; and a Judicial Assembly. There shall also be a Supreme Court and a High Court of Appeals; also Courts of Claims, Rights and Duties, Administrative Review, Arbitration Settlements, Tax Appeals, and Appeals from Watchkeeper’s Findings. There shall be Circuit Courts to be of first resort in suits brought under national law; and they shall hear appeals from courts of the Newstates.

Other courts may be established by law on recommendation of the Principal Justice with the Judicial Council.

SECTION 2. The Principal Justice shall preside over the judicial system, shall appoint the members of all national courts, and, unless the Judicial Council object, shall make its rules; also, through an Administrator, supervise its operations.

SECTION 3. The Judicial Assembly shall consist of Circuit Court Judges, together with those of the High Courts of the Newstates of America and those of the highest courts of the Newstates. It shall meet annually, or at the call of the Principal Justice, to consider the state of the Judiciary and such other matters as may be laid before it.

It shall also meet at the call of the Convener to nominate three candidates for the principal Justiceship whenever a vacancy shall occur. From these nominees the Senate shall choose the one having the most votes.

SECTION 4. The Principal Justice, unless the Senate object to any, shall appoint a Judicial Council of five members to serve during his incumbency. He shall designate a senior member who shall preside in his absence.

It shall be the duty of the Council, under the direction of the Principal Justice, to study the courts in operation, to prepare codes of ethics to be observed by members, and to suggest changes in procedure. The Council may ask the advice of the Judicial Assembly.

It shall also be a duty of the Council, as hereinafter provided, to suggest Constitutional amendments when they appear to be necessary; and it shall also draft revisions if they shall be required. Further it shall examine, and from time to time cause to be revised, civil and criminal codes; these, when approved by the Judicial Assembly, shall be in effect throughout the nation.

SECTION 5. The Principal Justice shall have a term of eleven years; but if at any time the incumbent resign or be disabled from continuing in office, as may be determined by the Senate, replacement shall be by the senior member of the Judicial Council until a new selection be made. After six years the Assembly may provide, by a two-thirds vote, for discontinuance in office, and a successor shall then be chosen.

SECTION 6. The Principal Justice may suspend members of any court for incapacity or violation of rules; and the separation shall be final if a majority of the Council agree.

SECTION 7. A presiding judge may decide, with the concurrence of the senior judge, that there may be pretrial proceedings, that criminal trials shall be conducted by either investigatory or adversary proceedings, and whether there shall be a jury and what the number of jurors shall be; but investigatory proceedings shall require a bench of three.

SECTION 8. In deciding on the concordance of statutes with the Constitution, the Supreme Court shall return to the House of Representatives such as it cannot construe. If the House fail to make return within ninety days the Court may interpret.

SECTION 9. The Principal Justice, or the President, may grant pardons or reprieves.

SECTION 10. The High Courts shall have thirteen members; but nine members, chosen by their senior justices from time to time, shall constitute a court. The justices on leave shall be subject to recall.

Other courts shall have nine members; but seven, chosen by their senior, shall constitute a court.

All shall be in continuous session except for recesses approved by the Principal Justice.

SECTION 11. The Principal Justice, with the Council, may advise the Senate, when requested, concerning the appropriateness of measures approved by the House of Representatives; and may also advise the President, when requested, on matters he may refer for consultation.

SECTION 12. It shall be for other branches to accept and to enforce judicial decrees.

SECTION 13. The High Court of Appeals may select applications for further consideration by the Supreme Court of decisions reached by other courts, including those of the Newstates. If it agree that there be a constitutional issue it may make preliminary judgment to be reviewed without hearing, and finally, by the Supreme Court.

SECTION 14. The Supreme Court may decide:

a. Whether, in litigation coming to it on appeal, constitutional provisions have been violated or standards have not been met.

b. On the application of constitutional provisions to suits involving the Newstates.

c. Whether international law, as recognized in treaties, United Nations agreements, or arrangements with other nations, has been ignored or violated.

d. Other causes involving the interpretation of constitutional provisions; except that in holding any branch to have exceeded its powers the decision shall be suspended until the Judicial Court shall have determined whether, in order to avoid confrontation, procedures for amendment of the Constitution are appropriate.

If amendatory proceedings are instituted, decision shall await the outcome.

SECTION 15. The Courts of the Newstates shall have initial jurisdiction in cases arising under their laws except those involving the Newstate itself or those reserved for national courts by a rule of the Principal Justice with the Judicial council.

ARTICLE IX

GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 1. Qualifications for participation in democratic procedures as a citizen, and eligibility for office, shall be subject to repeated study and redefinition; but any change in qualification or eligibility shall become effective only if not disapproved by the Congress.

For this purpose a permanent Citizenship and Qualifications Commission shall be constituted, four members to be appointed by the President, three by the Convener of the Senate, three by the Speaker of the House, and three by the Principal Justice. Vacancies shall be filled as they occur. The members shall choose a chairman; they shall have suitable assistants and accommodations; and they may have other occupations. Recommendations of the commission shall be presented to the President and shall be transmitted to the House of Representatives with comments. They shall have a preferred place on the calendar and, if approved shall be in effect.

SECTION 2. Areas necessary for the uses of government may be acquired at its valuation and may be maintained as the public interest may require. Such areas shall have self-government in matters of local concern.

SECTION 3. The President may negotiate for the acquisition of areas outside the Newstates of America, and, if the Senate approve, may provide for their organization as Possessions or Territories.

SECTION 4. The President may make agreements with other organized peoples for a relation other than full membership in the Newstates of America. They may become citizens and may participate in the selection of officials. They may receive assistance for their development or from the National Sharing Fund if they conform to its requirements; and they may serve in civilian or military services, but only as volunteers. They shall be represented in the House of Representatives by members elected at large, their number proportional to their constituencies; but each shall have at least one; and each shall in the same way choose one permanent member of the Senate.

SECTION 5. The President, the Vice-Presidents, and members of the legislative houses shall in all cases except treason, felony, and breach of the peace be exempt from penalty for anything they may say while pursuing public duties; but the Judicial Council may make restraining rules.

SECTION 6. Except as otherwise provided by this Constitution, each legislative house shall establish its requirement for membership and may make rules for the conduct of members, including conflicts of interest, providing its own disciplines for their infraction.

SECTION 7. No Newstate shall interfere with officials of the Newstates of America in the performance of their duties, and all shall give full faith and credit to the Acts of other Newstates and of the Newstates of America.

SECTION 8. Public funds shall be expended only as authorized in this Constitution.

ARTICLE X

GOVERNMENTAL ARRANGEMENTS

SECTION 1. Offices of the Newstates of America shall be those named in this Constitution, including those of the legislative houses and others authorized by law to be appointed; they shall be compensated, and none may have other paid occupation unless they be excepted by law; none shall occupy more than one position in government; and no gift or favor shall be accepted if in any way related to official duty.

No income from former employments or associations shall continue for their benefits; but their properties may be put in trust and managed without their intervention during continuance in office. Hardships under this rule may be considered by the Court of Rights and Duties, and exceptions may be made with due regard to the general intention.

SECTION 2. The President, the Vice-Presidents, and the Principal Justice shall have households appropriate to their duties. The President, the Vice-Presidents, the Principal Justice, the Chairman of the Planning Board, the Regulator, the Watchkeeper, and the Overseer shall have salaries fixed by law and continued for life; but if they become members of the Senate, they shall have senatorial compensation and shall conform to senatorial requirements.

Justices of the High Courts shall have no term; and their salaries shall be two-thirds that of the Principal Justice; they and members of the Judicial Council, unless they shall have become Senators, shall be permanent members of the Judiciary and shall be available for assignment by the Principle Justice.

Salaries for members of the Senate shall be the same as for Justices of the High Court of Appeals.

SECTION 3. Unless otherwise provided herein, officials designated by the head of a branch as sharers in policymaking may be appointed by him with the president’s concurrence and unless the Senate shall object.

SECTION 4. There shall be administrators:

a. for executive offices and official households, appointed by authority of the President;

b. for the national courts, appointed by the Principal Justice;

c. for the Legislative Branch, selected by a committee of members from each house (chosen by the Convener and the Speaker), three from the House of Representatives and four from the Senate.

Appropriations shall be made to them; but those for the presidency shall not be reduced during his term unless with his consent; and those for the Judicial Branch shall not be reduced during five years succeeding their determination, unless with the consent of the Principal Justice.

SECTION 5. The fiscal year shall be the same as the calendar year, with new appropriations available at its beginning.

SECTION 6. There shall be an Officials‟ Protective Service to guard the President, the Vice-Presidents, the Principal Justice, and other officials whose safety may be at hazard; and there shall be a Protector appointed by and responsible to a standing committee of the Senate. Protected officials shall be guided by procedures approved by the committee.

The service, at the request of the Political Overseer, may extend its protection to candidates for office; or to other officials, if the committee so decide.

SECTION 7. A suitable contingency fund shall be made available to the President for purposes defined by law.

SECTION 8. The Senate shall try officers of government other than legislators when such officers are impeached by a two-thirds vote of the House of Representatives for conduct prejudicial to the public interest. If Presidents or Vice-Presidents are to be tried, the Senate, as constituted, shall conduct the trial. Judgments shall not extend beyond removal from office and disqualification for holding further office; but the convicted official shall be liable to further prosecution.

SECTION 9. Members of legislative houses may be impeached by the Judicial Council; but for trials it shall be enlarged to seventeen by Justices of the High Courts appointed by the Principal Justice. If convicted, members shall be expelled and then ineligible for future public office; and they shall also be liable for trial as citizens.

ARTICLE XI

AMENDMENT

SECTION 1. It being the special duty of the Judicial Council to formulate and suggest amendments to this Constitution, it shall, from time to time, make proposals, through the Principal Justice, to the Senate. The Senate, if it approve, and if the President agree, shall instruct the Overseer to arrange at the next national election for submission of the amendment to the electorate. If not disapproved by a majority, it shall become part of this Constitution. If rejected, it may be restudied and a new proposal submitted.

It shall be the purpose of the amending procedure to correct deficiencies in the Constitution, to extend it when new responsibilities require, and to make government responsible to needs of the people, making use of advances in managerial competence and establishing security and stability; also to preclude changes in the Constitution resulting from interpretation.

SECTION 2. When this Constitution shall have been in effect for twenty-five years the Overseer shall ask, by referendum, whether a new Constitution shall be prepared. If a majority so decide, the Council, making use of such advice as may be available, and consulting those who have made complaint, shall prepare a new draft for submission at the next election. If not disapproved by a majority it shall be in effect. If disapproved it shall be redrafted and resubmitted with such changes as may be then appropriate to the circumstances, and it shall be submitted to the voters at the following election.

If not disapproved by a majority it shall be in effect. If disapproved it shall be restudied and resubmitted.

ARTICLE XII

TRANSITION

SECTION 1. The President is authorized to assume such powers, make such appointments, and use such funds as are necessary to make this Constitution effective as soon as possible after acceptance by a referendum he may initiate.

SECTION 2. Such members of the Senate as may be at once available shall convene and, if at least half, shall constitute sufficient membership while others are being added. They shall appoint an Overseer to arrange for electoral organization and elections for the offices of government; but the President and Vice-Presidents shall serve out their terms and then become members of the Senate. At that time the presidency shall be constituted as provided in this Constitution.

SECTION 3. Until each indicated change in the government shall have been complete the provisions of the existing Constitution and the organs of government shall be in effect.

SECTION 4. All operations of the national government shall cease as they are replaced by those authorized under this Constitution.

The President shall determine when replacement is complete.

The President shall cause to be constituted an appropriate commission to designate existing laws inconsistent with the Constitution, and they shall be void; also the commission shall assist the President and the legislative houses in the formulating of such laws as may be consistent with the Constitution and necessary to its implementation.

SECTION 5. For establishing Newstates‟ boundaries a commission of thirteen, appointed by the President, shall make recommendations within one year. For this purpose the members may take advice and commission studies concerning resources, population, transportation, communication, economic and social arrangements, and such other conditions as may be significant. The President shall transmit the commission’s report to the Senate. After entertaining, if convenient, petitions for revision, the Senate shall report whether the recommendations are satisfactory but the President shall decide whether they shall be accepted or shall be returned for revision.

Existing states shall not be divided unless metropolitan areas extending over more than one state are to be included in one Newstate, or unless other compelling circumstances exist; and each Newstate shall possess harmonious regional characteristics.

The Commission shall continue while the Newstates make adjustments among themselves and shall have jurisdiction in disputes arising among them.

SECTION 6. Constitutions of the Newstates shall be established as arranged by the Judicial Council and the Principal Justice.

These procedures shall be as follows: Constitutions shall be drafted by the highest courts of the Newstates. There shall then be a convention of one hundred delegates chosen in special elections in a procedure approved by the Overseer. If the Constitution be not rejected, the Principal Justice, advised by the Judicial Council, shall promulgate a Constitution and initiate revisions to be submitted for approval at a time he shall appoint. If it again be rejected he shall promulgate another, taking account of objections, and it shall be in effect. A Constitution, once in effect, shall be valid for twenty-five years as herein provided.

SECTION 7. Until Governors and legislatures of the Newstates are seated, their governments shall continue, except that the President may appoint temporary Governors to act as executive until succeeded by those regularly elected. These Governors shall succeed to the executive functions of the states as they become one of the Newstates of America.

SECTION 8. The indicated appointments, elections, and other arrangements shall be made with all deliberate speed.

SECTION 9. The first Judicial Assembly for selecting a register for candidates for the Principal Justiceship of the Newstates of America shall be called by the incumbent Chief Justice immediately upon ratification.

SECTION 10. Newstates electing by referendum not to comply with recommendations of the Boundary Commission, as approved by the Senate, shall have deducted from taxes collected by the Newstates of America for transmission to them a percentage equal to the loss in efficiency from failure to comply.

Estimates shall be made by the Chancellor of Financial Affairs and approved by the President; but the deduction shall not be less than 7 percent.

SECTION 11. When this Constitution has been implemented the President may delete by proclamation appropriate parts of this article.

* * * * * * * * *

Well, friends--anyone who thinks you haven’t died and gone to Hell--just doesn’t see the facts. May GOD be with you sleeping prey. There is no mention of “we-the-people”, no mention of juries and trial by peers--there is nothing save the announcement of Monarchy Dictatorship--worsening with every article and section in sequence.

To you who wish to continue to call me “false” and of “Satan”--who might YOU be--you who allows such as this to come upon God’s perfection and the nations of your world which house your brothers and sisters? Indeed, indeed; may God please have mercy upon you sleeping lambs.

If you cannot determine what it is I see that you do not--GO BACK AND STUDY THIS DAMNED EDICT OF SLAVERY! SALU.

CHAPTER 3

REC #1 CERES ‘ATONN

MON., APRIL 12, 1993 9:19 A.M. YEAR 6, DAY 239

MONDAY, APRIL 12, 1993

OP. ED.: WHAT YOU DON’T KNOW IS GOING TO KILL YOU!!

HOW MANY OF YOU REALIZE THAT A GATHERING OF SOME OF THE MOST IMPORTANT SPEAKERS OF YOUR DAY ARE HOLDING A “SURVIVAL” SEMINAR IN LAS VEGAS THIS COMING WEEK-END? INDEED, GRITZ, SNEAD, MCALVANY, WILLIAMS, ETC., WILL OFFER YOU TRUTH. WHAT DO I THINK OF THEM? THEY ARE TRUTH-BRINGERS! WHAT DO THEY THINK OF ME? WHO CARES! TRUTH IS TRUTH IS TRUTH--AND YOU WILL DECIDE FROM THE “TRUTH” OR THE “LIES” WHICH WAY YOU WILL CHOOSE TO TRAVEL ON THIS FINAL STRETCH OF THE PLANET’S TRAVELS. MAY YOU BE WISE ENOUGH TO ASK GOD TO ASSIST YOU IN YOUR JOURNEY.

You may well believe that somehow things will “work out”--THEY WILL! But it is not going to be in the line of freedom, economic recovery or citizen “rights”.

How many of you are aware, this day, that the following things are taking place?

There is documentation that proves there were twice as many POWs in Asian control in the late 1970s as even reported by pretty good counters. The “stuff” is being buried and is now under “national security” restraint from bringing forth. But, it has slipped through, however, with normalization of relations with Vietnam--THEY ARE DEAD.

North Korea is not only building up nuclear weapons but fully intends to use them.

Vietnam is again under open siege from the Communists under the bloodiest assaults since the open warfare of the “Vietman War” by the Khymer Rouge.

TODAY: THE EMIR OF KUWAIT DISPATCHES A JET TO BRING BUSH, BAKER, BRADY AND SPOUSES, TO HIS COUNTRY AS HIS PERSONAL GUESTS! This is to attend agreements, oil rights arrangements and put them in the area close for secret meetings with Rabin of Israel who is with Mubarek in Egypt. Funny “other thing”--Gorbachev is running around in the U.S. and Canada this week, also--but will be available for meetings in the Middle East WITH THE ABOVE. Yeltsin is also awaiting summons to these meetings.

How many of you know that Scowcroft was given one of the most influential and well-paying jobs in one of the MAJOR oil companies? How about poor old Baker after losing his job? Oh, he went back to his multimillion dollar job with his lawfirm dealing with all the cover-up banks and shadow government (British Zionist interests). How many of you also know that SCOWCROFT WAS “KNIGHTED” BY THE QUEEN OF ENGLAND? Not bad for a simple unassuming Mormon boy?

How many of you realize the plan of the One Worlders is to totally blow-away the Philippines?

HOW MANY OF YOU KNOW THAT YOU NO LONGER FUNCTION UNDER THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA AND WILL NO LONGER BE CALLED THE UNITED STATES BUT RATHER, THE “NEWSTATES” OF AMERICA AND THE CONSTITUTION FOR DICTATORSHIP IS ALREADY WRITTEN AND IN USE (presented within). THIS WILL HOLD AFTER ANNOUNCEMENT OF FULL EMERGENCY STATUS AND OPEN MARTIAL LAW--FOR TWENTY-FIVE YEARS, AFTER WHICH YOU ARE SOLELY A SOCIALISTIC COMPOUND UNDER THE HIERARCHY OF THE ELITE WHO RUN THE UNITED NATIONS.

How many of you heard Oliver North warn you, this weekend, that Clinton’s plans dive you deep into Socialism and the Republic of the United States is doomed? He should know--after all he “single-handedly” orchestrated and pulled off the entirety of the Iran Contra affair according to the “Big Boys” and they “wouldn’t lie to you”, would they?

How many of you know or care that the bomb used in the Trade Centers was a “nuclear device”? It was. How many of you realize it was an integrated terrorist action--including, as usual, the CIA, KGB and Mossad? All orchestrated under your Mother, the British Intelligence Agency?

How many of you have RECENTLY read Orwell’s 1984? What makes you think those things predicted have not come to pass? How about Ayn Rand’s works on the disintegration of the nation’s (world’s) total infrastructure, diseases and plagues and ultimate movement into holes and canyons for survival? HOW MANY OF YOU STILL THINK AN ELITIST ONE WORLD GOVERNMENT UNDER WHICH YOU ARE SLAVES IS A GRAND “NEW” IDEA?

HOW MANY OF YOU GIVE A DAMN? SO BE IT!

This paper is some kind of “Dooms Day” rag-sheet? We just call ‘em as we sees ‘em! You who think as much, I suggest read it very, very carefully! You tell me who could “make up” all this dreadful “stuff”? We must be doing something RIGHT--every operative on the globe is after our blood but I remind you all: GOD SHALL PREVAIL AND IS IT NOT ABOUT TIME YOU CONSIDER YOUR OWN POSITION? AN OSTRICH QUESTIONING TRUTH WITH HIS HEAD IN THE SAND-POT IS ELEGANTLY EXPOSED ON A VERY VULNERABLE END--SO, TAKE YOUR HEAD OUT OF THE DARK OF THE SAND-POT AND GET MAD! TRUTH AWAITS AS CAN FREEDOM. Salu, Ceres

CHAPTER 4

REC #1 CERES ‘ATONN

FRI., APRIL 16, 1993 10:32 A.M. YEAR 6, DAY 243

FRIDAY, APRIL 16, 1993

WHEN A TEAM MEMBER IS MISSING

We sit to write on this late day, Friday, with so much against our human hands as to boggle the mind. This is for you readers who will receive this paper.

Finally the legal charades have caught us--other than with Dharma who must do so much of the writing. Our Chief Editor, Dr. Young, is caused to have to be in Federal Court on charges of Contempt for running notification of where you readers should get THE PLEIADES CONNECTION volumes as long as they would be available.

Please, everyone understand that the LIBERATOR, and now the CONTACT, carries NO ADVERTISING AS SUCH. Any presentation of books, ours or anyones, is because of their noteworthiness and no payment is accepted. I did not attend the arrangements that were set up between Tehachapi Distributing and the LIBERATOR. I do KNOW, however, that it was through mutual arrangements BECAUSE OF CONTENT--not to further sales of any product.

The reason for the confrontation, of course, is that “I” continued to tell you these are the most important books on your planet--THEY ARE and IF I COULD HAVE THEM TAKEN FOR THE INFORMATION OF YOU WHO COULD FIND--“BEG, BORROW OR STEAL” THEM, I BELIEVE WAS THE TERM I USED--NOT LITERALLY THAT YOU SHOULD “STEAL” THEM--BUT THAT IN TERMINOLOGY OF YOUR LANGUAGE IN EXPRESSION OF “IMPORTANCE”, I HAVE CONTINUED TO REFER TO THEM.

The problem, of course, is that “I” am not “recognized” in the court as an entity--and therefore the “blame” and “contempt” comes back against my secretary.

MONDAY COURT SESSION

At any rate, much research now must be done by Dr. Young to refresh his mind EXACTLY as to what was said in the paper in preparation for appearance on Monday. Our attorneys are asking for continuance but in these types of court ridicule cases you cannot depend of the “word” of any attorney. We just experienced a massive session of ridicule and directed nonsense from the Nevada press as ones efforted to have some type of “hearing” in the Minden, Nevada courtroom.

The press interviewed one Luke Perry, whose “step-mother” has interests in the Institute. He was working in conjunction with Dave Horton (Atty.) and George Green. There were remarkable allegations, such as, Doris Ekker is a Pleiadian who flies galactically to and from, etc. Also, the article said that this was a massive “scam” operation and “worse yet”, Doris and E.J. Ekker are officers and in control of over 200 Nevada corporations. The next point was pressure to “change the Nevada laws to shut down this type of abuse”. We shall ask Mr. Green to handle this but Mr. Christie will respond to the newspaper. In structuring corporations in Nevada there have to be Resident Agents if the applicant is outside the borders of Nevada. This further means that to establish a corporation you have to have representatives to temporarily serve with the paperwork. This is true of EVERY RESIDENT AGENT, in or out of the state. Ekkers have been willing to serve as those signatories--they “control” nothing--most especially the working order or business of ANY corporation in point--they do not even KNOW WHO owns the corporation in almost ALL instances.

I will just republish the following article (after the hearing) so that you can realize what insulting and painful public attention is called upon my workers. The courtroom show was a circus of nonsense and never even got to the point in controversy.

As you read this, in a situation where there is no group, no joint “businesses”, no commune, no claims, no “services”--nothing except a paper and some books which any may or may not read according to ANY published material--this is what slaps my scribe in the face--this after a blast from Television in Reno where it was even more ridiculous, if possible. Then, when efforting to get copy of the tape in point--they have to release nothing, be responsible for nothing--unless subpoenaed by a court. Freedom? You had best start looking more diligently about you, readers.

QUOTING:

Associated Press

MINDEN, Nev.: A judge refused Wednesday to issue a “stop-talking” order in a dispute involving a corporation whose officers claim to communicate with aliens from outer space.

District Judge Dave Gamble said the attorney for E.J. and Doris Ekker of the Phoenix Institute for Research and Education, based in Tehachapi, Calif. failed to prove they were being harmed by remarks made by former business partners.

Tom Vallas, lawyer for the Ekkers, wanted an injunction against George and Desiree Green of Carson City, involved in a civil dispute with the Ekkers over ownership of $350,000 in gold coins. The coins were turned over to the court by the Greens pending resolution of the dispute.

Vallas asked a witness whether she had ever seen any extra-terrestrials at the institution.

Nora Voyles, an Institute director who has put XXXX into a Nevada-based corporation (controlled by the Ekkers) said she had never seen “Commander Hatonn” or any other alien.

Doris Ekker, who goes by the name of “Dharma” has claimed to be a translator for Hatonn, an extra-terrestrial who sometimes orbits the Earth and warns his people about intergalactic strife and the covert agendas of international politicians.

Voyles said Green told her “things were coming down in Tehachapi and it was not going to be pretty.” She also said contributions had been coming in but have stopped since accounts of the flap between the Greens and the Ekkers became public.

The secretary of state’s office has confirmed that more than 200 Nevada corporations have been formed by the Ekkers on behalf of other people. But the Ekkers are listed as top corporate officers.

Ironically, Vallas is a member of the influential Reno-based law firm of Vargas & Bartlett, whose partners include Senate Majority Leader Bill Raggio, R-Reno.

* * *

Now in order of errors: The confrontation is between the “Institute” and the Greens. Ekkers have other fish to fry and they were not even present at this hearing.

There seemed to be no mention of the fact that the “gold” in point was secreted away and there is proof from the gold owner to such.

Nora’s name is not Voyles and all of you will recognize her more than adequate “mental stability” as the author of research in “Nora’s Research Corner” in the paper.

The placement of money into “a Nevada-based corporation” is probably true if Nora stated as much--not being a Kol Nidre un-vow-taker--but Ekkers do not in ANY MANNER WHATSOEVER CONTROL HER CORPORATION OR THE BUSINESS THEREOF. THEY SHOW AS ON ANY OTHER AS FORMATION OFFICERS OF SAID CORPORATION STRUCTURE (NOT BUSINESS PARTICIPANTS)!

They also failed to mention that when asked if she had ever “seen”, etc., and if she knew anyone else who talks to God? She promptly said “Yes, Mrs. Green.” She was interrupted so quickly that she couldn’t add--“and Mr. Green also claims to receive directly from this same Commander,” etc., etc. Doesn’t this seem just a “bit” lopsided?

The next is not so bad as orbiting, etc., to me but the first article gave HER (Dharma) ability to flit around the galaxies and commune with aliens. Frankly, readers, I don’t give her “time” to flit around anywhere.

I have been in agreement to publish these things so that “equal time” could be shared. I will make no further comment at this time.

They are trying to link us somehow with such as the Waco incidents and can’t find anything upon which to make ANY TYPE of connection without outright lies. So, I do have this much to offer you on the Waco incident. I make no comment on these people, their operation as to God, etc. But, you had better pay very, very close attention to what Koresh presents as information and documentation (receivings) on the SEVEN SEALS which are claimed to be in preparation by him in conjunction with his surrender--if you can get them exactly as he presents them. Even the Dead Sea Scrolls are not accepted “hoax”, so be CAREFUL. However, you might find some truth in that which will come out of the Branch Davidians.

DR. YOUNG

Back to this paper--we are putting together this edition without input or help from Dr. Young so that he can attend these other more pressing matters. We may not have the same level of “perfection” or variety--but we WILL have sufficient to bring you a timely and information-filled issue. We have to ask you readers to bear with us as we walk on the crushed glass roadway completely filled with boulders and obstacles. Our remaining staff, in silence (for Dr. Young would simply stay up around the clock without rest to serve if he knew) believes we can have enough for a paper--set to lay-out and ready for the presses by Sunday Evening (freeing Monday for all to attend the US&P hearing in Fresno) and still make the press on Tuesday (our only day with printing possibility). WE CAN DO IT for Dharma Wokini is willing to type around the clock if she can have this new-found co-help in these miserable court shredders. We already recognize and thank you for your prayers and support for our work--of which, by the way, each of you is a major part whether or not it is in your realization.

NEW VOLUMES

I think you will note Dr. Young’s control over the contents of the paper in that he has not even urged participation with the several volumes we have finished and have ready for distribution. Karen is working on information announcements and we will offer them herein. Our thrust is to get out INFORMATION--and not to “sell things”. We even have a problem offering as much as we do on things such as Gaiandriana which MUST be offered. It is, thus far, a paper which takes no advertising as such so that there is no tampering, for support reasons, of the information offered.

GAIANDRIANA

We will be, very shortly, offering more “in-depth” information regarding Gaiandriana as we have had it available long enough to get the next bombardment of response and inquiries from you readers. We find that many are taking too much, others not enough--others simply do not follow directions. In all instances, we must remember, that there are two types of, say, “cancer” cells and causatives--artificial (or “constructed”) and “natural”. The “natural” bothers are things such as caffeine in coffee, etc. The “constructed” and worse are the additives of “constructed caffeine-like substance”, say, in the cola beverages. Gaiandriana allows immediate attack of your immune system against the “naturals” (especially if not overwhelmed by great intake) but it is all but impossible for a “natural” substance to break-up and dissolve the causative agent when “man-made” through genetic/DNA manipulation of the invader--IF THE RECIPIENT CONTINUES TO ABUSE BY CONTINUED INTAKE OF THE DAMAGING AGENTS, I.E., OVERUSE OF ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES (SURPRISING AS IT MAY SEEM, EVEN THOUGH ALCOHOL IS DAMAGING IN ITS OWN RIGHT) IT IS THE “ADDITIVES” WHICH CAUSE THE MUTATION OF CELLS, TOBACCO ADDITIVES, ETC. Further, please note--that if you use Mogu (Mugu) tea--do NOT overdo it. If you drink it like you would a juice or a drink of water--you defeat the work of the Gaiandriana as it will move directly to take up residency and fuel supply from the ingested tea which is often it’s very living foundation. Why work on “aliens” if you keep abundantly supplied in your favorite life-fuel? Also, MANY THINGS cannot well be adapted in conjunction and either negate the other or simply are not compatible.

We find, especially ones with HIV are so eager to get better that they are swamping their bodies with everything and while they are “feeling” better are not showing sufficient increase in the immune cells. The researchers are going to take the whole of this week to work on variations to increase the Gaiandriana per unit, reducing the solution’s “fuel” supply to cause better intervention of the cells as they move into the body. You must understand that as this passes through the stomach--30 to 50% of the cells are killed. To help avoid such massive loss--a bit of apple juice is suggested but most ones forget to use it. Also you must remember that many “patients” continue to take medications which are chemically damaging to the cellular structure as it efforts to move within its own DNA structured cells.

I can equate this somewhat to a sperm efforting to get past all the birth control devices to fertilize an ovum. I told you not to EXPECT miracles--YOU ARE THE MIRACLE and it requires your own cooperation. If you continue to abuse and insult the body you are working not only for the disease invaders--but the disease enhancing additives in your intake. Ones who have been pronounced “terminal” are showing massive return of good health but also show willingness to balance their intakes of “body debilitating” substances. We will ask our Doctor to draw up a listing of harmful substances. If you can’t give up your “addictions” then begin to “taper off” and as you feel better the nagging addiction CAN come under control. It will mean you will have to invest in greater intake amounts (of the correct items), not just at random “overtake” anything. Also, if you are showing no, or poor, results--change your intake methods to hit very hard with under the tongue amounts four to five times a day--leaving the liquid under the tongue for at least 3 minutes. If you are working with a child or animal of whom you can’t require this--use many times a day under the tongue and it will take up into the bloodstream.

If we can ever get rid of some of this daily confirmation of news, “watchit news” and other writings--we shall take up this subject in detail, hopefully in form for understanding of the lay readers. I have written volumes on the technology of this and ways to enhance through frequency adaptation, etc., but “life” leaves us no avenues of “time” to share or do actual experimentation and research. Now, we shall be losing our Research and Education Institute--for as we get this assault balanced out we shall restructure facilities--but at present we are threatened by Green’s operatives to force the Institute into Receivership and on into Involuntary Bankruptcy. The legal documents stating as much were issued the evening prior to this past [Minden, Nevada] hearing above discussed.

This will tie up all funds in or out and there is nothing we will be able to legally do about it. We are going to effort to impress Mr. Green with the fact that retribution shall be required but we cannot see if he will hear--OR, if indeed, his actions have not already pressed beyond the ability to return.

LUKE PERRY

Mr. Green pulled into his cooperation and thrust team one Luke Perry, as mentioned above--and who, by the way, comes from Nevada and set up the public newspaper interviews, etc.

Why would we speak of this person and not recognize the damage from others? Because this one has pressed this into the Securities and Exchange Commission and to the FBI, etc. Now, readers, the FBI has investigated and found nothing amiss. Let us consider what Mr. Perry said in his first article (which we did not reproduce for it is not handy here at the desk) that Nevada must press “Bill such and such to STOP these Nevada open corporations.” This means that through all investigations and harassment, corporate owners--THE VEIL OF NEVADA PROTECTION OF YOUR PRIVACY HELD--ALL THEY COULD DO WAS INSULT THE RESIDENT AGENT’S SIGNERS ON THE CORPORATE SET-UP RECORDS! THIS IS GOOD NEWS TO YOU WHO WONDER IF YOU HAVE ANY PROTECTION LEFT IN THE WORLD. YOU DO--IF--YOU USE IT PROPERLY; STOP SAYING “I HAVE A CORPORATION”, ETC. IF YOU TELL YOUR OWN PRIVACY GUARDS, THEN IT IS YOUR OWN PROBLEM. A NEVADA CORPORATION (NO MATTER WHERE THE ORIGINATOR MIGHT BE) IS AN ENTITY UNTO ITSELF AND IT IS A RESIDENT OF NEVADA--NOT YOU OR YOURS--UNLESS YOU MAKE IT SO.

It becomes much like Gaiandriana--IF YOU DON’T USE A THING PROPERLY--THEN DON’T BLAME THE “THING” FOR IT NOT WORKING. FURTHER--IF A THING CAN WORK FOR “ONE”, IT CAN WORK FOR ALL--INCLUDING YOU!

Now, who in the world is Luke Perry, you might ask. Well, Mr. Perry is a member of a “family” of offspring of one, Mr. Perry (father) who married now, Mrs. Perry. These ones lived, and still Mrs. Perry lives in Wisconsin, I believe, and Luke lives in Las Vegas and “runs” what he wants to have ALL THE ESTATE MONEY FROM HIS FATHER--EVEN TO TRYING TO GET MRS. PERRY (step-mother) declared incompetent. This would not be too sad except that during the last over five years of Senior Perry’s life, he had a stroke and was totally invalided, incontinent and a constant caretaking problem of massive size. He was not senile or incompetent at first, however, and knew exactly what he was doing when he arranged for his wife to have control of the estate after his demise. She had no help and nothing but problems from the ingrates and greedy offspring. The father, Perry, was a minister and ended up with some estate--not massive but sufficient to help Mrs. Perry through her remaining life expression. These little rascals are doing everything to strip her of ALL ASSETS--including that which she placed into the Institute for protection FROM the little buggers. Worse, she had been using a “lawyer” in total bought and paid for cahoots with the offspring. She has now changed lawyers and strengthened her position but the assault against this poor lady is ceaseless. This is the main ring-leader to destroy the Institute--BUT WHAT THE IDIOT DOES NOT SEEM TO UNDERSTAND IS THAT “IF” HE PUSHES IT INTO RECEIVERSHIP, BANKRUPTCY AND REGULATION VIOLATIONS (WHICH GEORGE SET UP IN THE FIRST PLACE) HE IS THE ONE WHO WILL LOSE EVERY DAMNED CENT! PERHAPS IT COULDN’T HAPPEN TO A NICER GUY??? So be it.

OTHER NEWS AND CONFIRMATIONS

We have been disallowed to use further information from the Las Vegas Sun paper in the series begun last week. However, that is being worked out--and frankly, I find it very LACKING in full content or other fundamental offerings of great impact new and unusual. It was a good line of “confirmation” and certainly a potential “safety” guard for the writers who, I fear, are not knowledgeable of the extent of the danger involved. “Naive” might be the better expression. YOU have far more information if you are a Contact reader than any of the writers and investigative journalists in point. I would hope that they release rights for sharing because they walk very gravely on dangerous ground indeed--and they are in the hotbed of criminal circles in their location and I can only urge them to pay attention. At any rate, if we can work it out--we will offer more of the ongoing series as we have space to do so and if we feel it worthy in content so that we do not have to usurp space from some other breaking information.

CONFIRMATION OF NUCLEAR DEVICE AT

TRADE CENTER

I have had about as much negative blasting from my statement that a “nuclear” device was utilized at the Trade Center and was part and parcel of an “intelligence” operation in full cahoots with Israel Mossad as any one subject so far offered.

I am not going to “defend” my information nor make much of any statements regarding such comments “in advance” of actual public flow for I have no intention of placing my scribe in any further disagreeable and insulting confrontations. I simply tell you that what I bring you is valid and usually, within a matter of days, the confirmation will flow and someone will find it and share. So, as with these things, sooner than later came the proof positive and again turns up in one of the more respected, by me, papers of your “time”, The Spotlight, and this time via an interview with Radio Free America, with host Tom Valentine.

I will say up front that the scientist in point of the interview is valid and outstanding in his reputation. He is Galen Winsor and is a veteran nuclear scientist.

I will “directly” quote from the article and then perhaps to save space will integrate the “questions” within the “answers” as we move along. I honor these writers, speakers and truth-bringers and I honor The Spotlight for always daring such information bringing. Why am I not ever on those programs? Because ridicule causes great damage to a “cause” and we need no attention--WE NEED THE INFORMATION, not quarrels over validity of some “flying object” (humanoid or craft). Your Elite enemy will use every means available to distract you and we shall simply have to await the time of recognition in sequence of perfection to make presence. I bring this up now as introduction for there is much new information coming forth on underground bases, supposed aliens, replicas and robotic replacements. I want to share that with you also and we need not clutter it with discussions about my validity of presence. Thank you.

QUOTING:

THE SPOTLIGHT, April 12, 1993

MININUKE TERROR STARTING?

Was the recent bombing of the World Trade Center actually a small-scale nuclear blast? Who had the capability of setting off this kind of explosion? These provocative questions were raised on the March 23 broadcast of The Spotlight’s nightly call-in talk forum, Radio Free America, with host Tom Valentine. [C: I recommend that all who possibly can--keep up with this program. It is unfortunate that in the location wherein lives my scribe the radio reception is so bad that the program cannot be received. However it seems that almost nationwide the program can be received in most locations. The on-air program itself has allowed for the very contact to the public that we know has saved at least two lives, one being Maynard Campbell who was on the air with Tom Valentine the entire time he and his lady were under Federal SWAT team siege.]

Valentine’s guest was veteran nuclear scientist, Galen Winsor, who has been involved in hands-on research in the nuclear industry and related fields for some 42 years.

Questions by Valentine and his callers are in boldface. Winsor’s answers are in regular type.

* * *

By all accounts, the blast at the World Trade Center was extensive. We’ve been told there were 1,200 pounds of dynamite in the bomb that allegedly did this damage. What do you, Galen Winsor, think that bomb was?

I’m sure it was just exactly what John McPhee predicted 20 years ago in his book, The Curve of Binding Energy, where he quoted Theodore B. Taylor, a theoretical physicist out of Los Alamos who said that someday someone was going to blow up the World Trade Center with a small nuclear device, the size of a stick of gum.

McPhee’s book was published in 1975, although the prediction first appeared in the New Yorker magazine in 1973. Taylor worked in the field of the micronization of nuclear weapons--in other words making nuclear weapons small enough so the Israelis could carry them around in a briefcase.

[C: Does this mean our information about explosives, poundages, dynamite, etc. are invalid? Goodness NO--there had to be covering substance--please, they don’t yet have the power to publicly blow away things like the Trade Center with nuclear devices and not possibly get caught prior to time to bring the ultimate terror upon you. It is so much more effective as terrorism to let you get the “secret” information in “leaked” form--afterwards. Think of the impact as ones realize that these things can happen anywhere, anytime and you have no control over them, as people.]

Why do you mention the Israelis? Are they the first to produce briefcase-sized nuclear weapons?

No, but the Israelis were optimistic enough that they latched on to the technology. Actually, you see the smallest nuclear weapons are known as “Israeli briefcase bombs”.

Taylor said a sliver of uranium-235 the size of chewing gum could blow up the World Trade Center?

That’s right. Twenty years ago Taylor not only picked the target but he picked the means.

How would that work?

There’s enough force there. CNN said it was 1,200 pounds of dynamite used in the blast. That much dynamite would fill a big truck, not a little van of the type they said was used to carry the bomb.

It would be rather difficult to sneak 1,200 pounds of TNT into a secured building like the World Trade Center.

That’s right. Why would you do all of that when you could slip it into the World Trade Center in a briefcase? The only thing that saved 50,000 people from dying that day was the fact that they put the bomb in the wrong place. They intended to topple one tower of the World Trade Center into the other tower and take out more than 50,000 people. [C: Now readers--we told you that right off the bat the day it happened--anyone remember? We will still protect the source of that information but it was top-level and from one inside the operations who KNEW! That had EVERYTHING to do with the CIA! Remember, as well, that we also told you the plans would be to “nuke” New York. By the way--they aren’t through yet!]

What did Taylor, quoted by McPhee, have to say about a bombing at the trade building?

He said a low-yield bomb, exploded inside one of the World Trade Center towers, could bring it down.

This was a theoretical physicist writing back in the early 1970s?

That’s right.

Most people have the image of a nuclear bomb being very big and so powerful that it could knock out a whole city--like Nagasaki or Hiroshima. People have visions of mushroom clouds and radiation everywhere.

Remember the bombs over Nagasaki and Hiroshima were set off 1,800 feet in the air for maximum effect. However, if you set one off underground, its like the puffs of smoke you see over the ground where they set off 125 nuclear devices in Nevada.

The nuclear device that may have been set off in the Trade Center wouldn’t be anywhere near as powerful as the ones set off in Nevada, would it?

Absolutely not. In my hand I’m holding a model for a miniature nuclear device of about 2 3/4 inches. We had back-packable nuclear devices in 1960. These devices have even been a line-item in the congressional budget every year since, although this information hasn’t been widely known. However, the information in McPhee’s book was published by the New York Times and The New Yorker magazine.

Now if there had been a nuclear device exploded in the World Trade Center, wouldn’t experts have been able to detect all kinds of nuclear radiation at the blast site?

There are highly portable radiation detectors using ultraviolet light that they can take to the World Trade Center, and find the nuclear fission products left there. If you run a precise test you can even tell whether it was a plutonium weapon or a U-235 weapon. I can assure you that the National Bureau of Standards has already been there and that they’ve already got the spectrum. They can tell you this, but they are given to lying.

You’re suggesting then that they haven’t released their findings because everybody would be immediately afraid that they were going to get cancer from all that radiation?

Thirty percent of the nuclear radiation that was created during the blast at Port Chicago in Pittsburg, California on July 17, 1944 [C: ANYONE EVEN REMEMBER THE INCIDENT?] is still resident on the site. It is still measurable. That’s why the Navy gave people (myself included) so much trouble when they wanted to go in there and measure it.

The weapon that exploded at Port Chicago was five inches in diameter. It had 37 pounds of 93 percent enriched U-235. I’ve talked to the man who prepared the uranium for that particular weapon which was a smooth-bore gun-barrel weapon.

The explosion at Port Chicago excavated 14 million cubic feet of rock out of the bed of the Sacramento River in less than a second. You bet it was a nuclear weapon.

These little nukes we’ve got today cannot be detected before they go off, but you can sure track them after they’ve exploded by reading out the ultraviolet light spectrum on them.

Now you say the smallest-sized nuclear weapon in existence is known as an Israeli briefcase bomb. How long has that weapon been around?

Since 1972 when they got laser-isotopic separation under way where they could make 99.99 percent pure plutonium-239.

The key to making these miniature bombs, then, is being able to make this particular fuel pure?

The model of a miniature nuclear bomb that I have which is 2 3/4 inches in length was made from 94 percent pure Pu-239. Who knows how small a weapon is which would contain 99.99 percent pure Pu-239?

You actually have a model of such a weapon?

What I have is a little aluminum sphere cast to make the mold for such a weapon. You can’t detect this item by its shape.

I’ve carried it past the finest security systems of the federal government and the airlines probably 100 times over the past 10 years and they can’t pick it up. If they do pick it up they look at it and say, “that’s a cute little clock” since it has a Timex watch on its face.

This is actually a lot bigger than the Israeli briefcase bombs. I carried this into the Federal Building in Portland, Oregon when I visited the office of Sen. Mark Hatfield (R-Ore.).

Now, as a longtime nuclear scientist you are aware of this capability, but I’ve never seen anywhere in the media that this capability is available for nuclear weapons. Why do they call this the Israeli briefcase bomb?

Because the Israelis have been part and parcel of the technology all along. I was offered my first clandestine weapon from a fellow on the roof of a building in Augusta, Georgia in 1967. He told me he could have it in my hands in less than three weeks.

The system has holes in it--great big holes. They’ve been pretending to control this material, and they haven’t for years.

In other words you’re saying there has been a great proliferation of these nuclear weapons and that it’s a lot worse than we realize?

That’s correct. Do you remember Robert Maxwell, the English publishing magnate who died mysteriously when his body was found floating off his yacht? He was the chief marketer of these weapons. Maxwell had a standard catalog of them. All you had to do was pick the weapon out by his special number. They were classified by yield.

In your 42 years in the nuclear business, you were responsible for buying a lot of nuclear fuel for companies.

This fuel has gone in a lot of different directions. Not only that but a lot of the so-called nuclear waste that is buried around the country is 72 percent Pu-239. It’s easy to take that up to 99.99 percent.

In other words then, if you can do it, through your talents as a nuclear scientist, others can do it as well.

Taylor, quoted in McPhee’s book, says: “The making of a nuclear bomb does not require the skill and invention that went into Bee, Hornet and Scorpion” (i.e., small nuclear weapons). “A crude fabrication producing a small yield or even a fizzle yield could kill tens of thousands of people and bring tall buildings to the ground.”

This was prior to 1956 that these weapons (Bee, Hornet and Scorpion) were produced.

One of our callers used to work at the Los Alamos laboratory. He says there were small, backpack-type weapons being produced some 20 years ago. A detonation device, then, does not have to be some sort of cumbersome mechanism?

Of course not. The core of the Nagasaki bomb was only 13 pounds of plutonium--about the size of a baseball. All of the rest of those bombs were just trappings. They had to create the illusion that these bombs were great big ones. In those early days they couldn’t move these nuclear weapons with impunity all over the surface of the Earth.

And now these miniature nuclear bombs are proliferating all over the globe. These weapons could be carried around in diplomatic pouches from embassy to embassy, from one nation to another--and are!

END OF QUOTING

* * *

Still think you don’t need any shelter system? How well are you, reader, prepared for these contingency liabilities to your life-stream? Doom and gloom? I can only offer you WHAT IS and pray that we can get rid of the ridiculous attacks and distractions so that we can offer you more help and valid information on these kinds of subjects.

We need to spend more time on buildings and shapes, etc. We are so bogged down in the morass of the legal insanity that we can’t even get the model finished for one of the most beautiful 3,300 sq. ft. homes you will ever see for “regular dwelling” facility.

I don’t take exception to Mr. Green going full-tilt in the domed-structure projects and developments. My “exception” is representation that “that” project is somehow “Hatonn’s” through that routing. NO--that is not true. It “could” be--it simply is NOT and I object to the deception. We would, and probably in fact, will, help him with project financing and all good input--IF he can find his way to stop the deceptive activities. For the same reason we needed him in Nevada in the first place--still holds true--we need projects of massive size in that location where development of new architecture and facilities can be developed without the pressures of most of the other states in the former union. Nothing has changed in our projections--only people change! Many things take place, not the least is the impact of fear upon participants--of several types. What George has done is, for the most part--quite believed by him to be correct behavior. This is exactly what happens when one allows himself/herself to become vulnerable. It is unfortunate, but more unfortunately, it happens constantly. Many begin the journey of Truth with God in action--few end up able to hold the course. Hopeless? No--not if the one in point wishes it to be otherwise. I remind you--God goes nowhere--“man” runs around trying to escape notice of his actions which he perceives wrong in the sight of God--and surely enough begins to function foolishly outside the shelter of our Hosts. Man has to first see the truth of actions, believed or deliberately planned to deceive--and then WISH to change and, always--TO EACH HIS OWN!

CHAPTER 5

REC #2 CERES ‘ATONN

FRI., APRIL 16, 1993 2:14 P.M. YEAR 6, DAY 243

FRIDAY, APRIL 16, 1993

BY WHAT AUTHORITY COME I?

By what authority DO YOU ASK? If you ask in the name of Holy God of Lighted Creation then you need only reach out and touch my energy for recognition. If you ask in the acclaim to somehow prove me inept at least and a fraud at best--you shall ultimately feel my sting because that which you project will come in its cycle back unto you--it is the LAW of the Universe. But, so that some of you rest a bit more easily, let me give you some bits and pieces so that we can move on in our work of this day of writing.

THE “WORD” WAS PREPARED…..

“In the beginning was the WORD, and the WORD was with GOD, and the WORD WAS GOD” (John I:I). “Word” in its first and original sense does not mean voice, sound, or speech. IT MEANS: THE CREATION, according to Divine Laws, from the universal creative fluid, in the “tomb”, “cave”, or manger of the Earth of that PERFECT ONE, which has the power to spiritualize and regenerate “man”. Your bibles of instruction tell you: “Man does not live by bread alone, but by every WORD that proceedeth out of the mouth of GOD.”

Therefore, the “Word”...the Divine Creative influx was PREPARED on Earth that man there might receive it in love and understanding--that he might ascend to higher spiritual knowledge and wisdom because of this preparation.

The prophet Daniel saw a winged lion emerge from the sea. The “lion” denotes the fearlessness of “one” who is imbued with Divine Truth.

Now, you must understand in this brief dissertation I shall be only touching on points. The “lion” in representation is most often visualized in the magnificent old placements in Egypt. The histories of nations, times and wonders still lie untold in the places of the lion--in the Egyptian sanctuaries and magnetic vortices of that place. However, while we tinker with that input--you must move to the other side of the globe and fix your eyes on where old Lemuria went down some 12,000 years ago. There still remains remnants never inundated by the massive upheaval which rent the lands as in the Great Grand Canyon as you refer to the rift in Arizona. There are bits of Lemuria remaining, also, in California (of which we hold dear in location as in this presence), as are other areas in the U.S. South West, Australia and seen vividly on that place called Easter Island off Chile and Peru. Wondrous histories are yet to be shared, my beloved friends.

Many of YOU who may well find this hard to accept have served in the cause of Lighted Truth in many times and many places--Lemuria and then at the final hours of Atlantis--always preparing the “way” of the wondrous “Dawn” that would come. All experiences were in preparation for the influx of great Universal Truth. This original dawning came in Truth in Egypt when Akhnaton revealed the ONE GOD (ATON) to a skeptical, idolatrous world.

Perhaps we could look back a very long way as through countless millennia the WORD had been prepared by those “goodly” children of Lighted Truth. At the time of Akhnaton of Egypt it became the “time of the telling” when there would be a great dawning of Truth and the WORD.

And so dawned “THE WORD”...

The Eighteenth Dynasty, Egypt’s Imperial Age, had begun with Ahmose I, a Theban princeling. Thutmose III had salvaged the great treasures of Solomon’s Temple in the lands you will recognize as Israel (not Palestine of today’s Israel). Now, the heart of all mankind was readied to receive THE WORD as it dawned in Egypt as the blazing ATON. Aton’s servant on Earth was to be Amunhotep IV, known to the world as Akhnaton, the so-called “heretic” Pharaoh. (Ah hummnn.)

Blazing? Well, the symbol of the One God of LIGHT--is represented by the “SUN”--ALL LIGHT/ALL LIFE.

By THIS authority, do I speak and by THIS authority do I use this scribe. Ridicule may be fun and fanciful for the uninformed--but it would now behoove you gigglers and twitterers to learn your history lessons--correctly. FOR NOW IS THE TIME OF THE WORD!! AND SO BE IT!

Now, the next barrage from “disbelievers” flows in the form of: “Who are YOU now that you call yourself Ceres?” The same old boy! If your name is John Jefferson Doe and you usually call yourself “Doe” or “John” and change your label attention to Jeff--ARE YOU A DIFFERENT ENTITY--OR SIMPLY USING A DIFFERENT NAME? PONDER IT WHILE YOU GO THROUGH YOUR EXCUSES FOR DISBELIEVING TRUTH!

* * *

WORLD ARMY

We shall abruptly change the subject because you need to know that along the lines of military enforcers in this New World Order, a “wing” of your World Order controllers met very recently in Washington in one of the most “hushed” meetings of your decade--to “demand a world army”.

Again I find The Spotlight has done it again--first with the most! By the way, as an insert at the top of their paper it reads: “The mind once expanded to the dimensions of a larger idea never returns to its original size.” Oliver Wendell Holmes.

QUOTING:

TRILATS DEMAND WORLD ARMY

Honor for this article: James P. Tucker, Jr.

The Trilateral Commission, one wing of the world shadow government composed of political, cultural, academic, industrial and media leaders from all over the world, met in Washington to hammer out an agenda to further erode national sovereignty and place national governments under the authority of the United Nations.

The Trilateral Commission (TC) is pressuring the United States to take two giant steps toward the goal of a world government:

* Agree to the formation of a three-tier world army under the authority of the United Nations, which would include a permanent standing force. This new UN military force would, in place of its traditional role of “peacekeeping”, intervene in the affairs of sovereign nations.

* And empower the UN to determine immigration policies of sovereign states, under which it could order the Province of the United States to accept anyone, regardless of the wishes of Congress.

LONGTIME MEMBERS

These demands were issued at a three-day closed-door meeting in Washington of the TC at the Park Hyatt Hotel. Informed of these decisions in personal briefings, were President Bill Clinton, Secretary of State Warren Christopher and Treasury Secretary Lloyd Bentsen.

All are longtime members of the TC. Clinton and Bentsen are also part of the other wing of the global government, the Bilderberg group, [C: And of course all are with the Council on Foreign Relations as are all of Clinton’s “people” who RUN YOUR GOVERNMENT!], which meets later THIS month (April) in Europe. [C: Scary, isn’t it?]

The Trilateralists met with Christopher on the evening of March 28 and had breakfast with Bentsen the following morning.

DESTRUCTION OF AMERICAN JOBS

They also told the president and high administration and congressional leaders the North American Free Trade Agreement must be ratified and not to try to limit the destruction of American jobs which would be lost to low-wage Mexicans through “side agreements” that could derail the entire package. That job losses in this country were inevitable was a consequence they frankly acknowledged, contrary to the avalanche of misleading press reports and economists, predictions which had polluted public discourse for the past year.

It was also emphasized the trade treaty must be the first step toward the formation of a Western Hemisphere Community, similar to the European Community, with complete political and economic unity.

Others who received these orders from the world shadow government include Sens. John Chafee (R-RI.), William Cohen (R-Me), John Rockefeller IV (D-W.Va.), William Roth (R-Del.), House Speaker Thomas Foley (D-Wash.) and Reps. Dan Glickman (D-Kan.) and Amory Houghton (R-N.Y.).

Several journalists and other Establishment media figures attended the closed sessions on condition they would report only what is approved:

Kathrine Graham, Chairman of the Washington Post Co., Post editorial writer, John Anderson, Post reporters Jim Hoagland and Hobart Rowen; Flora Lewis of the New York Times; George Malloan, deputy editor of the Wall Street Journal, and David Gergen, publisher of U.S. News and World Report, were also there.

Foreign journalists attending under the same conditions include Sergio Romano of La Stampa in Milan, Italy; Jorgen Schleimann of Denmark’s Morgenavisen Jyllands-Posten; Theo Sommer, editor of Die Zeit in Hamburg, Germany; Ian Davidson, Financial Times of London; Jacqueline Grapin of Le Figaro in France; Fredrico Rampini, deputy editor of Il Sole 24 Ore in Milan and Akira Kejima, senior editor, the Nihon Keizdi Shimbun, a Japanese financial newspaper. [C: Why do I take time and space to list these people? Because YOU ARE GOING TO HEAR MORE FROM THEM about this but it will not be as the usual press “stuff”--they will be serving their masters in what they will publish.]

WHO SPOKE?

The Trilateralists began their annual meeting hearing from Leon Panetta, director of the Office of Management of the Budget: Mickey Kantor, U.S. trade representative; and John Deutch, who has been nominated for under secretary of defense. Later Foley presided over a panel in Congress.

John Roper, director of the Western European Union in Paris and a former member of the British Parliament, gave a lengthy report that both celebrated the growth of UN forces into a world army and called for a still stronger global role.

There are more than 3,000 U.S. troops in Somalia “where the overall UN force commander will be Turkish Gen. Cevik Bir with an American deputy,” Roper said. American forces are also serving in Mozambique “under a UN commander”, he said.

“It is of interest that in 1993 U.S. forces are coming under the command of a UN force commander who is not an American and who is answerable to the UN Security Council,” Roper said.

This act of putting American soldiers under foreign command responsible to the UN is an unprecedented surrender of sovereignty. It is thus important to the goal of creating a world government, which can impose its will with a global army. This move was high on the Bilderberg agenda at Evian, France last year.

PERMANENT UN FORCE

“The United Nations must have at its permanent disposal a highly trained, standing-ready force of some four or five battalions--each with some 600-700 troops--drawn from one or two nations and trained to operate as a single unit,” Roper said. [C: Yes, and I suppose each will be armed with a cute little Israeli briefcase nuclear bomb?]

“At a second level, the United Nations should have rapid deployment forces from the armed forces of member states which could be deployed at a very few days‟ notice,” he said.

Small nations could join together to prepare brigade-sized forces while larger countries should each commit 5,000 men to the UN, he said, for a total backup force of 50,000.

A third level is necessary for major operations, such as the Persian Gulf War, where a coalition of larger forces would be established, Roper said.

The charter of the UN, as demonstrated in the Persian Gulf War, he said, makes NATO an arm of the UN. He also cited collaboration with UN efforts in the former Yugoslavia as evidence that NATO accepts its role as a UN force.

The UN army should have a permanent planning staff and headquarters, he said.

Enid C.B. Schoettle, a senior fellow at the Council on Foreign Relations--a propaganda tool of the world shadow government--called for immediately increasing UN assessments and then providing “independent resources”.

He suggested “international taxes on international air travel, shipping, global traffic flows and the like”.

ENTER SOVEREIGN NATIONS, UNINVITED

Olara Otunnu, a native of Uganda and now president of the International Peace Academy in New York, said the UN army will soon be able to enter sovereign nations, uninvited, to impose its will.

“There is a major evolution in thinking at the level of international public opinion that can no longer accept that massive and dramatic suffering should be shielded behind the walls of sovereignty,” he said.

“In effect the notion of what constitute the ”domestic affairs‟ of a state is undergoing some changes,” he said.

He cited the uninvited intervention in Somalia as the precedent for future interventions, in which no faction of warring parties invites the UN in to settle disputes and restore order.

Another bulky “discussion draft” report called for an “international migration regime” under the UN to determine who should be allowed to enter what country.

“An international migration regime would include new legal instruments and the operational capacity to respond to the full range of international migration situations,” the report said.

“A critical feature of such arrangements is that national decision authorities yield to international standards and scrutiny in their decision making”, the report said.

The United States was soundly criticized for refusing too many immigrants, not giving them enough financial support when they are admitted, and for a lack of “multicultural programs”. America has a “non-policy” on immigration, the authors of the report complained.

None of the American leaders attending these sessions was heard to object to these dramatic proposals to surrender national sovereignty in a number of crucial areas.

In fact, in one meeting, Trilateral Chairman Paul Volcker, former head of the Federal Reserve Board, told colleagues on a crowded elevator:

“We stay on substance, where we all agree.”

GLOBAL REGIME “DOWN THE ROAD”

Volcker is North American chairman of the Trilateral Commission is denying “that a world government is imminent” but acknowledged the “possibility” of one “down the road”. [C: Oh barf!]

The admission came at a “sweetheart” press conference when the group of international financiers and politicians concluded their little annual meeting of three-days behind closed doors.

“Mr. Volcker, the report on the UN calls for the establishment of a permanent UN force, to be deployed anywhere in the world by the Security Council.

The report celebrates the fact that 3,000 American soldiers will remain in Somalia under a Turkish Commander accountable to the UN and not to the United States.

“Does this unprecedented erosion of national sovereignty suggest the basis of a world government?” he was asked.

Volcker showed surprise at the question.

“This is a big psychological step, more so for the United States,” he responded. Then, apparently checking himself, he added: “Maybe...a few decades or so down the road, but it’s a long way from an--er-a world army.”

“Instead of each operation being ad hoc,” with forces being assembled from member countries, the UN needs to be able to respond militarily in an instant, he said.

Questioned on the Trilateralists’ “support” for the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA)--(they actually authored the whole idea), Volcker blandly said it would bring no “radical” change.

“The distribution of industries and relocations are going on right now---because barriers have been reduced,” Volcker said. “NAFTA isn’t going to radically change that.”

There is “logic in extending” the trade agreement throughout the Western Hemisphere “if NAFTA is implemented,” Volcker said.

A Trilateral goal is to establish economic and political union, similar to the European Community, throughout the Western Hemisphere. There is to be a “Pacific Rim Community” in the future as the world is divided into major “regions” for administration by a world government.

In part of a brief formal statement, the Trilateralists and “regional arrangements, including the European Community and North American Free Trade Agreement, constructively contribute to the world economy.”

* * *

And I bet you thought Congress and your own government decided such matters? Oops! That hasn’t been true since the turn of the century--if even then!

BUREAU OF ALCOHOL, TOBACCO AND FIREARMS

Does anyone other than me think it unusual that such a little arm of “the law” is tangled to its ears in death and destruction in places like a mountain top in Idaho, a little church home in Texas AND the New York Trade Center bombing?

Well, I am now accused of not giving the “other side” (the government’s) of the Waco incident so here goes: from U.S. News and World Report, (whose publisher was listed above as a Trilateralist and meeting attendee--that has to be “establishment”!). This comes from the March 15, 1993 edition.

A BOTCHED MISSION IN WACO, TEXAS

Judgment day approaches soon for the ATF.

Critics have tried to abolish it. Much of its mission involves ho-hum chores like preventing the sale of contraband cigarettes. It doesn’t even have its own TV show.

But the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms is a low-profile (??) agency no more. After a Sunday-morning firefight at the 77-acre Branch Davidian compound outside Waco, Texas, that left four agents dead, 15 injured and an undetermined number of cult members dead or wounded, the ATF faces its own judgment day. Its bosses in the Treasury Department, Congress and the public are all aching to know how such a delicate mission could go so disastrously awry. “I think this was a very ineptly planned operation. It was carried out with the same unfortunate inepitude,” says Tony Cooper, a former Justice Department terrorism expert who now teaches courses in terrorism and conflict resolution at the University of Texas at Dallas. Among the questions he and others ask:

Why wasn’t a less aggressive approach tried first? In 1988, when Branch Davidian leader David Koresh was charged in a shooting incident, he was taken into custody peacefully. The charges were eventually dismissed.

Why weren’t the compound’s phones tapped? If they had been, authorities would have learned that a tipsters had told Koresh about the raid.

If officials feared Koresh’s firepower and were counting on the element of surprise, why didn’t they raid before dawn when most of the 100 or so sect members would have been sleeping?

Why wasn’t the undercover agent who had infiltrated the group ordered to stay in the compound to face arrest with the others? That would have kept his cover and, if the raid failed, would have allowed better monitoring of the sect.

“Ambushed”. Bureau officials argue that such second-guessing is unfair. Cult leader Koresh was “sworn to resistance”, says Bureau spokesman Jack Killorin, who contends it was only prudent to plan a raid backed by serious firepower. The Houston Chronicle reported late last week that Koresh met agents just before the gunfire began. “One of our guys said, ”Federal agents--put your hands up‟,” one agent told the newspaper. “Koresh smiled, backed up and slammed the door. Almost immediately, within seconds, we were ambushed.”

Although a wiretap might have helped prevent the slaughter, ATF spokesman Tom Hill says court officials would have rejected the request because the bureau could just as easily have received the information from its undercover agent. Bureau commanders also decided it was safe for its infiltrator to leave the compound, ATF Deputy Director Dan Hartnett says, because when he left “everything was normal”. And Hill says ATF commanders decided to storm the ranch in the late morning because “that was the time when the children would come out to play and would be separated from the adults.”

Despite such justifications, questions about the botched raid are fueling broader attacks on the ATF. Since overcoming efforts during the Reagan administration to abolish the agency and transfer its responsibilities to the Secret Service and the Customs Service, the bureau has expanded. Just 2,900 ATF employees were on the payroll in 1985; there are about 4,300 today. At the same time, the average age of ATF agents has decreased from 40 years to about 35. Josh Sugarmann of the Violence Policy Center claims the bureau has attempted to reshape its image to justify its growing budget and staff: “They like to be seen as the guys who kick in crack-house doors.” Sugarmann wonders whether recent negative publicity--accusations that the ATF has turned a blind eye to sexual-harassment charges and was slow in promoting members of minority groups--might have influenced the decision to proceed with this high-profile raid.

The agency is in such turmoil, in fact, that some question its capacity to keep abreast of the growing menace of private arms caches. Not long ago, the business of collecting weapons arsenals was mostly the province of hate groups, survivalist sects and religious cults. Now experts say that such firepower is finding its way into the hands of lone citizens. “We get evidence of this when seemingly just ordinary folks are arrested,” says Angie Lowery of Klanwatch.

On January 5, for example, police raided the home of Paterson, N.J., police Lt. William A. Van Kluyve and seized more than 100 pieces of semiautomatic weapons in a workshop, as well as pamphlets spelling out how to convert semi-automatic weapons into machine guns, and $97,000 in cash. Van Kluyve was charged with official misconduct and conspiracy to purchase prohibited weapons. In 1990, police in Ute, Iowa, seized $90,000 worth of illegal weapons, including a Thompson submachine gun, an AK-47, pistols, hand grenades and bayonets from Joseph Spencer, a former telephone company employee. He was arrested on weapons and drug charges. Police found white-supremacist propaganda in that raid, but Spencer did not seem to be affiliated with a hate group.

There are still plenty of such groups to worry officials, Jerry Wiedenhoff, a sergeant with the Kootenai County sheriff’s office in Idaho, says weapons are rumored to be stockpiled on the Aryan Nations’s 17-acre compound in Hayden Lake. Carl Franklin, the Aryan Nation’s chief of staff, admits that he and individual members own weapons, but he denies that the church is stockpiling.

STOCKPILER

In 1989, the survivalist Church Universal and Triumphant in Corwin Springs, Mont., was caught up in a weapons stockpiling controversy. Edward Francis, husband of church leader Elizabeth Clare Prophet, and the church’s security officer were convicted of conspiracy in buying nearly $150,000 worth of assault rifles and more than 120,000 rounds of ammunition. Church spokesman Murray Steinman says the pair acted without the sanction of Prophet or the church.

Some worry that the events in Waco are a harbinger. “As we get closer to the millennium, there will be more and more people who will be arming themselves for the end of the world,” predicts sociologist James Aho at Idaho State University, author of “The Politics of Righteousness”. The problem is that ATF’s handling of the raid in Waco does not instill confidence that it is the best agency to figure out what the proper responses should be.

* * *

Now if any of you can’t see the handwriting of truth between those prior lines--GO SIT IN CORNER WITH A DUNCE-CAP ON YOUR HEAD! Who cares about protection from the “millennium” or end of the world chaos--God protect you all from the protectors!! Remember this was a branch action of MKULTRA--the troop brainwashing robotic army in action. There is no compassion, no reason and no honor--just blast away and, as in Waco, blow a 6 year-old child in half in the opening round. Indeed, your world is in serious trouble when you have to bring in such force against the “churches”. DO YOU READ THAT HANDWRITING ON THE TOMBSTONES, CHELAS? I THOUGHT SO.

May you walk in Light, precious friends, as the way becomes more and more confusing as the enemy efforts to bring you down. You CAN make it within this terrible system come upon you IF you will walk in reason and wisdom.

Ceres to take leave. Thank you.,

CHAPTER 6

REC #1 CERES ‘ATONN

SUN., APRIL 18, 1993 9:58 A.M. YEAR 6, DAY 245

SUNDAY, APRIL 18, 1993

TODAY!

Since we are putting together a paper sans Chief Editor, let us just cover the bare necessities of the day. Realize, please readers, that we are two full days ahead of press so when you get this it will be a tad older than is even “usual”.

L.A.: NO RIOTS

Better than riots for the Elite, is what is happening. Watch TWO things as outcome of this policemen’s trial. 1) Sheriff Block said that “probably, if nothing happens, after about 48 hours the VISIBLE presence of guard, etc., would lessen, BUT there will remain full capability of immediate action.” And OOPS!, “After all, we need to remain fully alert and management capable for the ”Big One‟--er, I mean here, for a possible ”Big One‟ earthquake as is expected, and not, in that instance, to stop rioting.” Uh Huh! What can he know that you don’t? ALMOST EVERYTHING!

2). The press was set up to stomp everything into the ground as riots spread throughout everywhere. When nothing happened the big flap is at the media for overkill and actually through the bombardment, citing to riot through questions and harassment. Say what?? Here you have another superb manipulation of the media to cause disallowance of even moderate follow-up of such incidents--in other words, more control over the little journalists who don’t know what hit them--and, a silencing of more and more information reaching you-the-people.

The “trials” are not over and neither is the trouble that is foundation to THIS one. Don’t be foolish, watchers, or you will be blinded by the “obvious” planted for you while the “real stuff” is totally missed.

SHUTTLE

Do any of you find it interesting that your shuttle was held in orbit until AFTER the verdict was KNOWN? You must be putting these incidents together, chelas.

WACKO WACO “STAND-OFF”

There is no “stand-off” and no “weird” sect. You have had an invasion of private property with intent to murder by your own government. There is no “hurry” to settle the “thing” in a manner expeditious, either--and you CAN get this truth through the nonsense they “tell” you.

They say they will just wait while Koresh writes his receivings on the Seven Seals, etc. THEN, when the man asks for a “word processor” which would speed the project by incomprehensible dimension--it is “NO”. What do you think about that? Well, it would look to me as if there is planned to “somehow” be “forced” to go in and murder them all. Since the last thing the government wants are witnesses--how do YOU think the government would like to end this nothing “stand-off”. “Stand-off” with an ATF SWAT team of unlimited numbers, the FBI, tanks, automatic weapons that can shoot “cluster” missiles AND capable of blowing up New York--nuclear weapons the size of a pack of chewing gum?

I say one thing right here and now: YOU ONES WHO CONTINUE TO SHUT DOWN TRUTH AND THE WORD OF TRUTH FROM SPREADING FAR AND WIDE THROUGH QUIBBLING OVER WHO GETS ATTENTION FOR THAT WORD--HAD BEST STOP IT OR THERE IS NOT A PRAYER OF GETTING ENOUGH PEOPLE INFORMED TO DO A CONFOUNDED THING AGAINST THESE MISERABLE ADVERSARIES OF LIFE ITSELF. WE, FOR INSTANCE, ARE WILLING TO SHARE OR GIVE AWAY, ANYTHING BEYOND ABSOLUTE “COST” OF PRODUCTION (AND HAVE UP TO NOW GIVEN FAR MORE AND NEVER HAD ONE “BREAK-EVEN” IN ANY PRESS).

We now shall have CONTROL over our work wherein up to now we have had to continue with a publisher and distributor to consider in fundamental “make it” mode. We still have to “make it” but we don’t have to give such fundamental attention to that need.

Our work is totally DATED JOURNAL MATERIAL. We do not write “BOOKS” as do other parties who do not actually do the same as we. We offer the truth as it floods over us amid the heaps of the tidal wave of total bunk, lies and/or good intentioned but often repetitious or lacking in ability to publish such information.

OTHER BOOKS

I believe the best thing which has come from these recent problems is the ability to offer to some (as we move along and can get enough profit to do so) the ability to have important work published who otherwise could never get it into print, i.e., Russbacher, Renick, Webb, etc. As we offer them help, they allow us to use “timely” information and we will then work out a way to publish and they shall receive the proceeds of the work to continue their own struggle and scattering of the inside information.

NO--THIS DOES NOT MEAN WE WILL PUBLISH A BUNCH OF “STUFF”. DO NOT SEND US MANUSCRIPTS--THERE IS NO ONE TO READ ANYTHING OF THE SORT--UNLESS YOU ARE, SAY, AS THESE OTHERS, LOCKED UP BY THE FEDS AND/OR SOMETHING OF THE SORT. OURS IS TO PUBLISH FOR IMMEDIATE CIRCULATION--TRUTH OF CIRCUMSTANCES--WE ARE NOT PUBLISHERS AND I SHALL NOT EVEN GIVE THE NAME OF OUR NEW PUBLISHER FOR “THEY” ARE AFRAID OF EXACTLY WHAT I ASK YOU NOT TO DO.

With material such as VAMPIRE 2000, WE SHALL GIVE PROCEEDS OF THE “BOOK” IN WHICH IT APPEARS, TO THE ORGANIZATION SPONSORING THE MATERIAL--THE POLICE INFORMATION GROUPS NEED EVERY CENT THEY CAN GET. WE SHALL ALSO GIVE ORDERING INFORMATION AND URGE YOU TO CONTACT THOSE PEOPLE FOR OTHER INFORMATION IN ADDITION TO THE MATERIAL ITSELF FOR WE DO NOT COVER THE ENTIRE MATERIAL--NEVER HAVE AND NEVER WILL. WE FUNCTION AS A TYPE OF REVIEWER OF INFORMATION, DISPERSER OF INFORMATION AND HOPEFULLY AS ENOUGH INFORMATION IS SENT TO US--OFFER RESOURCE FOR RESEARCH INFORMATION.

Please realize, readers, that most of our hard copy information is received with very little to NO information attached as even the sender usually does not wish to be identified. I can then only do that which any other writer does--give you what is feasible, give thanks to both the sender and the author and pray someone out there has enough information to later share.

Our task at this time is to awaken you sleeping people of God. There is no hope nor “mission” to awaken the MASSES of ones who have made choices to continue in their unGodly ways and beliefs. GOD IS COMING AGAIN TO GATHER HIS FLOCK AND RECLAIM HIS KINGDOM--REMEMBER? WE ARE ONLY THE HOST OF GOD TO PREPARE THE WAY AND LET YOU OF HIS FLOCK KNOW!

If ones of our own Earth crew pull away and resort to the ways of all other worldly affixed zombies--so be it for there is nothing we can nor shall do about it. WE NEVER TURN ANYWAY AWAY--ONES GO OF THEIR OWN VOLITION AND DESIRE! IF THEY WISH TO REENTER THE FOLD THAT IS FEASIBLE BUT NEVER AGAIN WILL THEY HAVE INPUT OR CONTROL OVER THAT WHICH FLOWS FORTH AS THE WORD. THEY CAN WORK WITH US AS ANY OTHER TALENTED, OR UNTALENTED, BEING WHO IS “GOOD AT” A GIVEN JOB. MANY ONES ARE WELL-GIVEN TO EXCELLENCE IN MANAGEMENT, ETC. WE WOULD NEVER DISALLOW PARTICIPATION BECAUSE OF DISAGREEMENT ON THE WAY A GIVEN THING MIGHT FUNCTION--IF IT BE OF WORLDLY PROJECT. THE WORD, HOWEVER, WILL NEVER AGAIN BE GIVEN INTO THE HANDS OF ONES PULLED IN OTHER DIRECTIONS THAN THAT OF THE WORD ITSELF.

This is in no way a reprimand to anyone--it simply is the way it IS. And further, when the pressure of staying alive financially has to be uppermost in consideration then we have to realize the trauma upon the “workers”. Our mission, nicely enough, is not JUST to bring THE WORD or writings. Its major thrust will ultimately be in allowing some business ventures to be established so that they might “example” and also be used to assure remnant passage as well as bring security to those who wish to find same.

These projects will always be in life-intent arenas, i.e., perfection of natural food substances so that you will also be able to have fertile seeds for growing if, indeed, there is need and no available resource because of earth changes or political impact.

You are GOING TO HAVE ECONOMIC COLLAPSE as you must know by this reading. Worse, NOW, it will come totally abruptly, move instantly and BE TOTALLY DEVASTATING. THEN, ALL OF YOU WILL WISH YOU HAD PAID ATTENTION AND UTILIZED THE INSTITUTE FOR A BIT OF BUILDING ASSISTANCE TO OUR WORKERS--AND, A BIT OF PROTECTION OF SOME ASSETS. Nothing has changed and moreover, with the recent attention--THE INSTITUTE IS MORE SOUND THAN EVER AND HAS PASSED ALL INSPECTIONS THUS FAR THRUST AGAINST IT.

Mr. Green and attorneys do still have “filed” challenge against the Institute to bring it into FORCED (involuntary) Receivership which can only hold the line more solidly--for that simply enforces the already sound corporate structure and by “other” law, prevents a “run” on ALL accounts.

This assault, however, has caused our own people to completely restructure the processing, however, for the sole benefit of continuing to assist ones of you who REALLY WANT TO PARTICIPATE (NOT JUST GRASP AND GAIN THROUGH GREED TO MAKE A “BUNDLE”--ALTHOUGH IN THE END, YOU WILL DO SO). Gold is going to go UP! Even the most inept of all economic advisers tell you so--BUT NO OTHER RESOURCE THAT I SEE, CAN OFFER WHAT WE CAN AS ESTABLISHED REPUTATION THAT ALLOWS IMMEDIATE INPUT, GOLD COLLATERAL PURCHASE AND RETURN OF FUNDS USING THAT COLLATERAL. IT TOOK YEARS TO ESTABLISH CAPABILITY AND WE HAVE NOW BEEN ALLOWED THROUGH THE WORST OF ALL CIRCUMSTANCES--ATTEMPTS TO DESTROY THROUGH POLITICAL, LEGAL AND TOTALLY ADVERSARIAL PRESSURES--TO PROVE ITS STABILITY. DO NOT DISALLOW THE WONDROUS “GOOD” WHICH COMES FROM THAT WHICH APPEARS DEVASTATING TO THE SENSES. Further, we are now shown what would be advantageous to better detail and explain requirements of participating persons as to “allowance for participation”. We also come to realize that you ones need a much better realization of HOW TO MANAGE A NEVADA CORPORATION. And, KNOW, that anyone wishing to participate in anything involving money sharing--other than simply contribution, WILL HAVE TO ESTABLISH AND USE FOR ITS PROPER PURPOSE, A NEVADA CORPORATION. HOW LONG WILL IT BE A VALID SHELTER? UNTIL YOU ALLOW ONES WHO WOULD DESTROY FOR THEIR OWN GREED THE TEARING DOWN OF SAME.

Funny thing about this, however, is that Nevada also shelters the greatest and wealthiest of the ADVERSARIAL TEAM-MATES so a little nasty step-son of a grandmother participant is NOT LIKELY TO GET THOSE GOODLY LAWS CHANGED??!! NEVADA AS A STATE IS SURVIVING NICELY AND WITH LESSER TAXES THAN ANY OTHER STATE--BECAUSE OF THOSE LAWS!

USE THE LAWS OF THE LAND PROPERLY AND WITHOUT GREED UNTO SELF--AND YOU SHALL NOT ONLY BE MOSTLY LEFT ALONE--BUT WILL, IN FACT, IF HANDLED PROPERLY--FLOURISH. If, however, you can’t make up your mind from breakfast to dinner what you want or where you wish to go--forget involving any of my crew because they are flat out of good-will toward wishy-washy human beings. They also take no liking to any who come forth to form armies with weapons. There is no group, cult, gathering circle OR “operation” going on here. Some of the ones who felt a need to come here already find it absent of work placement and premature for any “jobs”, etc. We cannot “find” a place for your service, chelas. If YOU can suggest a need and can do it without funding from this resource--so be it. Mostly ones are pulled here because it appears some magnificent thing is happening--yes it indeed is: court cases, voluntary work at mailings but not an overabundance of even that service and a long wait for even the makings of survival incomes--unless you can get a job in the community or nearby communities. There is no “commune” or central banking resource--no one here has anything for self and barely makes ends meet even with the aid of food-stamps.

Some are so lacking in understanding and “permanent” recognition of their own actions in intent as to change with the wind--put in their sharing funds for a long term use as with any bank investment--only to turn around, decide on another jaunt into lala land and pull it out while demanding “yours” too. If you wouldn’t consider dropping everything in your world, uprooting and moving into Col. Gritz’s dooryard for him to find a place and support for you--then for goodness sakes, don’t come here where the dooryard has already been TAKEN BY THE RTC! I know you are each and all, who find us in Truth, ready, willing and able to serve--but “I” nor my crew, have the “time” to focus on “your” needs. Talk to GOD about it and then specifically OFFER if you think there is placement, etc. WE HAVE ALL WE CAN HANDLE JUST MAKING IT ONE DAY TO THE NEXT. YOUR SUPPORT IS BLESSED AND WE COULD NOT MAKE IT AT ALL WITHOUT YOUR INPUT--WE HAVE SUCH WONDROUS REGULAR PARTICIPANTS FROM AROUND THIS GLOBE THAT MAKES OUR WORK NOT ONLY POSSIBLE BUT SUPERB--EACH IS NO LESS A TEAM-PLAYER THAN ANY ONE IN THIS LOCATION--THE WORLD IS ALL OVER--NOT IN THIS TINY VILLAGE WITH ALMOST NO JOBS AVAILABLE. THE WORLD IS GOING TO HAVE TO MAKE IT OR BREAK IT--SO KNOW THAT ALMOST NONE WILL ACTUALLY BE NECESSARY HERE. WHY IS A LOT OF OUTSIDE “COMMAND” HERE? BECAUSE THIS IS WHERE “WE ARE STATIONED”.

I cannot even give you “safe” zones, as such. In fact, unless you are among our team--this very location is going to be one of the most deadly places to “hang out”. I am not free to tell you more than THAT about the circumstance. We have a “job” and “holding individual hands” is NOT PART OF IT. If, further, you are not in understanding of this, then you are not in tune enough to even consider such change. If you are still asking a Space Commander for your vigil and communion other than as friends and “team” crew, then you are missing my spiritual presentation--THAT IS BETWEEN YOU AND GOD!!! I pray that you not be offended for all must grow and each may petition but you will find no specific guidance--for ultimately, KNOWING and realizing input is all that will be given--within and “by” SELF. If your intent is, moreover, to simply celebrate and garner some of that wondrous treasure of El Dorado--think again for greedy ingathering is NOT THE PURPOSE OF THE TREASURE OF GOD! Is there such thing? YES. Where is it? YOU WOULD NOT KNOW IF I TOLD YOU! BUT, Dharma would then be aware--and therefore, DEAD. If this, too, you object to and cannot understand--then you are not ready for TRUTH! Thank you.

CHAPTER 7

REC #3 CERES ‘ATONN

SUN., APRIL 18, 1993 12:31 P.M. YEAR 6, DAY 245

SUNDAY, APRIL 18, 1993

TODAY!

OUR INVISIBLE FRIENDS

From the myriad interruptions of the day we sit to pen and Dharma Wokini bows her head and says, “Father I don’t understand. I am hounded and stricken and caused to ‘explain’ that which I can’t fully understand, and I am so weary from it all. I only wish to return to my own little hole in this world and be left to the misery of every other creature trying to survive where there seems to be no way for such. I cannot understand the makings of nuclear suitcase bombs or fathom the evil connections with other nations and our own chosen leaders who despise and work to destroy us. I don’t understand the workings of higher dimensions and God’s gifting of insight or communication with a spiritual world which is so simple and constant that I cannot see how others would ask for they MUST also see and hear. Father, give insight to ‘them’ for I know not how to express it and not be buried in this ridicule and constant harassment. Is there no end to the badgering and taunting?”

Ah indeed, to cause a mind to “realize” a thing and then, to accept it and stand ready with others who do, is a long and difficult walk in the light at the edge of the dark chasm with one foot always over the void. It is impossible to cause a REFUSING mind to see or hear--it is difficult at best, to allow insightful vision to one who seeks and actually WANTS to FIND that connection in Truth. It has ever been thus. What I wish to share with you readers at this moment is something along these lines which might help. It was written as a “FOREWORD” in a book called OUR INVISIBLE FRIENDS, assembled by Maurice Allen.

However, the grace of this writing is offered as to insight by Ralph Waldo Trine. I have no more information on the volume except: Liveright Publishing Corporation, New York. July, 1943.

I make no comment whatsoever about the book in point--I refer only to the “Foreword” in that in expression as given might share with you the capability and spiritual connections present if utilized. To translate as does Dharma is NOT the same, I must hasten to add, for that is directed communication IN LANGUAGE TRANSLATION which is “secretarial” and not necessarily “spiritual” guiding or visionary perception. Don’t confuse the two--but neither should you deny EITHER as valid and credible experience.

All of you who would read this material as offered are at least open to the possibility of God, Christed beings, spiritual truth AND the connections of the TIME AT HAND. I am not interested in bringing Mr. Satan to attention except to LET MY PEOPLE GO. Please understand the difference for we are not here to SAVE anything or anyone. We are here to offer insight, knowledge in Truth and of Truth and bring our people HOME! That means--to Lighted God. Adversarial humans or robotic beings are NOT ON OUR TRAVEL LIST. EVIL SHALL NOT BE BROUGHT WITHIN THE KINGDOM OF GOD IN TRANSITION INTO THOSE PLACES OF GOD’S PROGRESSIVE SCHOOLS.

* * *

QUOTING:

“What visioned image shall I seek

To hear the halting words I speak

Or shall my message be addressed

To some dim god within my breast?

Or is there still some higher goal--

Some final haven for the soul?

* * *

Hollywood, Calif. July, 1943

Ralph Waldo Trine

One of the most interesting characteristics of this, our time, is the large and increasing numbers of men and women who are taking an ever growing interest in the inner things of life, the inner powers and forces--the things of the mind and spirit. This is well, for here lie the very springs of life, the forces that determine according as they are understood, and wisely or unwisely used, the outcome of ever life.

Our thoughts and emotions as creative forces are continually at work, and are creating, externalizing conditions, so to speak, according to their kind. This is true both as to one’s affairs, and of one’s bodily conditions.

The law that the life always and inevitably follows the thought seems to be absolute.

Of the vital power of thought and the supremacy of mind and thought over conditions, the world has scarcely the faintest grasp as yet--and the increased activity in the study of their nature and action gives great hope for the future. That special Departments, to these ends, have been established at Harvard University and at Duke University among others for example, is most significant.

My own conclusion, in line with that of many others, is that thought as a force lies in the realm of vibration.

We are apprehending more and more the finer forces in this realm--as the process of all evolution seems to be from the coarser to the finer. The wonderful facts and laws of vibration in the physical world that we have been searching for, finding and using, in the fields of Electronics and Radionics, even now make us marvel.

But of even greater and more real value so far as the life itself is concerned--our common human life--is this deeper understanding of the laws underlying the fact that thoughts are forces: they have form and quality and substance and power.

Thought transference, now a thoroughly well-established fact, can be the better understood in the light of our increasing knowledge of the laws of vibration.

Some years ago an experience was told to me that has been the cause of many interesting observations since. It was related by a man living in one of our noted university towns in the Middle West, a well-known lecturer manager, a man of splendid character, with a sensitive organism, as we say, and who had always taken considerable interest in the powers and forces pertaining to the inner life.

As a young man he had left home, and during a portion of his first year away he had found employment on a Mississippi steamboat. One day in going down the river, while he was crossing the deck, a sudden stinging sensation seized him in the head, and instantly vivid thoughts of his mother, back at the old home, flashed into his mind. This was followed by a feeling of depression during the remainder of the day. The occurrence was so unusual and the impression of it was so strong that he made an account of it in his diary.

Some time later, on returning home, he was met in the yard by his mother. She was wearing a thin cap on her head which he had never seen her wear before. He remarked in regard to it. She raised the cap and revealed the remains of a long ugly gash on the side of her head. She then said that some months back, naming the time, she had gone into the back yard and had picked up a heavy crooked stick having a sharp end, meaning to throw it out of the way, and in throwing it, the stick had struck the wire clothesline immediately above her head and had rebounded with such force that it had given her this deep scalp wound. On unpacking his bag he looked into his diary and found that the time she had mentioned exactly corresponded with his strange presentiment on the Mississippi.

The mother and son were very near to one another, close in their sympathies, and there can be but little doubt that the thoughts of the mother as she was struck went out, strongly, to her boy who was now away from home. He, alone at the time, being sensitively organized and intimately related to her in thought, undoubtedly received, if not her thoughts, at least the effects of her thoughts, as they went out to him under these peculiar and tense conditions.

There are scores if not hundreds of occurrences of a more or less similar nature that have changed in the lives of others, many of them well authenticated.

In the realm of mind and thought and their interplay in connection with the inner powers and forces, we are making new strides in an ever enlarging knowledge of the subconscious mind and its unceasing building activities--how it takes its direction from the active thinking mind, and is continually building and externalizing in the body according to the pattern sent it--whether it be consciously or unconsciously on the part of the sender.

We are understanding now more clearly the laws of its working, that produced mere general observations many times in the past. It was that able scholar and investigator, Sir John Lubbock, who a considerable time ago said: “We must be careful on what we allow our minds to dwell, the soul is dyed by its thoughts.” Shakespeare anticipated by many years the best psychology of our time when he said: “It is the mind that makes the body rich.”

Then again there are certain faculties we possess that are not a part of the active thinking mind; they seem to be no part of what we might term our conscious intelligence. Through some avenue, suggestions, intuitions of truth, intuitions of occurrences of which the thinking mind could know nothing are at times borne in upon us; they flash into our consciousness quite independent of any mental action on our part, and sometimes when we are thinking of something quite foreign.

This seems to indicate a source of knowledge, a faculty that is distinct from, but that acts in various ways in conjunction with, the active thinking mind. It performs likewise certain very and distinct functions in connection with the body.

It is this that is called by some the super-conscious or the super-normal mind, or the extra-conscious--by others the subliminal self.

Maybe it is this that Emerson had in mind when he said: “I believe in the still small voice, and that voice is the Christ within me.” Or again when he said: “Every soul is not only the inlet but may become the outlet of all there is in God.”

Again there are those, and their number is very great, who are anxious to know whether it is possible under right conditions to have communion with those functioning on another plane of existence--a spiritual body that gave form and action to the body they left here.

Some years ago--it was in Boston--it was my privilege to know a man who in mind and body was far more sensitively organized than the ordinary man or woman. He was for years a well-known teacher and lecturer--primarily in the states and in England, Australia and New Zealand.

He seemed to have a faculty of contact with something somewhere that the ordinary man or woman does not have. The term sensitive would seem to be rightly applied to them.

Acquaintance with him opened my eyes to the fact that there are those who through inheritance or whatever it may be, are so equipped as to be instruments of reception of forces or influences far greater than the ordinary.

There were those who heard his words and followed his thoughts--we might almost say at times revelations--who thought that the source of his insight and power was to be attributed to his unique endowment that enabled him to fulfill in a perfectly natural way the edict of Emerson: “The life of the soul in conscious union with the Infinite shall be for thee the only real existence.”

Again there were those who always felt that he was an instrument played upon by other intelligences--a sensitive instrument, so to speak. Contact with this remarkable man has ever since held me to the attitude of the open mind, and to value and follow with a sympathetic interest the purposes and the efforts of such men as Sir William Barrett, Conan Doyle, Sir Oliver Lodge, and others who with trained minds and splendid equipment sought the facts that pertain to the life beyond. Truly, the only way to find the truth of anything is to go after it in a careful, methodical and determined way.

The author of this book with a college training, then his Institute of Technology training in naval architecture and civil engineering, in addition to a legal training and law practice over a number of years, would seem to be well equipped for findings that would lend weight to these investigations. His determination to put away prejudices one way or another in his search for the truth, aside from the facts themselves, would seem to make his conclusions all the more worthwhile.

This statement in the body of the book is interesting to note: “I believe we may be on the threshold of a new era in spirit communication, an era in which communication will be had with fully conscious human beings, and I hope the experiments outlined here may encourage others to try something of the same sort. Other experimenters, with greater sensitivity to reception, may be able to proceed much further in demonstrating the useful application of unknown laws.

“If you are unwilling to trust the good faith of anyone else in this business--if you are afraid of fraud or gullibility in others--why not try yourself? You may be surprised at what will come into your mind if you give these friends an opportunity to reach you. Call it your unconscious or your subconscious if you will--or call it the Cosmic Mind--or call it your oversoul--or your familiar spirit--or your guardian angel--I have no quarrel with whatever term you may prefer to use--but don’t do any censoring. There will be plenty of time for discussions and explanations and criticism after the sessions are ended--but write it all. [C: Ok, here we have a REAL bad bit of input!! Yes indeed, you WILL pick up energy forms and moreover, they will first come FROM the astral planes if unattached to your own “higher mind” and often, even from your own higher-mind will come the dark interpreters locking you to the physical perceptions of spiritual being. CLEAR THAT SPACE--NOTIFY THE ENERGY FORMS THAT YOU WILL, WITHIN GOD POWER--DISALLOW PRESENCE OF OTHER THAN LIGHTED GOD BEINGS! DO NOT PLAY WITH ENERGY FORMS--FOR THE BASTARDS OF THE UNIVERSE COME FIRST. IF YOU ALLOW IT--THEY WILL ALSO BE LAST!]

“There would seem to be no purpose in entering upon such experimentation unless you decide whole-heartedly to set down whatever may come into your mind...Write it all.”

These lines by Thomas B. Aldrich, on the passing of the poet, Bayard Taylor, contain not only great beauty of form but seem to voice a longing or indeed a conviction shared by many:

“What new strange quest has tempted him once more to leave us? Vainly standing by the shore, we strain our eyes. But patience! When the soft spring gales are blowing over Cedarcroft, whitening the Hawthorne: When the violets bloom along the Brandywine, and overhead the sky is blue as Italy’s, he will come! Aye, he will come. I cannot make him dead.”

Life is interesting--it may be greater, with farther horizons, and more enduring than we know. Whitman helped us to the forward look when he wrote:

“I laugh at what you call dissolution

And I know the amplitude of time.”

* * *

May I utilize another written word to emphasize that of which I cautioned above? You must have “experience” for only through experience can you learn expression and know self. It is truth that actually God sends experience and nothing else for through experience is man taught, is man led and gives forth all expressions be they of pain or pleasure.

Through this experience you achieve your ennoblement--or your lack thereof. It is, therefore, for you also to LEARN that which is truth of progression and that which represents physical stagnation and rot in a lower dimensional circumstance.

Light is given to show the way--and you may take it or reject it for you must forever teach and test selves. Experience makes you “masters” and what matters the journey except that you KNOW it?

So allow us to write a bit herein from a beautiful volume called the Golden Scripts. Chap. 27:

Men are as children in regard to one another, they behold no hurt unless they be injured, they flee from small fears, the times roar and upset them: they go to and fro crying. We are lost without a shepherd; there is non to adjure us.

They seek leadership of wolves and expect to be protected; they ask help of their deceivers and exclaim at their mockery. Wherefore do they cry with a loud lamentation, Behold we have no protection, we keep vigilance among us, there are none to encompass us and keep the tempest from us!

They have fear in their hearts, they delay at the omens, doing only those things that are seemly for deliverance; they do serve two ends, their own and the adversary’s, they do set two masters over themselves, their conceits and their terrors; they say, We may have other masters but we know them not, so how can we follow them?

I tell them to be circumspect, to call upon the Father: behold they hear me not, they make a great tumult and drown out my voice.

I say, Consult me and I guide you; they say, Daily do we consult with thee, Master, but therefrom derived no profit that we witness; lo, benefits engulf them, they refuse to behold them.

They worship idols of desirings, they think that their initiative hath done marvels with contraptions; they recognize me not in any phase of living, that I am the cause of inventive benefactions.

They come to me timidly, not knowing what to ask for, thinking my gifts will ennoble them above worldly fortunes provided by themselves; they say, Master, we adore thee, yet art thou as a myth, thou seekest no practicalities of intercourse with us, thou rearest up walls of famine of the spirit asking us to dread thee; thou hast designs upon our hearts but give our heads no counsel; thou makest mock of our helplessness and yet we would serve thee if we but knew the manner.

I say, Children, be hushed! Wouldst ye make me the evil one? I create no confusion, I design no false witness to abominate in mischiefs, I work only for your good, I seek those things that profit you; I give you good thoughts and ye reject them in that ye reject me who giveth them.

Men have a humor to abominate in thought; they seek from thought to profit, they only seek conflict; they speak from the mouth and not from the heart; they say, Lo, we are wise in our own understanding, when only are they fluent of speech or of concept.

They make mouthings of ether; they give and take with circumspection that which hath no value of eternity; they call their myths wisdom.

I tell you man hath a higher calling than that which cometh from his mouth to the detriment of his neighbor or the impoverishment of his intellect.

Know that I have told you that men are twofold in the exercise of spirit: they seek that which is eternal, they seek that which is practical; eternal things have value because they are eternal, practical things have value in that they suffice for the needs of the moment.

Time hath not changed eternal things; time hath wrought grievously with things that are practical.

Men have the stronger leaning toward that which is practical in the things perceived by the senses; eternal things are perceived by the mind.

Eternal things are concrete of concept but abstract of development; practical things are abstract of concept when left to the senses but concrete of evolution.

Concrete things have value in eternal time and thought; abstract things are abstract in the matter considereth them to be concrete; concrete things are things of eternal profit; abstract things have no profit, not being eternal of concept. Perceive ye the difference from what men call concrete.

Men want that which is denied them; they seek the prohibited; they want light on life’s mysteries; verily they want light on that which they call abstruse, thinking it redeemeth them.

They know a curiosity, ever they would penetrate that which is hidden; verily it amuseth them; they have pleasure in discovering; they make a deep venture and entertainment cometh; they make speech among themselves, proud of their courage that experience hath borne them through caverns of attemptings; they say, We are gods, exploring new worlds. I tell you they are children playing with new toys; they seize upon the brightly colored; when its interests ceaseth, lo, do they discard it.

They say they are concerned with practical things; I tell you it is only for the novelty in them; they see changing forms and are amused; they probe among profundities of intellect and lo, they are not amused. They behold pitfalls for their intellects.

They say, Our father taught us certain things: they are eternal things of old, they have profitable aspects as each generation discovereth them and applieth them to use, but they are not things of interest when we have once rehearsed them; we seek that which is novel; novel is discovery; we seek for unborn generations that which may profit them in that it is not known to us at present.

Verily they lie; they want only pleasing in finding out, rarely, that knowledge that enricheth the spirit. I tell you, beloved, that men shall be confounded as they seek to progress without knowledge of spiritual verities that come from realities concrete in eternal time.

Men gain no objectives when they explore for sake of novelty; they gain when they explore to seize on spiritual truth, and the culture which cometh from knowing that destiny planned for them by the Father.

Ye have heard it said that men are tolerant when they are filled with the Father’s spirit; I say to you, Verily, tolerance hath its place, yet many may be filled with the Father’s spirit, not having tolerance.

Doth it seem to you strange? Harken to my wisdom: ye have tolerance of a sort when ye give unto a beggar; ye have tolerance of a sort when ye make sally with one who walketh up-rightly yet maketh errors in his judgments; ye have tolerance of a sort when ye give unto him who asketh of you in that he wanteth and even so needeth; But tolerance hath its merits and demerits; it is man’s insurance against his own conceits; he maketh himself to walk godlike, who saith, I tolerate because I love, and I love because I tolerate.

Mayhap the beggar meriteth not compassion; would it be godlike to indulge him to his hurt?

Mayhap the friend pursueth a righteousness, yet tolerance of his judgments bestoweth on him no profits.

Mayhap he who asketh for you, asketh of an artifice; your tolerance destroyeth the godhood within him, it gaineth him a usury, it maketh him a pestilence.

Are not such intolerances godlike in their essence?

[C: Right here is where you cut the “unconditional so-called LOVE” from the truth of it. Many of you refer to “unconditional Love” as your singular badge of some kind of honor or grasped meaning--when what you are actually offering is not LOVE at all for, in loving there is continual and constant “conditioning” and placing of “conditions” on physical expression and actions. LOVE IS WITHIN THE SPIRITUAL EXPRESSION AND THEREIN LIES THE MYSTERY.]

Ye have heard it said of old that man shall do whatsoever seemeth to him profitable in the light of his experience; I say it is false!... Do that which is wise in the Light of God’s LAW: always this is tolerance.

Nothing in ethics is greater than this; behold it IS ethics.

Tolerate that which cometh to you out of humankind, knowing that all concerned have need of it; hold tolerance in abeyance till the spirit be served and the heart be ennobled.

Once I gave you instruction in that which ye call Charity; I said, it suffereth long, behold it is kind: but behold Tolerance suffereth seventy times seven and is kind throughout; yet do I repeat, there is tolerance and TOLERANCE.

There is tolerance of evil and injustice and mercy thwarted: there is tolerance that bringeth profit in human relationships, that maketh men know patience.

TOLERANCE is one thing; toleration is another.

A man cometh to you who hath money in his purse; he saith: I give the pence to you if ye do me a service; you ask of him the service and he saith, “The pence have a condition, that ye know not the service.” That is absurd and ye say it rightly and yet he saith, I insist upon it; he maketh you to anger; ye deem that his wits are of mental unsoundness; ye say, “Begone, ye worker of iniquities, behold ye entrap me in legions of mischiefs.”

Cometh another to you who saith: I pay ye the pence if ye do me the service; ye do ask him the nature of the service and it seemeth goodly to you; ye perform such service and seek your compensation; lo, it is denied you; He who hath promised, delivereth not. I tell you, beloved, requite yourself on neither.

Know that ye have need of tolerance no matter what cometh; he who maketh the absurd proposal hath as great a need of tolerance as he who maketh you to know loss of effort, being unpaid for services rendered.

I say that tolerance is the shibboleth of man’s duties to his fellows; the Father hath decreed that we bear with one another, being perfect of origin but come to know darkness that light might ennoble us.

Tolerance maketh allowance for the darkness that deceive; tolerance is the beauty of the Eternal, shining in men’s relationships.

It is beauteous to be tolerant, for lo, the Father cometh unto him who is tolerant; God cometh unto him who seeketh tolerance for others, having justice in his heart.

Mark my words well: the Father’s law is paramount; Tolerance ennobleth by judgments correctly rendered.

Do that which is just and the justice IS the tolerance.

* * *

Now, go back and read the part about “judgments” just two sentences above: JUDGMENT IS FOR “ACTIONS” OF MAN--NOT UPON MAN HIMSELF! UNTIL YOU KNOW THE DIFFERENCE IN DISCERNMENT AND JUDGMENT--YOU CANNOT EXPRESS “UNCONDITIONAL LOVE” OR ANY OTHER SPIRITUAL EXPRESSION IN YOUR LACK OF UNDERSTANDING OF MEANING THEREOF. YOU CAN EVEN BE TOLERANT OF ANOTHER’s ACTIONS IF THEY BE WRONG; HOWEVER, IF YOU JOIN IN WITH THE WRONG ACTIONS AS IF THE ACTION BE CORRECT--YOU ARE WRONG NO MATTER THAT LABEL WHICH YOU PLACE THEREON. It is easy, let us say, to be “tolerant” of ignorance--it is stupid to be tolerant of stupidity and, within it, participate.

So be it, may we each learn and grow in both discernment and judgments that we may reach out to receive that which flows from greater intelligence, greater KNOWING, beyond the self presented in the physical form of walking houses.

Ah and so, too, may you know that the above quotation is from that which William Pelly shared with you from his great ability to translate from higher Source. I asked how many of you knew who is this man, Pelley, and almost no one had heard of his label. Well, chelas, GET TO KNOW IT, for he has brought the Teachings of the Christed Teacher unto you and MOST HAVE MISSED OF IT!

I have another unfortunate thing to announce: Here again, as with Walter Russell, who gave everything he had unto human species--and yet you have the “Heirs of William Dudley Pelley”, CLAIMING COPYRIGHT TO THIS TRUTH IN THIS “TODAY”. Even I shall not overcome the “copyright” because it is not a “tangible” truth in knowledge with which we deal, with Pelley, as with Russell whose only projection we note is his SCIENTIFIC EXPRESSION OF PHYSICS AS RELATES TO CREATION, GOD AND PHYSICAL MANIFESTATION. TRUTH IS NOT COPYRIGHTABLE BUT ARGUMENTS OVER SAME ARE STUPID. WHEN, HOWEVER, TRUTH OF EVEN PHYSICAL EXPRESSION ACCORDING TO SCIENTIFIC KNOWLEDGE IS WITHHELD IT IS “CRIME”, NOT PERCEPTION. So be it.

The Golden Scripts can be gotten, I guess, through the Aquila Press, Inc., Noblesville, Ind.

I would suggest caution in diving headlong into this as “GOSPEL” truth to end all things and beings. When a thing is “copyrighted” against public use--it usually represents very poor INTENT and therefore must be considered with all caution.

THIS IS A GOOD PLACE TO NOW ASK OUR EDITORS TO REMOVE ANY COPYRIGHTS FROM ALL OF OUR WRITINGS. We allowed America West to utilize such for we were told it was the only way to have identification through the Library of Congress. I DON’T GIVE A GOOD “BY GOLLY” ABOUT THE LIBRARY OF CONGRESS AND NONE OF GOD’S MATERIAL SHALL BEAR SUCH SHACKLES. IF A THING IS WORTHY OF TRUTH AS TO DISTRIBUTION--IT MUST BE OFFERED TO ALL FOR REPRODUCTION AND SHARING OR IT IS INVALID IN INTENT OF GOD’S PROJECTED WORD UNTO HIS PEOPLE. Rewards in “need” of the physical can be worked out to the benefit of all but repression of Truth through any means IS NOT OF GOD! FURTHER, THE SYMBOL AND LISTING ITSELF SIMPLY PLACES YOUR INFORMATION INTO THE HANDS OF YOUR ENEMY WITHOUT EVEN HESITATION OF PASSAGE--IT REPRESENTS TOTAL BINDING--NOT SAFETY OR SHIELD. IT IS THE MOST RESTRICTIVE ONE ENTITY FOR ASSURANCE OF INFORMATION INTO WRONG AND ADVERSARIAL HANDS OTHER THAN PATENTS WHICH GIVE ALL SECRETS OF INVENTION DIRECTLY INTO THE HANDS OF YOUR THIEVES AND TYRANTS IN POWER. PONDER IT!

Let us clear this portion, please. Thank you, Ceres to clear.

CHAPTER 8

REC #1 CERES ‘ATONN

WED., APRIL 21, 1993 9:26 A.M. YEAR 6, DAY 248

WEDNESDAY, APRIL 21, 1993

WACO, TEXAS

We are inundated with requests to speak on the subject of what happened at Branch Davidian. What happened there was as well orchestrated as any Broadway play. Further, it is not what it appears to be any more than was the Jim Jones incident. Moreover, the man called “Koresh” is not any deader than was (is) Jim Jones. YOU, AMERICANS, ARE GOING TO BE BROUGHT INTO AND UNDER CONTROL--NO MORE AND NO LESS. THIS IS THE MOST EFFECTIVE FORM OF TERRORISM AVAILABLE TO THE ELITE--TO PRESENT A SHOW-AND-TELL OF TOTAL ANNIHILATION OF ANYONE WHO “BREAKS” ANY OF THE LAWS THEY HAVE CONJURED TO KEEP YOU HELPLESS AND IN SERVITUDE.

I ask that the Editors pull together information (and rumors) from the “insiders who know and ‘pretend’ speculation” what the probabilities ARE. Then, assemble things from new gatherings of information at the Las Vegas meeting and present them in the CONTACT, please. At the rate we are going I shall likely be deprived of a scribe and there are now “contacts” who can flesh out the missing pieces pretty well--at least well enough to cause ability to sleuth. I would like you to present, even if bad quality, the picture witnessed by and taken by ones with Eric Lighter serving papers on BATF agents in midtown WACO. NOTE, FOR GOODNESS SAKES, WHAT IS PAINTED ACROSS THE FRONT OF THE TRUCK IN THE PICTURE--STILL THINK THE TOUGH GUYS WERE JUST PUMPING A LITTLE CRYING/LAUGHING GAS INTO THE COMPOUND? CONTINUE YOUR HEAD BURYING AND THEY WILL BLOW YOUR ASSETS AWAY WITHOUT BLINKING AN EYE.

COURT AND JAIL-TIME

Now, you nice readers have heard what has been going on with the “Green” and US&P case as involves us. On Friday afternoon Mr. Green found that his indiscretions regarding selling of impounded books COULD COST HIM AS MUCH AS $12 MILLION DOLLARS! He then offered a “settlement” which would include the Institute bearing a loss in some respects but WOULD cut out the stupid and endless expenses to legal counsel and time. The offer was accepted and when presented to Mr. Green he blew his cork at the attorney and declined it.

Now we know WHY. When court was convened in Fresno on Monday afternoon, Mr. Green had a new attorney who rode totally on the coattails of the US&P counsel wherein no mention of Greens was permitted other than to lie and present their declarations that they sold no books, had no knowledge or participation of anything--wrong or right. And before the non-hearing was over the judge had alluded to putting Doris Ekker in jail at least three times.

This judge did break with all known accepted rules, however, and allowed Dr. Young to actually testify. The entire face of the court changed. The judge perked up in RESPECT and the court clerks stopped their giggling and eye-wallering and the US&P attorney actually paled into very sober attention. PLEASE KNOW, readers, that encounters of this type can only bring recognition of truth even though the blasts are painful and frightening. If the “hearing” were not already over an hour and a half beyond allotted “time”--we would have put Dharma (ME & GERMAIN) aboard to do a little demonstration. But the judge had had enough and had to rethink quite a few misconceptions.

I welcome aboard Mike McDonald, our newly polished attorney who has been working with Dixon at the Law Center for many months, now. He had not appeared in any presentation for about five years--and he was excellent. I commend the homework and the performance. Remember, readers, these Federal Judges have lifetime appointments and are as near god of human beings as you can get. Only the Elite Puppet Masters give orders to these gentlemen. For him to actually allow Dr. Young hearing and then listen to him was a NEW EXPERIENCE FOR EVERYONE! The judge still threatened to jail Doris Ekker but without quite as much venom.

Mr. Green, of course, did not have (whatever your slang terms might fit here) to even make an appearance. US&P’s attorney confirmed the fact that negotiations and “arrangements” had been ongoing with Mr. Green and them. However, it was interesting to note that no injunctions would follow against Mr. Green but there were three or four against the Ekkers--including $45,000 legal fees. This also is interesting because Mr. Green had stated $50,000, so in essence we saved $5,000 by simply attending court!

Another strange thing has happened. Mr. Green has been stating he owes his printer about $45,000 in arrears for the JOURNALS. Can’t say much about the outstanding bill but from the printer’s rep. sent to meet with Mr. Martin in Las Vegas--the price to Green for printing has been ONLY ONE HALF per JOURNAL as Mr. Green has been alleging since day one. The reason the cost was so low is that PHOENIX/LIBERATOR VOLUNTEERS had been doing the packaging and all non-detail work to help reduce the printer’s cost. My, my, what a tangled web is woven when gold enters the picture.

As things begin to unfold from the “Intelligence” community on the rumor circuit--it would appear to me that both Mr. Green and US&P would get busy accepting almost ANY settlement devised by man. However, our intent is not to hurt, maim, or damage anyone--we have too much work to do to go on with this time-wasting garbage.

Even Dave Horton, Mr. Green’s unfortunate attorney, needs out of this for he is working on a Nevada “bill” to allow silver coinage in that state--a most incredibly important step toward showing the way to sovereignty. This litigation will hurt his reputation and cause ridicule to his program and we wish to help, not hurt, that measure. Nevada is about your only remaining bastion of shelter remaining.

NOW, FOR BO GRITZ

Goodness, readers, please do not ever think that I control in any way, Mr. Gritz. Through all this mess of confrontation that sounds like something out of Disneyland--he awaits a little more proof of presence. Fine, I have plenty of time, friends. I can’t say the same for you nice people--but I have lots and lots of time--like infinity.

The questions, however, center around the presentation of Bo’s that suggested getting “State Citizenized” (this following the lessons of Richard McDonald) and utilization of “trusts”. Where does Hatonn stand on this matter?--I have covered it many times.

I believe that “trusts” have a place IF handled professionally and utilized WITH A NEVADA CORPORATION (with knowledge of how to properly run your Nevada corporation). The problem with trusts is usually the artists that SELL them. They can charge both arms and legs and STILL DO A MISERABLE JOB, LEAVING THE BUYER OPEN FOR LOSS OF EVERYTHING AND THERE IS NO REAL WAY FOR A NOVICE TO KNOW THE DIFFERENCE. Be careful, pay attention and for goodness sakes, get someone who KNOWS what they are doing instead of leading you right to the door of the IRS.

As to relinquishing Federal citizenship and becoming an independent Sovereign Citizen of self, first only to state excise laws, etc. Watch it. I respect Richard as much as any patriot I have watched--he knows what he is doing and I honor him--the “Institute” has even supported him with libraries, etc. HOWEVER, THE TIME OF UTILIZING THESE TOOLS IS OVER! KNOW that no matter how you wish to believe you can win a lot of rounds with this activity--you will find you cannot afford the defense in the non-justice courts--partly because of the misuse by your own so-called “patriots”. Further, you make a TARGET of yourself when you “drop-out” of the system and for practical purposes to further your claimed desire to function and be heard--you simply disallow recognition. Moreover, as times worsen and there are breadlines--YOU WHO HOLD “ALIEN” CITIZENSHIP (FOR YOU SEE, YOU ALREADY FUNCTION UNDER THE NEWSTATES CONSTITUTION) WILL BE EXCLUDED FROM EVERYTHING, INCLUDING VOTING. The mark of the Beast? What do you mean? YOU RECEIVED THE MARK BEFORE YOU PRESENTED IN THE DIAPERS.

There was a time when this would have saved your nation--by this one action, carried out in massive numbers--now your people are thrown out of court. I set up an example in Federal Court on Monday for our own people to witness--actually, two things which “could not have been” coincidence as our people look at it.

GOVERNMENT IN ACTION

First: Ekkers had appeared in that particular court only twice before. On both occasions there appeared people who owned rights and land on a particular location which was TAKEN within the Forest Service. They held good mining claims and proceeded to effort to follow schedules and present working plans to meet the requirements. Over the past few years their land had been confiscated and they had been disallowed presence on the property because of trespass restrictions while, at the same time, being ordered to give assays, operation plans, etc., to the Government. NO WAY TO COMPLY WITHOUT BREAKING AT LEAST TWO LAWS IN THE DOING. Moreover, the Feds came in with bulldozers and bulldozed down their trailers (home) and all other useable equipment and pushed it down the mine shaft, calling it “fill”. This was the third time Ekkers had witnessed these same people trying to save their necks and still thinking they might save some assets--how many of you think they will end up with anything? They were “thrown out” of court AGAIN--with strong warnings. Half their co-defendants were given THE WRONG DAY OF COURT APPEARANCE, IN ADDITION--WHICH WAS HARDLY NOTED BY THE JUDGE.

NEXT: 1ST, 5TH AND 14TH AMENDMENT

The next shocker came in the form of a very presentable, but average black man. He stood, in his newly found “citizenship” status, in pro-per, and demanded his rights (carefully and quite well presented) in a case of refusal to take a breath-test in a DUI (in Federal Court?). Well, the rules of the game say (and your teachers will tell you that you can do this) that you can file a demand for hearing in a Federal Court when you have been thrown out of other courts of “lower” injustice. Immediately the judge patiently told him he had no jurisdiction over such a case--the man stumbled and offered incorrect response, wrong paper-work and finally was DISMISSED (thrown out on his ear). CAN YOU WIN USING THESE STRATEGIES? ONLY IF THAT IS ALL YOU WANT TO DO IN THE REMAINDER OF YOUR LIFE--AND YOU WILL ULTIMATELY STILL LOSE! It simply is not enough, citizens. As you move along here and police departments, etc., get into trouble--they will not only arrest you AND fine you but will sock sur-charges all over the routine fines. YES, THEY CAN DO IT AND THEY ARE DOING IT! THEY HAVE THE JAIL AND THEY ALSO HAVE THE GUN! EVERY LAW THEY MAKE IS LEGAL EVEN IF CONSTITUTIONALLY UNLAWFUL!

But, you say, SOME ARE WINNING! Indeed, HOW MANY? HOW MANY WILL IT TAKE TO CHANGE THE LAWS AND THE NATION BACK TO THE CONSTITUTION? Is it not a bit apparent that these will not change your nation?

Yes indeed, there are many ways to work within the system and still maintain some stability--but chelas, you simply do not have matching weaponry. I can only ask you to please be careful as you utilize these tools. Yes, they ARE tools and properly used can be of great asset and benefit. Wrongly used and used beyond their time of usefulness will target you and ultimately cause you to lose far more than gained through the exercise.

I have written at length on these very tactics and offered great respect to ones who teach these uses but the usefulness in ability to cause a court to honor you is passing and all but GONE. Be wise, flexible and move with the changes. YOU will find NO perfection and, as you find a tool, remember, the adversary is working to exclude your right to utilize that tool. There are still a few tools which are so utilized by Elitists that you can still find some shelter--a Nevada corporation is one--IF YOU USE IT CORRECTLY AND STAY SMALL. I continue to suggest you contact CORT CHRISTIE and look for, in the near future I hope, a set of taped instructions which can help you manage your “tools”.

Why do I continue to suggest and “advertise” Cort Christie? Because he has a Resident Agency in Las Vegas, has worked WITH ME for years now and he is bright, intelligent, knowledgeable and dedicated to teaching you HOW TO USE YOUR TOOLS TO HELP YOU--NOT JUST MAKE A BUNDLE OF SHECKLES OFF YOUR PLIGHT!

So, does this mean that I disagree with Bo Gritz? Half and half--I do not disagree with the “should be able to use”--I do see that you can walk into the biggest trap of the century if you handle these things unwisely. I feel that James (Bo) may well be led astray in his own conclusions by ones who are “using” him just a bit, if not a whole heck of a lot! These people who present to “help” you are not “Gods”--they are humans efforting against all odds (greater than most of your own) to stay alive and SHARE some possible preparedness and awakening insights--YOU MUST DISCERN, EVALUATE BEST USE OF EACH TOOL AS IT INDIVIDUALLY PRESENTS TO YOUR NEEDS AND USES--NO ONE CAN DO IT FOR YOU.

THE “INSTITUTE” AND USES

What of the “Institute” and uses of gold as collateral, etc.? For you who utilize it already--it is presented and seen as “sound” and ones who had come against it are now again joining with it while bringing charges against the ones efforting to force it into receivership. Even the most adamant ones who simply want destruction of the entity--have found it solidly covered, its veil in perfection and the one or two inadvertent “errors” in rules being legally perfected. The ones who came against it the hardest are now on a campaign to GET THE NEVADA LAWS CHANGED! What does that tell you? Good day, what? Remember, these very rules and regulations in Nevada--ARE WHAT NEVADA IS ALL ABOUT! I would guess that even under Newstates laws--there will still be a Nevada! But, will you eventually have to live in Nevada to utilize this privacy and protection? Maybe, but nothing else will be working either and Nevada is not a bad place to live, chelas--depends on what you want with your life experience. But, will you be able to continue business if you are NOT in Nevada? Well, EVERYONE can’t live in Nevada who has Nevada-birthed “relatives”.

The hardest thing you ones have to learn and can hardly accept is that when a Corporation is BIRTHED in Nevada--IT IS NOT YOU! IT IS ITS OWN SOVEREIGN CITIZEN--NOT YOU! When you understand that fact--then, and only then, can you fully utilize your new set of craftsmen’s tools. But, CAN they change the rules? YES--AND THEY WILL BE CHANGED AND IF THEY ARE WIPED OUT AS TO ABILITY TO USE THEM--IT WILL BE IN SUCH A WAY AS TO ALLOW CLOSING OUT OF YOUR ENTITY, ETC. BY THE TIME THE CORPORATIONS PROPERLY USED AND STRUCTURED ARE ABOLISHED--THERE WILL NOT BE OTHER MEANS OF PROTECTION I CAN WELL ASSURE YOU!

Will incorporation mean no more taxes, no more hassle? Of course NOT. It means, however, privacy, no Nevada income taxes, ability to handle resources in part, through rates of corporations, etc. IT IS NOT, UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, A THING WHICH ALLOWS YOU TO EVADE THE LAWS OF THE LAND--AND THAT INCLUDES MOST ESPECIALLY TAXES. Well managed, however, there are shelters and ways to avoid useless taxation give-away of assets. Why do you think that Mr. Bush paid so few taxes and Mr. Reagan even less? Come on, readers, you may THINK that you cannot use the same techniques--but that is only because THEY want you to think as much.

MAJOR ECONOMIC COLLAPSE

Now, as to the major problems which are on their way--the economic collapse, depression and no jobs. Placement of money will not be your problem but survival in a total welfare state which now pulls the plug on welfare! THIS needs confronting and the only way you will make it is to think ahead and--if you think setting yourself aside as an individual sovereign--better know that the STATE is going to leave you and insist you starve to death as a good example to everyone else. Only if you have isolation facilities and HIDDEN (I mean wherefrom your neighbor can’t even find your stash) survival goods--will you survive what the Elite Planners have in mind for you good citizens.

CONSTITUTION SALVATION

CAN you yet save your Constitution? Yes, but it continually looks less and less likely that enough of you will cause it to happen. As long as the masses truly believe that the group in Waco, Texas burned themselves alive--you will not save your Constitution.

As long as in nations such as Palestine wherein the Israelis can isolate, starve out and destroy that which has any fragment of Christ belief within its soul, and in Herzegovina where the arms are being removed forcibly from the Christ connected Moslems while the atheistic Communist Serb distractors are given supplies and rearmaments--and YOU allow it--there is little hope of salvaging your own Constitution when the curtain is ready to finally fall.

I would share with you a paragraph from Will Loy’s presentation--I urge you ones who think “visions” are B.S. to get that newsletter--he hits it squarely on the nailhead.

“Comment: It appears to me that the key to surviving these coming developments will oftentimes be of a very unique nature: like getting in a boat and heading toward the tidal wave instead of running from it. It also appears to me that this “unique key”: will not be available until the last possible moment…..”

Therefore, it would seem most appropriate to at least “get the boat”? What he speaks of is a MASSIVE, ABRUPT economic COLLAPSE/CATASTROPHE--SOON! He notes, however, “These catastrophic developments will NOT come on totally unannounced, but for most people there will be little warning and only at the very last minute!”

If you can do so, get Mr. Loy’s writings: Burchette Brothers, P.O. Box 363, Lakeside, CA 92040-0363. I’m sorry not to be able to offer costs of the news bulletin but I am sure the donation will be most reasonable.

You ones must understand that God does not leave you without guidance and insight--you simply have to know where to turn and how to seek--and above all, know that for which ye seek--in truth.

ON “THE LAW”

One, John Locke, wrote on the subject of “the law” as being “The end of the law is, not to abolish or restrain, but to preserve and enlarge freedom.” It would appear to me that if you look at this “should be” and consider all the above as well as look around you at “what is” and what has come to pass--you have not enlarged freedom nor have you abolished restraints. Therefore, please balance your knowledge with getting a concept of these things. In almost any court of so-called law you can go and sit as observer. It is the best teacher there is next to being personally involved. Dr. Young, for instance, in all his academic career, etc., had never experienced a court of law in action. Until Ekkers were thrust into the property case and this ongoing barrage of assaults--they had never been in a courtroom and they, like you, went in under the Constitutional rights, representing selves because the facts were obvious and stuck out like sore digits. Five years later the property was confiscated (and sold to another party right under their noses) and they find that if you walk into a courtroom on any matter involving the Elite power-brokers representing self--you will most often not even be allowed recognition. Even with attorneys galore--Ekkers have yet to receive a “hearing” of ANY KIND!

What I am trying to point out here is that if you continue to live in fantasy-land of what SHOULD be, you will be driven back. You must GET INFORMED, experience the beast in action--not just “think” it to be this or that way. IT IS WHAT IT IS--AND IT IS NOT VERY NICE NOR DOES IT EVEN RESEMBLE REMOTELY--WHAT SHOULD BE. You will win your battle for freedom from and through WHAT IS--not fantasy wishing that it would be otherwise. You must first KNOW that the tamperings, controls and brain-washing from media, etc., are set forth to delude you--so you must go forth and if needs be SEE FOR YOURSELF.

Dean Russell years ago said: Actually, the accusations so frequently directed against the free market economy--pollution, false advertising, violence in various forms and degrees, including war--are generally [always] misdirected; those social ills are mostly [always] the result of corrupt or apathetic or deluded or power-mad governmental officials who are not even capable of performing their primary functions of maintaining the peace, suppressing fraud, and attending to other obvious functions that are clearly of an “in common” concern to everyone.

SOME “THOUGHTS”

Since it seems hard to accept “directly” my input through hands upon a keyboard--my scribe, especially, finds it soothing to find that great works have been already “given”--great thoughts already presented--from this same route through the hands and minds of those who came before--sometimes even through a mind that was once yours housed in a different vehicle. I like to share these thoughts of others (same) as we go along for the pondering potential of each of you as you seek silence. So I shall end this with a writing in the form of verse from OUR INVISIBLE FRIENDS:

LOST TRAILS

I stood one day on a barren ledge on the mountain’s eastern rim,

Where the slopes fell away to the desert haze; and faint and far and dim,

Like a dull blue cloud on the valley floor lay shadowy Salton Sea:

But all I saw was the shadow there--I did not know the sea.

And I wondered idly, standing there, if I could find a way

Across this weary sun-drenched land, to where that shadow lay;

And would it prove a shadow, still? Or should my eyes behold

The jewel that lies at the rainbow’s end in the heart of a land of gold?

There was a trail that lost itself somewhere in the rocks below

A wandering, tortured, dusty path--a trail that long ago

May once have been a well used road, but now was cactus-grown

And filled with sand and shriveled leaves and bits of scattered stone....

* * *

Always: you must look beyond--knowing that you cannot simply “know” a thing, a pathway or an invisible friend, without reflecting and allowing and sometimes ONLY through walking of the trail. In more importance, however, perhaps the lost trail is but one of myriads which lay before you--will the past matter so much as those things which are now or may well be guided in the perceived “to be”? Must you always seek the “lost trails” rather than learn from those gone before and forge new and higher pathways always holding to the goal of Light and Life. Meditate upon these things.

It always comes down to your own insight--your own perceptions and interpretations for these are ALL that one has of total self.

I again offer the thought for “TODAY” by M. Schroeder:

TODAY

“This is the beginning of a new day. God has given me this day to use as I will. I can waste it or grow in its light and be a service to others. But what I do with this day is important because I have exchanged a day of my life for it. When tomorrow comes, today will be gone forever. I hope I will not regret the price I paid for it.”

May you use your days well, my friends, for in the counting and ability to count--there are but few--and as with all passage--fewer yet ahead. How will you use yours?

I know who I AM--who might you be? Salu.

CHAPTER 9

REC #1 CERES ‘ATONN

SAT., APRIL 24, 1993 11:02 A.M. YEAR 6, DAY 251

SAT, APRIL 24, 1993

CONTACT!

First, please, some needs for the meeting this afternoon. I ask that the Landkamer packet be brought to the meeting room, along with Green’s last letter of yesterday. We shall have to deal with these things and while so many impacted persons are present, we can have communications regarding measures. Remember, crew, MOST of our team is scattered about elsewhere and only gets news through the paper or tapes.

For this edition of the paper I have to leave much of it to the Editors and layout person’s discretion for content for we have meetings all afternoon today AND again tomorrow. This leaves a burden on the final copy handlers--and NO, I do not dismiss anyone from the meetings--ESPECIALLY TOMORROW when we begin the discourses on Corporations--it is the most important subject with which you can become informed! If the paper cannot be gotten out AND attend the meetings--THE PAPER WILL WAIT. If you need more editors to assist--please call on them for proofing. You do not need to rewrite or rearrange ANY of our writings if time is of essence. Nora’s is very sufficient unto itself and remember, you Editors do not know my own purposes in presenting information. If there are questions regarding material--let the public inquire and this allows discourse and communication which ultimately brings a flood of fill-out information. This is exactly what we are about: attention and sharing of input.

It is not too important that we have personal comment from one, Ceres--it IS most important that we FURTHER valid information. Believe me, readers, THIS is the first material scanned by the Administration, the CIA, the Intelligence groups in general and our Patriotic friends--even if YOU don’t know who they ARE.

COUNTER CHARGES AND STEEL NERVES

I am going to overload you AGAIN. I know the legal eagles are busy, busy, busy--but they have to get help or get busier! We MUST use every bit of ammunition while it is hot and excuses won’t cut it longer. Our attorneys MUST learn about Nevada Corporations--and learn properly and thoroughly or they CANNOT practice law for any of our people. We are setting it up so we have no “people”!

So, I want ALL available clippings regarding the “Luke Perry” interviews that have come to attention (and later we shall subpoena the TV tape). Perry makes accusations against ones, Doris and E.J. Ekker--claiming that they bilked his family and hundreds of others of their assets. He claims his step-mother invested with the Ekkers and has lost thousands of dollars.

Mrs. Perry has not invested a cent or any other kind of, or amount of, ANYTHING with the Ekkers. These public accusations are tremendously DAMAGING and for a paper to have such poor journalistic behavior as to print such garbage seems to me to be worth somewhere between $10 and, say, $20 million. YOU CAN’T FIGHT THIS SYSTEM WITH GUNS, FOR GOODNESS SAKES--USE THE TOOLS YOU GET. THIS IS THE BEST ADVERTISING FOR THE SECURITY OF INCORPORATION THAT YOU WILL EVER FIND--DON’T LET IT SLIP THROUGH AND BE LOST! FILE CHARGES IMMEDIATELY YESTERDAY. Perry is now trying to change the laws of Nevada because he is befuddled and totally helpless against good business! He wants his step-mother’s estate which is in her discretion as trustee. “Dad” made a very good value judgement when he set it forth this way--AGAINST HIS BELOVED AND LOVING CHILDREN! AREN’T WE GLAD GOD SHOWED US A WAY TO PROTECT HER MEAGRE LIVING NECESSITIES? GOD WORKS IN MOST INTERESTING AND MYSTERIOUS WAYS HIS WONDERS TO PERFORM!

PHONE LINE

I ask that Brent contact our friend at Geodesic Structures and arrange for the “daily briefing”. This has been coming to me after attention--and it bears enough hidden agenda and “missed” reports to make up any hot-line a dozen times over. Please decide how to brief things down and then we will not be pressed on a daily basis at this keyboard. I do want the reports just as have been coming, so please attend this also for these are the subjects which NEED the observations of higher vision tattle-tales.

Much information comes across the AP (Associated Press) lines that you never hear about--even the Doris/E.J. Ekker/E.T. stupidity made it onto the AP lines and was reported around the world! Yes, indeed, you have plenty of information and ones who wish to toy with our team--will ANSWER FOR IT THE ONLY WAY RECOGNIZED--IN A COURT OF INJUSTICE.

THINGS YOU WILL HAVE MISSED!

At the early onset of the Waco, Texas massacre (or was it??) I told you there would be found a connection DIRECTLY TO THE ISRAELI MOSSAD. This was a bit too much for even my staunchest crew members--but let’s just see what is coming out NOW! We give appreciation to the AMERICAN PATRIOTS FAX NETWORK: FAXING FOR FREEDOM. Please get on that network, team. We will share with them whatever they like and as we come into funding--get them some of that too, please.

QUOTING:

C.A.N. IMPLICATED IN WACO BLOODBATH

By: Harley Schlanger

Faxed Apr. 19, 1993

Investigators have confirmed that the Cult Awareness Network (C.A.N.) and allied associations in Australia were responsible for setting up the bloody shootout in Waco, Texas which resulted in the deaths of four Federal Agents and at least four members [C: My, how quickly things change!] of the Branch Davidian Sect whose compound was raided.

The abortive raid was conducted by agents of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms (BATF), who were acting on the basis of intelligence provided by so-called cult experts, who have “deprogrammed” former members of the sect. These “experts” had convinced BATF officials that members of the Branch Davidian Sect were preparing to follow their leader, David Koresh, in some imminent violent action, either a mass suicide, an attack on the citizens of Waco, or the assassination of a political figure.

Intending to preempt such an event, BATF agents went to the compound on February 28, to execute a sealed warrant, which alleged violations of Federal weapons laws. To deliver the warrant, BATF sent more than 100 armed officers, backed by three helicopters, to launch an all-out assault on the sect’s compound. The deaths occurred during a forty-five minute gun battle, from which BATF agents were forced to retreat.

POST-RAID COVER-UP

Though “a” BATF spokesman initially blamed the failure of the action on being “outgunned”, the evidence being compiled shows that it was innacurate information, provided by CAN and its affiliates, that caused the bloodiest day in BATF history.

BATF officials insist the raid would have been successful had the element of surprise been maintained. They are focusing efforts on discovering the source of the leak, someone who tipped off Koresh that a BATF raiding party was coming, as a scapegoat for the disaster.

This explanation has come under attack from both anti-terrorist experts and law enforcement officials. Col. Charles Beckwith, the founder of the U.S. Army’s Delta Force Commando 2 Unit, blamed poor Intelligence for the raid, which he described as “ludicrous” and “an embarrassment”.

Former McLennan County (WACO) District Attorney Vic Feasell, who studied Koresh and sect members when he unsuccessfully prosecuted them in 1986, characterized the raid as “a vulgar display of power”. In contrast to the bloody fiasco three weeks ago, Koresh (then named Vernon Howell) and six others turned themselves in, at the sheriff’s request, in 1986. “We treated them like human beings, rather than storm-trooping the place,” Feasell told reporters.

Feasell reiterated what Beckwith and others have alleged, that it was the faulty Intelligence which caused the disaster. The Branch Davidians, he said, “are protective of what’s theirs. They’re protective of their land. They view their land as Muslims do Mecca and Jews view Jerusalem....if they’d (the BATF) called and talked to them, the Davidians would’ve given them what they wanted.”

END QUOTE

[C: Now you are all forced to recognize the facts and it is NOT pretty, Americans. It is NOT pretty anywhere in your world this day. When it came to the holocaust involved, not to mention it took place while the “holocaust of Jews‟ claim” was being celebrated and you-the-taxpayers of America paid for a museum which has taken a week to dedicate (in America yet--why not Israel?) and on and on and on. If you miss the connections, you are blind as the salamander of Leander’s cave. When the cute little terrorists pushed the tanks into place to “place” a little gas inside--they blocked every entrance and exit from the place--including the escape routes to the safety shelter areas. Accident? Come, come Americans. Then--they just sort of accidentally dumped a little CS Gas inside (non-flammable) and a lot of Cap Gas which is more flammable and easier to detonate than napalm as you recognized it in VietNam. ....Just all in a day’s games, I suppose.] Salu, Ceres

CHAPTER 10

REC #1 CERES ‘ATONN

SUN., APRIL 25, 1993 9:18 A.M. YEAR 6, DAY 252

SUNDAY, APRIL 25, 1993

“....UNTO US A CHILD IS BORN.” And the promise of God is again proven that HE shall prevail and never shall HIS people be vanquished from the lands of HIS CREATION.

Kathy “finally” (in her opinion--at the time of perfection in God’s) brought forth a fine son who shall be called Tyler David (misspellings, if any, unimportant as you will later see). This is for you who have checked each day as Kathy grew larger and OBVIOUSLY so, too, did the babe. (9# 12 oz.)

This discussion of names was not intended to go out of control but how can I not give expression when I have done so with the two friends and children born within the month of days? I always get “my” way in whatever “they” choose!

“David” needs no definement for it does and always has, meant “Beloved of God”. “Tyler” is a bit more complicated and comes from derivatives of labels dating so far back as to have no meaning to any save historians. The term itself in closest use would be Tyrelord, or, Lord of Tyre. But, forget that definition. Tyler as would be acceptable to you NOW is taken from what would be Thylord and alphabet gets in the way.

It is a direct hand-down from Theophilus (Ty) (Lover/Server of God) and Theobold/Theodor(d)e/Tylord:(ler)/Theoba(o)ld. (Great and bold; brave one of the PEOPLE). Therefore, what have we when Hatonn gets through with it? Beloved OF God and brave, bold representative OF/FOR “the people within RESPECT/LOVE TOWARD GOD IN SERVICE. Now, I ask: “Anyone care to go try to explain this dissertation to Kathy and Dave?” You must understand--WE also need identification symbols which YOU understand to reach into the physical expression for “contact”. Later “we” will work the fannies off these little light-beams. Blessings rest upon all of you, our children who dare in these times, to bring forth allowance of souled creations to later bring you home. Salu. You are scattered about in every direction of the infinite directions but we find pleasure in playing with the ones under our noses. As I gather my little ones within my arms I realize that I, Hatonn, am a pretty good “manager” for, remember, “You can consider yourself a good manager only when you get superior work from average people.” The only thing incorrect about that statement is that NONE of you who travel with me--are average; you are superior in every way definable. You are not even “confused”--you are simply witnessing the unfolding of the mystery and do not yet see it ALL. So be it for God would never leave His people without messengers or Truth for this wondrous adventure come full cycle in its rightful sequence.

Will you find these meanings listed in a book of names? I doubt it but you might give it a try--if you have one and if there are such. You people are nit-pickers, aren’t you?! Well, it’s ok--just don’t be picking nits when you should be gathering the fruit! And, NO, it is not Nora’s job to research YOUR name label to try to catch Ceres in a fantasy!

CESAR CHAVEZ

Cesar Chavez is my beloved friend. One from our immediate team worked for/with him and Dharma’s daughter worked with him for years in his “headquarters”. This man had walked the Elite and “mean” trail of base horror of the deeds of man against man less fortunate. He had connections which were abhorrent and aberrant as he efforted to bring truth for the downtrodden of his homeland and brethren into decency of life’s basic needs. “His” people were murdered slowly and still are, in the fields of the Elite farm-grabbers and given life-styles fit only for swine as they labored without legal papers, in many instances, and squalor. Many times workers are actually “killed” and no reference is ever again made to them--for they are “illegal aliens” or considered by your law-enforcement officials “a bother too great to even recognize them”. On the very day last year when Bo Gritz spoke in Tehachapi, Cesar and/or his son, Paul, was to also speak at that same gathering.

Both were out searching for the “third man” of three who had been killed in the fields. No public notice was ever heard of issued--no reference ever given--it was as if the men never existed. “This” is what Cesar stood against and for: recognition of these servants (slaves) by and as humans in a sea of humanity gone mad.

Did he die peacefully in his bed in sleep in Arizona? Arizona? What was he doing in Arizona? HE WAS IN THE PROCESS OF TESTIFYING AGAINST “YOU KNOW WHO AND WHAT”! The saddest part is that his own people would allow him to EVER be alone for it was bound to happen sooner or later--that he would be murdered.

Don’t give me the old “natural causes” any more than you can believe one word from the processors of bodies from Waco or Jonestown. IT IS MURDER!!, and worse, little chelas, it is murder by those sworn under oath to PROTECT YOU! May God have mercy as those who commit such crimes, horror and terror receive just reward, for it shall come to be!

But what can YOU do about such as this? KNOW!! Then look within and see what you believe about what you are fed on the tubes of destruction--you will then, finally, learn that only YOU can hope to change the way it is. You will learn that if you want the circumstances in your life to change for the better--YOU MUST CHANGE FOR THE BETTER!

FILTHY POLITICS

I am insulted, shot-at, denied and denigrated because I tell you Truth and you can’t yet see it through the curtain of lies and subterfuge. You can’t seem to understand that in your political hierarchy--the “Bush camp” financed the Clinton(s) victory--just as planned!

Who won in this election just past? Obviously, Clinton. Perot ACTUALLY won but then we don’t count the votes of the American voters, do we?

So, without changing the subject let us assume that in this instance Bush was the biggest winner of all. These three so-called candidates were placed, groomed and presented to STOP ANY FOOLISHNESS FROM YOU-THE-PEOPLE WITH A THOUGHT TOWARD A TRUE PATRIOT/CONSTITUTIONAL “LEADER”.

So, equally, the big winners were BUSH, Clinton and Perot. These candidates are totally identical. They were all backed by the SAME INTERESTS AND FINANCIAL PURCHASERS.

IT WAS IMPOSSIBLE FOR ANY OF THOSE THREE TO EXPOSE THE OTHERS--WITHOUT ALSO EXPOSING SELF! THEREFORE, NO POINTS OF IMPORTANCE WERE EVER EVEN PRESENTED.

They ALL shared intimate knowledge of involvement in guns and drugs for sale and hire as with the Contras and myriads of others, untoward and criminal dealings with BCCI and other banking entities, the illegal arming of Iran AND IRAQ and a concealed interest in ushering in as quickly as possible the New World Order future for all mankind. Now you are seeing the noose strangling the very life out of you as a nation and a people. This new Attorney General who appears to be a “NICE” lady? No, she ordered the murder of nearly a hundred people (babies and helpless people trapped and holocausted) in just “one” incident. She also was up to her cute little eyes in cover-up and workings of a major child pornography ring operation--wonder why no investigators could dig that tid-bit up--everyone knew!

As for Clinton and who paid for him? Well, we have written on it so many times I apologize for even speaking of it again but a major investor was one Jackson Stevens, the largest investment banker in Arkansas and one of the largest bankers on Wall Street.

Stevens arranged a $3.5 million line of credit for Clinton at a time when, absent this windfall, Clinton would have been out of the race and that wouldn’t do because it was already decided by the Bilderberg group that Clinton would be puppet president.

Two elements make this gift highly significant. First, Stevens was SOLIDLY IN THE BUSH CAMP. Ten months prior Stevens had contributed over $100,000 to the George Bush For President Campaign, assuring his position in Bush’s “Team 100” (significant). In 1988, MRS. Stevens served as co-chair-man of the George Bush for President Committee!

I think it notable here that people don’t get appointed to these “committees” unless they hold some power somewhere. In fact, as a point of interest, George Green often boasted that he had been asked directly by Paul Volcker to head the financial arm of the Jimmy Carter presidential campaign. George loved to speak on and on about his connections (always presented as “prior”) with the highest of the Elite. Can a man change? Yes--but past actions repeated seem to indicate that it is rare indeed, in all instances. He claimed to have been financially HURT through a massive $3 million loss (overnight) after he refused the above offer. True? Who knows--for recovery is promised in many different ways as ones are asked to redeem or serve to regain presence. Is it different than when the big boys get a release for a “prisoner” in exchange for service and information? It happens all the time--TO MY OWN TEAM-MATES. In fact it has happened with connections with George Green and directly associated with diverters of CLC funds. Will the remaining “players” be caught or watch sufficiently their own backsides? Hard to tell--but one or two seem to be holding as they battle their own way out of the garbage being threatened against them. WE HAVE THE STRENGTH TO PREVAIL IF THEY, INDIVIDUALLY, DO ALSO.

Back to contributors, etc. It looks very bad for that one fat cat, Stevens, to be such a big contributor to both front runners--neither contribution was supposed to surface. The killer is the fact that it was Stevens who first introduced Hassan Abedi, the founder of BCCI, to Clark Clifford and Bert Lance. THIS INTRODUCTION WAS THE INITIAL ACT IN BCCI’s ATTEMPT TO ILLEGALLY TAKE OVER AMERICAN BANKING THROUGH FIRST AMERICAN, WASHINGTON, D.C.’s LARGEST BANK. Please note, however, that both Clark and his henchman were exonerated within the past mere weeks!

If an honest investigation of any kind by Congress had been done this would have yielded the ugliest and dirtiest scandal in presidential history. But this major hole of incest and crime was largely unreported. It was hardly even mentioned through the many months of the campaigning--REMEMBER? It was not even written about until the last week in October, prior to election day. Then it broke through the Wall Street Journal.

The Wall Street Journal, although controlled by CFR (Council on Foreign Relations) and Trilateralists, employs the best writers in your nation. You can get pretty well informed by “carefully” reading the Journal and another, Scientific American--but it requires attention between the lines of print.

Noting back, J.P. Morgan (destroyer of Tesla AND, around about, BURIED Walter Russell) determined that he would acquire the 25 most influential newspapers in the nation so that he could “control public opinion”. The Wall Street Journal was one of his acquisitions and remains in the control of his heirs along with Forbes and Barrons. The Rockefeller interests control ABC, NBC, CBS, and TIME-LIFE through Chase Manhattan. CNN and Turner Broadcasting is only a facade recognition--for it is the front-runner of presentation control. It really pays you, readers, to know the “interests” of those who provide the news. In other words, WHO WINS THE GOODS?

As with George Green, whose own attorney stated that “receivership and bankruptcy of the Phoenix Institute would massively benefit George Green but would BADLY DAMAGE all participants in and with the Institute.” RIGHT!!!

“Settlement” talks are under way immediately in order to keep Doris from being jailed because of the actions of George Green, whose antics seemed to somehow miss notice in the court. Interesting? Therefore, we will not run the most recent outlay of total self-incrimination material with GG’s own signature affixed which has been sent from a couple of “friends”?!? We will run those things after the dirt settles a bit more and we can secure the Ekkers for this, as the other corruption, is going to come forth whether we do it or another does it--but I refuse to place my scribe in such disposition. Now we hold a letter from GG to Ekkers offering to “settle” this mess that “they started” and has so badly damaged him personally. He continues to claim input of over half a million dollars while Ekkers gave or presented NOTHING! Oh? I suppose that the entire PRODUCT and reason for any participation of any kind by anyone, accounts as NOTHING? So be it, we shall see. Funny thing--Doris is now the one who FINALLY, on day-before-yesterday, stopped saying over and over “George wouldn’t....” and “I feel so sorry for George and Desireé”. Come off it, chela, this kind of allowance is why your world is in such corruption--the Godly people allow and allow and allow. Does GG feel “bad” when he dumps the very Distributing (Co.) lie and massive indemnity on his own wife, Desireé?? Does he understand what he is doing?? OF COURSE! NOW, OPEN THINE EYES AND SEE!!

Back to the Bush Camp: Amplifying the disgrace of the Jackson Stevens affair was a Frontline special airing the very next night called “Who Finances Campaigns?” Here the public learned that in addition to the $3.5 million line of credit, Jackson Stevens took Clinton by the hand and introduced him to those who mattered--on Wall Street--and thereby raised a whopping additional $750,000 for the Clintons.

Astute readers are probably now saying to themselves that this was getting just as bad as possible? But wait a minute! It does get worse. There were other notables arranging money parties for Clinton, and one in particular who represented the dead center of the Bush camp: Pamela Harriman. Pamela Harriman is the widow of Averell Harriman, former CEO of the same Brown Brothers Harriman money ship where Prescott Bush was a PARTNER! Pamela was backing the Clinton campaign from the very first day. Note that the treasury of the super influential Yale secret society, “Skull and Bones”, was managed by Brown Brothers Harriman.

Pamela Harriman was the wife of Winston Churchill’s son, Randolf Churchill, when she first was introduced to Averell.

While the German bombs pounded away on the other side of London, Averell created one of the world’s most shocking sex scandals as he STOLE THE PRIME MINISTER’s DAUGHTER-IN-LAW VIRTUALLY IN PLAIN VIEW OF EVERYONE.

This goes on down the web-line as Averell was the number one American representing the Lend-Lease Program in Great Britain. Interestingly enough, at the same time Joseph KENNEDY (JFK’s father) was in the same town bearing the title of Ambassador.

This could go on and on and on--but we have already covered it several times. I can only suggest that you “Inquiring Minds” go read back issues and JOURNALS--along with any and all related material. Many writers give you truth if you would but get your minds on it. This has all been written up in detail in your own MONETARY & ECONOMIC REVIEW--actually in the very MONTH (November) of your just past election. I have yet to see that Clinton has kept even one promise to you-the-people. Even the ones which may appear to have been kept--ARE NOT.

Now, I can only further advise that if you want current information and have facilities--get on the American Patriot Fax Network (our people are going to get signed up however necessary, for YOU NEED THE CONFIRMATIONS!) I can continue to comment on these same old things--but what a waste of time and space when it is easier to believe from your own resources.

A.P.F.N.: 3790 Hazelwood #11, Las Vegas, NV 89119 Tel: (702) 369-9841 Fax: (702) 369-8101.

We can handle a lot on our “hotline” but not everything, readers. I am also asked if this “advertising” is “just to protect my scribe a bit more?” You better believe it--the more the word goes forth from a myriad of sources--the more security is offered to each daring speaker and worker!

The very PURPOSE of our paper is to eventually come to the place wherein it is simply a major VOICE FOR THE PEOPLE, SHARED IN TRUTH--THE PEN MUST PROVE TO BE MIGHTIER THAN THE SWORD--OR A NATION AND PEOPLE SHALL PERISH FROM THE FACE OF THE EARTH!

May each of you allow God to walk by your side for you cannot make this journey alone.

Salu, Ceres to clear.

CHAPTER 11

In CONGRESS, July 4, 1776.

The unanimous Declaration of

the thirteen united States of America

When in the Course of human events, it becomes necessary for one people to dissolve the political bands which have connected them with another, and to assume among the powers of the earth, the separate and equal station to which the Laws of Nature and of Nature’s God entitles them, a decent respect to the opinions of mankind requires that they should declare the causes which impel them to the separation.

We hold these truths to be self-evident, that all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain unalienable Rights, that among these are Life, Liberty and the pursuit of Happiness. That to secure these rights, Governments are instituted among Men, deriving their just powers from the consent of the governed. That whenever any Form of Government becomes destructive of these ends, it is the Right of the People to alter or abolish it, and to institute new Government, laying its foundation on such principles and organizing its powers in such form, as to them shall seem most likely to effect their Safety and Happiness. Prudence, indeed, will dictate that Governments long established should not be changed for light and transient causes; and accordingly all experience hath shown, that mankind are more disposed to suffer, while evils are sufferable, than to right themselves by abolishing the forms to which they are accustomed. But when a long train of abuses and usurpations, pursuing invariably the same Object evinces a design to reduce them under absolute Despotism, it is their right, it is their duty, to throw off such Government, and to provide new Guards for their future security. Such has been the patient sufferance of these Colonies; and such is now the necessity which constrains them to alter their former Systems of Government. The history of the present King of Great Britain is a history of repeated injuries and usurpations, all having in direct object the establishment of an absolute Tyranny over these States. To prove this, let Facts be submitted to a candid world.

He has refused his Assent to Laws, the most wholesome and necessary for the public good.

He has forbidden his Governors to pass Laws of immediate and pressing importance, unless suspended in their operation till his Assent should be obtained; and when so suspended, he has utterly neglected to attend them.

He has refused to pass other Laws for the accommodation of large districts of people, unless those people would relinquish the right of Representation in the Legislature, a right inestimable to them and formidable to tyrants only.

He has called together legislative bodies at places unusual, uncomfortable, and distant from the depository of their public Records, for the sole purpose of fatiguing them into compliance with his measures.

He has dissolved Representative Houses repeatedly, for opposing with manly firmness his invasion on the rights of the people.

He has refused for a long time, after such dissolutions, to cause others to be elected; whereby the Legislative powers, incapable of Annihilation, have returned to the People at large for their exercise; the state remaining in the meantime exposed to all the dangers of invasion from without, and convulsions within.

He has endeavored to prevent the population of these States; for that purpose obstructing the Laws for Naturalization of Foreigners; refusing to pass others to encourage their migrations hither, and raising the conditions of new Appropriations of Lands.

He has obstructed the Administration of Justice, by refusing his Assent to Laws for establishing Judiciary Powers.

He has made Judges dependent on his Will alone, for the tenure of their offices, and the amount and payment of their salaries.

He has erected a multitude of New Offices, and sent hither swarms of Officers to harass our people, and eat out their substance.

He has kept among us, in times of peace, Standing Armies without Consent of our legislature.

He has affected to render the Military independent of and superior to the Civil power.

He has combined with others to subject us to a jurisdiction foreign to our constitution, and unacknowledged by our laws; giving his Assent to their Acts of pretended Legislation:

For Quartering large bodies of armed troops among us:

For protecting them, by a mock trial, from punishment for any Murders which they should commit on the Inhabitants of these States:

For cutting off our Trade with all parts of the world:

For imposing Taxes on us without our Consent:

For depriving us in many cases of the benefits of Trial by Jury:

For transporting us beyond Seas to be tried for pretended offenses:

For abolishing the free System of English Laws in a neighboring Province, establishing therein an Arbitrary government, and enlarging its Boundaries so as to render it at once an example and fit instrument for introducing the same absolute rule into these Colonies:

For taking away our Charters, abolishing our most valuable Laws, and altering fundamentally the Forms of our Government:

For suspending our own Legislatures, and declaring themselves invested with power to legislate for us in all cases whatsoever.

He has abdicated Government here, by declaring us out of his Protection and waging War against us.

He has plundered our seas, ravaged our Coasts, burnt our towns, and destroyed the lives of our people.

He is at this time transporting large Armies of foreign Mercenaries to complete the works of death, desolation and tyranny, already begun with circumstances of Cruelty and perfidy scarcely paralleled in the most barbarous ages, and totally unworthy the Head of a civilized nation.

He has constrained our fellow Citizens taken Captive on the high Seas to bear Arms against their Country, to become the executioners of their friends and Brethren, or to fall themselves by their Hands.

He has excited domestic insurrections amongst us, and has endeavored to bring on the inhabitants of our frontiers, the merciless Indian Savages, whose known rule of warfare, is an undistinguished destruction of all ages, sexes and conditions.

In every stage of these Oppressions We have Petitioned for Redress in the most humble terms. Our repeated Petition have been answered only by repeated injury. A Prince, whose character is thus marked by every act which may define a Tyrant, is unfit to be the ruler of a free people.

Nor have We been wanting in attention to our British brethren. We have warned them from time to time of attempts by their legislature to extend an unwarrantable jurisdiction over us. We have reminded them of the circumstances of our emigration and settlement here. We have appealed to their native justice and magnanimity, and we have conjured them by the ties of our common kindred to disavow these usurpations, which would inevitably interrupt our connections and correspondence. They too have been deaf to the voice of Justice and to consanguinity. We must, therefore, acquiesce in the necessity, which denounces our Separation, and hold them, as we hold the rest of mankind, Enemies in War, in Peace Friends.

We, therefore, the Representatives of the united States of America, in General Congress, Assembled, appealing to the Supreme Judge of the world for the rectitude of our intentions, do, in the Name, and by Authority of the good People of these Colonies, solemnly publish and declare, That these United Colonies are, and of Right ought to be Free and Independent States; that they are Absolved from all Allegiance to the British Crown, and that all political connection between them and the State of Great Britain, is and ought to be totally dissolved; and that as Free and Independent States, they have full Power to levy War, conclude Peace, contract Alliance, establish Commerce, and to do all other Acts and Things which Independent States may of right do. And for the support of this Declaration, with a firm reliance on the protection of Divine Providence, we mutually pledge to each other our Lives, our Fortunes, and our sacred Honor.

SIGNERS OF THE UNANIMOUS

DECLARATION

According to the Authenticated List printed by

Order of Congress of January 18, 1777

John Hancock

New Hampshire

Joseph Bartlett           Jas Smith

Wm. Whipple                Geo.Taylor

Matthew Thornton           James Wilson

Geo. Ross

Massachusetts Bay

Samuel Adams                John Adams

Robt. Treat Paine           Eldridge Gerry

Delaware

Caesar Rodney                Geo. Read

Tho. M:Kean

Maryland

Samuel Chase                Wm. Paca

Thos. Stone

Charles Carroll Of Carrollton

Rhode Isl & Providence, & c.

Step. Hopkins                William Ellery

Connecticut

Roger Sherman           Samuel Huntington

William Williams           Oliver Wolcott

New-York

Wm Floyd                Phil Livingston

Frans. Lewis                Lewis Morris

Virginia

George Wythe                Richard H. Lee

Thos. Jefferson           Benja. Harrison

Thos. Nelson Jr.           Frans. Lightfoot Lee

Carter Braxton

North Carolina

Wm. Hooper                Joseph Hewes

John Penn

New Jersey

Richd. Stockton           Jno. Witherspoon

Fras. Hopkinson           John Hart

Abra. Clark

Pennsylvania

Robt. Morris                Benjamin Rush

Benja. Franklin           John Morton

Geo. Clymer

South Carolina

Edward Ruthledge           Thos. Heyward, Jr.

Thomas Lynch, Jr.           Arthur Middleton

Georgia

Button Gwinnet           Lyman Hall

Geo. Walton

CHAPTER 12

5/14/90 #1 HATONN

Dear brothers, you must--YOU MUST become informed and unify and strengthen the brothers in community that you might stand against the cancer which eats your very fiber of existences as a global people. There is no manner in which I can speak strongly enough unto you ones. You must join hands with others who DARE and stand forth side by side. You must march under the heavenly banner of God and that beauteous red, white and blue flag of the United States of America and that for which it stands: ONE NATION, UNDER GOD, INDIVISIBLE, WITH LIBERTY AND JUSTICE FOR ALL! SALU! AND YOU MUST REGAIN PEACE AND JUSTICE FOR THE REDMAN BROTHER THAT WAS SLAIN AND FROM WHOM WAS STOLEN THIS GOD-GIVEN GARDEN, FOR UNTIL JUSTICE IS BALANCED FOR ALL, YOU WILL STAND IN DARKNESS. THE CREATOR NOW GIVES YOU THE CHANCE TO RIGHT YOUR WORLD--WHAT WILL YOU DO, LITTLE BROTHERS? WHAT WILL YOU DO?

THE CONSTITUTION OF

THE uNITED STATES OF AMERICA

You were not, never were, and were never intended to be a SIMPLE DEMOCRACY, because a simple democracy is a FORM OF TYRANNY--A MAJORITY TYRANNY!

At the time of “We the People” there were about 3,000,000 whites and some 50,000 free blacks. An interesting fact is that in 1845, John Louis O’Sullivan, justifying the annexation of Texas, a whole story separate in and of itself because of its treaty status, wrote in the DEMOCRATIC REVIEW, “Our manifest destiny is to overspread the continent allotted by Providence for the free development of your yearly multiplying millions.”

The 52-word Preamble grants NO POWER TO THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT but does help in the interpretation of the Constitution.

There were only three words duly stressed which gave power to the meaning and they were WE THE PEOPLE. It did not begin in the Preamble by saying the United States‟ people. It said WE THE PEOPLE of the united states. (meaning a uniting of some states) Let me restructure it for I have sorrow to tell you, again, the lie has covered the truth and you cannot find that by which to judge.

PREAMBLE

WE THE PEOPLE of the united states, in order to form a more perfect union, establish justice, insure domestic tranquility, provide for the common defense, promote the general welfare, and secure the blessings of liberty to ourselves and our posterity, do ordain and establish this Constitution for the united states of America.”

Dharma, we need some method to denote a quote from the document of the Constitution and my input, example or explanation by comment. May we please place a *[italics] to denote Hatonn’s input, please. Make sure there is a copy of the Constitution in this document for untampered reference.

Further, note that all bold face headwords have been added as reader guides. Underlined material is somehow no longer applicable by accepted change.

ARTICLE 1

LEGISLATIVE DEPARTMENT

Section 1. Congress in General

All legislative powers herein granted shall be vested in a Congress of the United States, which shall consist of a Senate and a House of Representatives. *[The capital letters were simply to denote proper label.]

Section 2. The House of Representatives

a. Election and term of members. The House of Representatives shall be composed of members chosen every second year *[Although some argued that annual elections were “the only defense of the people against tyranny.”] by the people of the several States, and the electors in each state shall have the qualifications requisite for electors of the most numerous branch of the State Legislature.

b. Qualifications of members. No person *[Women were never explicitly denied office but you know how that went by the way for years, at the hands of the men involved in power.] shall be a Representative who shall not have attained to the age of twenty-five years, and been seven years a citizen of the United States, and who shall not, when elected, be an inhabitant of that State in which he shall be chosen.

c. Apportionment of representatives and of direct taxes. *[Changed by Section 2 of the 14th Amendment.] Representatives and direct taxes shall be apportioned among the several States which may be included within this Union, according to their respective numbers, which shall be determined by adding to the whole number of free persons including those bound to service *[“Slavery”. Free blacks had the rights of citizenship.] for a term of years, and excluding Indians not taxed, three-fifths of all other persons *[A euphemism for slaves. Every slave was counted as only three-fifths of a person in determining representation.]. The actual enumeration shall be made within three years after the first meeting of the Congress of the United States, and within every subsequent term of ten years, in such manner as they shall by law direct. The number of Representatives shall not exceed one for every thirty thousand, *[At the eleventh hour, George Washington made his only speech of the convention, urging that the figure be lowered from the original 40,000, increasing representation in the House. Size of the House was set at 435 members in 1929. Each member today represents more than 500,000 people. (Indians, who pay no taxes and who are wards of the government, are still not counted in the apportionment of Representatives.) California has the most Representatives--45; several states have only one. This is one of the reasons Jesse Jackson is pushing to make D.C. a “state”.] but each State shall have at least one representative; and until such enumeration shall be made, the State of New Hampshire shall be entitled to choose three; Massachusetts, eight; Rhode Island and Providence Plantations, one; Connecticut, five; New York, six; New Jersey, four; Pennsylvania, eight; Delaware, one; Maryland, six; Virginia, ten; North Carolina, five; South Carolina, five; and Georgia, three.

d. Filling vacancies. When vacancies happen in the representation from any State, the Executive authority thereof shall issue writs of election to fill such vacancies.

e. Officers; impeachment. The House of Representatives shall choose their Speaker and other officers; and shall have the sole power of impeachment. *[The House has impeached 15 government officials, including President Andrew Johnson, who was acquitted by the Senate in 1868, and Supreme Court Associate Justice Samuel Chase, acquitted in 1805.]

Section 3. The Senate

a. Number and election of members. The Senate of the United States shall be composed of two *[They decided a small number was most convenient for deciding on peace and war.] Senators from each state, chosen by the legislature thereof, [Superseded in 1913 by Section 1 of the 17th Amendment. “We the People” now elect your Senators directly.] for six years, *[Terms of four, seven, nine, or 14 years were rejected.] and each Senator shall have one vote.

b. Classification. Immediately after they shall be assembled in consequence of the first election, they shall be divided as equally as may be into three classes. *[So that there would be “experienced” Senators during the first years of the Republic.] The seats of the Senators of the first class shall be vacated at the expiration of the second year, of the second class at the expiration of the fourth year, and of the third class at the expiration of the sixth year, so that one third may be chosen every second year; and if vacancies happen by resignation, or otherwise, during the recess of the legislature of any State, the Executive thereof may make temporary appointments until the next meeting of the legislature, which shall then fill such vacancies. *[Changed by the Second Paragraph of the 17th Amendment.]

c. Qualifications of members. No person shall be a Senator who shall not have attained to the age of thirty years, and been nine years a citizen of the United States, and who shall not, when elected, be an inhabitant of that State of which he shall be chosen.

d. President of Senate. The Vice President of the United States shall be President of the Senate, but shall have no vote, unless they be equally divided.

e. Other officers. The Senate shall choose their own officers, and also a President pro tempore, in the absence of the Vice President, or when he shall exercise the office of President of the United States.

f. Trial of impeachment. The Senate shall have the sole power to try all impeachments. When sitting for that purpose, they shall be on oath or affirmation. When the President of the United States is tried, the Chief Justice *[This is the only mention of the office of Chief Justice in the Constitution.] shall preside; and no person shall be convicted without the concurrence of two thirds of the members present.

g. Judgment in case of conviction. *[Conviction elevates the Vice President into the Oval Office.] Judgment in cases of impeachment shall not extend further than to removal from office, and disqualification to hold and enjoy any office of honor, trust or profit under the United States; but the party convicted shall nevertheless be liable and subject to indictment, trial, judgment and punishment, according to law.

5/14/90 #2 HATONN

THE CONSTITUTION, CONTINUED

Section 4. How Senators and Representatives Shall Be Chosen and When They Are to Meet.

a. Method of holding elections. The times, places and manner of holding elections for Senators and Representatives shall be prescribed in each State by the Legislature thereof; but the Congress may at any time by law make or alter such regulations, except as to the places of choosing Senators. *[The 17th Amendment laid down a new method for choosing Senators.]

b. Meeting of Congress. The Congress shall assemble at least once in every year *[There was argument against meeting every year for excellent perception: “Too much legislating was a great vice.”] and such meeting shall be on the first Monday in December, unless they shall by law appoint a different day. *[Changed to January 20 by Section 2 of the 20th Amendment.]

Section 5. Rules of Procedure.

a. Organization. Each house shall be the judge of the elections, returns and qualifications of its own members, and a majority *[Under the Articles of Confederation, nine of the 13 states had to concur in all important decisions. A quorum was seven states.] of each shall constitute a quorum to do business . . .

b. Rules of proceedings, Each house may determine the rules of its proceedings, punish its members for disorderly behavior, and, with the concurrence of two thirds, expel a member.

c. Journal. Each house shall keep a journal of its proceedings and from time to time publish the same, excepting such parts as may in their judgment require secrecy; and the yeas and nays of the members of either house on any question shall, at the desire of one-fifth of those present, be entered on the journal. *[Well, here you began to get off to a bad start. The Senate met behind closed doors in its entire first five years. Then it was decided that the people had a right to know what their agents were doing or had done--so, the Journals of both chambers were subsequently published together in the CONGRESSIONAL RECORD since 1873. Details of the “convention” were kept secret for 50 years. What you know of the proceedings comes principally from James Madison’s prodigious notetaking from his seat in front of the presiding member with the other members on his right and left hands. Your fourth President allowed his journals to be published only posthumously--he was the “convention‟s” last survivor.]

d. Adjournment. *[Royal governors had unilaterally suspended and dissolved state assemblies.] Neither house, during the session of Congress, shall, without the consent of the other, adjourn for more than three days, nor to any other place than that in which the two houses shall be sitting.

Section 6. Compensation, privileges, and restrictions.

a. Pay and privileges of members. *[Whew, here is a dandy one which is manipulated over and over again.] The Senators and Representatives shall receive a compensation for their services, to be ascertained by law, *[It was considered an indecent thing and might, in time, prove dangerous to let Congress set its own wages, it was felt.], and paid out of the Treasury of the United States. They shall in all cases except treason, felony and breach of the peace, be privileged from arrest during their attendance at the session of their respective houses, and in going to and returning from the same; and for any speech or debate in either house, they shall not be questioned in any other place. *[Congressmen may execute their duties without fear of a civil suit or a criminal prosecution for any cause, including slander or libel. On trumped-up charges, the King used to order the arrest of legislators who opposed his policies. However, it would appear that if ones were arrested for treason in these current days, you would not have enough members to conduct business.]

b. Holding other offices prohibited. No Senator or Representative shall, during the time for which he was elected, be appointed to any civil office under the authority of the United States which shall have been created, or the emoluments whereof shall have been increased during such time; and no person holding any office under the United States shall be a member of either house during his continuance in office.

Section 7. Mode of Passing Laws.

a. Revenue bills. All bills for raising revenue shall originate in the House of Representatives; but the Senate may propose or concur with amendments as on other bills.

b. How bills become laws. Every bill which shall have passed the House of Representatives and the Senate shall, before it becomes a law, be presented to the President of the United States; if he *[This is a rare time indeed, where “he” rather than “people” or “persons” is used. It had no greater meaning, however, for at that point it was obviously assumed that Presidents would always be masculine and further, use of the English language considers “he” to be inclusive of human.] approves he shall sign it, but if not he shall return it, with his objections to that house in which it shall have originated, who shall enter the objections to that house in which it shall have originated, who shall enter the objections at large on their journal, and proceed to reconsider it. If after such reconsideration two-thirds of that house shall agree to pass the bill, it shall be sent, together with the objections, to the other house, by which it shall likewise be reconsidered, and if approved by two-thirds of that house, it shall become a law. But in all such cases the votes of both houses shall be determined by yeas and nays, and the names of the persons voting for and against the bill shall be entered on the journal of each house respectively. If any bill shall not be returned by the President within ten days (Sundays excepted) after it shall have been presented to him, the same shall be a law, in like manner as if he had signed it, unless the Congress by their adjournment prevent its return, in which case it shall not be a law. *[In other words, Congress can pass a law over a Presidential veto. The latter statement refers to the “pocket veto” (from the Latin for “I forbid”). If Congress adjourns during the ten-day period, the President can effectively veto a bill by not signing it--by “putting it in his pocket” so to speak.]

c. Approval or disapproval by the President. Every order, resolution, or vote to which the concurrence of the Senate and House of Representatives may be necessary (except on a question of adjournment) shall be presented to the President of the United States; and before the same shall take effect, shall be approved by him, or being disapproved by him, shall be repassed by two-thirds of the Senate and House of Representatives, according to the rules and limitations prescribed in the case of a bill.

Section 8. Powers Granted to Congress. [These 18 paragraphs granted urgently needed powers to Congress. The first 17 are called enumerated powers. The last, the famous “elastic clause”, refers to implied powers.]

The Congress shall have the power:

a. To lay and collect taxes, duties, imposts, and excises, to pay the debts and provide for the common defense and general welfare of the United States; but all duties, imposts and excises shall be uniform throughout the United States:

b. To borrow money *[This eliminated the possibility once and for all for states to print their own money.] on the credit of the United States;

c. To regulate commerce with foreign nations, and among the several States, and with the Indian tribes; *[This clause has just about done-in your Confederation. Clause c. has become a fountain of vast federal power.

d. To establish an uniform rule of naturalization, and uniform laws on the subject of bankruptcies throughout the United States;

e. To coin money, regulate the value thereof, and of foreign coin, and fix the standard of weights and measures; *[This is so big I shall have to pass it for now--you note this does not refer to anything called the “Federal Reserve”.

f. To provide for the punishment of counterfeiting the securities and current coin of the United States; *[Now this one does seem to leave out the Federal Reserve, at least technically. However, it is also one of the most abused by your Government.]

g. To establish post offices and post roads.

h. *[“If a nation expects to be ignorant and free in a state of civilization,” Thomas Jefferson said, “it expects what never was and never will be.” The Constitutional Convention defeated the motion to empower Congress “to establish an University, in which no preferences or distinctions should be allowed on account of religion.”] To promote the progress of science and useful arts by securing for limited times to authors and inventors the exclusive right to their respective writings and discoveries;

i. To constitute tribunals inferior to the Supreme Court;

j. To define and punish piracies and felonies committed on the high seas and offenses against the law of nations; *[Hold this one near your heart, also, for, my dear ones, you have now come under this little projection--by default. It refers, in part, to the law of Admiralty and it is deadly.]

k. To declare war, *[It originally was “make war”. This, so the President’s hands would not be tied in case of attack, the convention changed the phrase to a more precise “declare war”. The first legislation defining the President’s Constitutional power to make war was the War Powers Act, which Congress passed over President Richard Nixon’s veto in 1973. Now, chelas, please be patient with me as we move along here for we will just get lost in confusion if we pick every one of these apart at this sitting. We work relative to thousands of volumes in the Library of Congress, Supreme Court library, etc. Please be patient and we will hit the highlights which impact you instantly and treacherously in the form of impending enslavement and loss of freedom.]

l. To raise and support armies, but no appropriation of money to that use shall be for a longer term than two years;

m. To provide and maintain a navy;

n. To make rules for the government and regulation of the land and naval forces;

o. To provide for calling forth the militia to execute the laws of the Union, suppress insurrections, and repel invasions;

p. *[Designed to overcome the shortcomings of the militia in the Revolutionary War.] To provide for organizing, arming and disciplining the militia, and for governing such part of them as may be employed in the service of the United States, reserving to the States respectively the appointment of the officers, and the authority of training the militia according to the discipline prescribed by Congress;

q. To exercise exclusive legislation in all cases whatsoever, over such district (not exceeding ten miles square) as may, by cession of particular States, and the acceptance of Congress, become the seat of the government of the United States, and to exercise like authority over all places purchased by the consent of the legislature of the State, in which the same shall be, for the erection of forts, magazines, arsenals, dock-yards, and other needful buildings;--and

r. *[An incredible confusion which caused one George Mason, author of Virginia’s Bill of Rights to be one of three who referred to this as “Infernal traffic” and caused him to declare he would “sooner chop of his right hand than put it to the Constitution” in its final form.] To make all laws which shall be necessary and proper for carrying into execution the foregoing powers, and all other powers vested by this Constitution in the government of the United States, or in any department or officer thereof.

Section 9. Powers Denied to the Federal Government.

a. The migration of importation *[Originally 1800.] of such persons as any of the States now existing shall think proper to admit, shall not be prohibited by the Congress prior to the year one thousand eight hundred and eight, but a tax or duty may be imposed on such importation, not exceeding ten dollars for each person.

b. The privilege of the writ of habeas corpus shall not be suspended, unless when in cases of rebellion or invasion the public safety may require it. *[The rule of habeas corpus--literally, “you must have the body”--is a foundation of all free societies. An arrested person must be produced in court to determine the justice of his detention. President Abraham Lincoln suspended this sovereign right, arguably violating the Constitution “to save it”. Via the same tenet and pretext under which dictators suspend constitutions, your first “constitutional dictator” felt that “measures, however unconstitutional, might become lawful by becoming indispensable to the preservation of the Constitution through the preservation of the nation.”]

c. No bill of attainder or ex post facto law shall be passed.

d. No capitation, or other direct, tax shall be laid, unless in proportion to the census or enumeration herein before directed to be taken. *[The 16 Amendment give Congress the power to tax incomes, thus modifying the “no capitation” (tax on each person) clause. The slave states had feared a tax on their “three-fifths of all other persons. Now I, among others, am here to tell you that the 16th Amendment DID NOT NULLIFY THIS PORTION OF YOUR CONSTITUTION. INCOME TAXES AS ENFORCED BY THE IRS ARE UNLAWFUL UNDER YOUR CONSTITUTION. WE SHALL COVER THIS AT A LATER POINT. WE SHALL HEREIN SPEAK ONLY OF INTERPRETATION AS IS USUALLY OVERSIGHTED.]

e. No tax or duty shall be laid on articles exported from any State. *[A concession to the South. Denying this power common to governments at the time took from government half the regulation of trade.]

f. No preference shall be given by any regulation of commerce or revenue to the ports of one State over those of another: nor shall vessels bound to, or from, one State be obliged to enter, clear, or pay duties in another. *[Allayed Maryland’s fear that traffic on Chesapeake Bay would have to enter or clear at a Virginia port to simplify the collection of duties.]

g. No money shall be drawn from the Treasury, but in consequence of appropriations by law; and a regular statement and account of the receipts and expenditures of all public money shall be published from time to time.

h. No title of nobility shall be granted by the United States; and no person holding any office of profit trust under them shall, without the consent of the Congress, accept of any present, emolument, office, or title, of any kind whatever, from any king, prince, or foreign state.

Section 10. Powers Denied to the States.

Enough for this day, Dharma.

Hatonn to standby. Salu.

5/17/90 #1 HATONN

Hatonn present in the Light of the Radiant One. We will continue with our work on the outlay of the Constitution of the United States of America.

In advance I ask that you readers do homework and get confirmation of that which we discuss for your Constitution is the very foundation upon which freedom is based. It is all but gone as written. There are far more interesting subjects--but NONE so important to you as a people. “When” this and that will happen pales in comparison to that which will befall you if you do not put into restraint that which is planned and occurring to your Constitution. When we finish the Constitution (as written) and the Newstates Constitution (as re-written), we will move on to the Zionists intention to control your world through their “PROTOCOLS”. And, then dear ones, we shall return to the survival of the remnant and “how” we get through these changing times and that which to look for.

All of you are awaiting the wondrous projections of Little Crow and the SACRED HILL WITHIN. They will come in proper sequence. We must first outline that which has been brought against you as a people for you have now been raped just as were the beauteous Indians in the early days of your country. They had no recourse until it was far too late to change of it. How long will you wait? They originally loved you and welcomed you as the white and colored men of the far away places and you consumed them and desecrated their lands. THAT WHICH IS PUT FORTH ALWAYS RETURNS! ALWAYS!

Always the Great Spirit has sent his teachers of The Creation to dwell upon his creations to tend of his living planets and teach harmony and balance with all things. The human comes and destroys and pillages and always, in the ending, the “native” ancients must come forth again to show you the way and nurture the gift of a planet’s life for the ancient truth bearers will always have a few who are sent forth with the “memories” of how it IS. But first, you must know how it has “become” that you might see the reasons for the required changes lest you perish.

As the axis of a planet changes there is chaos created beyond that of social circumstance. You have lived in a cycle in which all that was without moved within. Now, to change of the circumstance, all that is within must come without. You have the ambiguous situation of opposites--a complete reversal of that which appears to be. That which is visualized as reality, is in fact, the illusion and the reality of dimension and experience is the unseen. Humankind on Earth has forgotten and he learns most slowly indeed. So be it.

It is now the time of coming back into the fold of God and The Creation and move again into the following of the Laws thereof. It is a time of recalling your Constitution and casting out of the destroyers thereof. You have allowed the very evil which will totally destroy you within the very fiber of your beingness. Were there errors in your original Constitution?--of course. Your founding fathers did not write in, intentionally, bigotry or mass incarceration of the Indian, but early interpretations thereof caused it to occur, none-the-less. You have written “freedom” out of your laws in favor of enslavement--and YOU have done it, my friends. Do not blame your brother--YOU ALLOWED OF IT! NOW, IF IT IS TO BE BROUGHT INTO PROPERNESS--YOU WILL DO OF IT!

You can have a rule of thumb for judging that which they tell you and that which they do unto you from the governmental and military halls of injustice.

For example, they will tell you that defense spending is dropping; that military actions are lessening and that somehow you are “preparing for a world fight for ecology and peace”--the big B-word, my friends.

Let me quote just a couple of items from your own news within the past couple of days--oh, it doesn’t make your media news nor is it put forth on your front pages and when it is, it is offered as “good” news and encouragement for the economy.

WALL STREET JOURNAL 5/16/90 (YESTERDAY). Also carried in the local papers:

FUTURISTIC: The Pentagon on Tuesday unveiled drawings of prototypes of the Advanced Tactical Fighter, a futuristic aircraft with a $63.5 BILLION price tag designed to replace the F-15 fighter jet. Drawings (and there were two) show two versions of the single seat, twin-engine craft. The plane will use “stealth” technology to evade radar and cruise at supersonic speeds without using afterburners, known as “supercruise”. (Hatonn: And I believe they tell you that you need no shelters for you won’t have a war??? Then why would you need these planes???)

- - - - the plane , called the Advanced Tactical Fighter, is designed to be the first U.S. dog fighter to carry missiles entirely inside its fuselage - - .

(Ah ha) The Pentagon said it already has spent about $2.8 billion to develop a pair of ATF prototypes. Two teams of contractors have invested another $1.2 billion.

One of the teams, led by Lockheed Corp., includes Boeing Co. and General Dynamic Corp. and McDonnell Douglas Corp. - - - - - - -.

Ok and so what! Well, what about these other little back page items in the Wall Street Journal, 5/14/90:

Hughes Georgia Inc., a unit of General Motors Corp. (how many knew that?) received a $194 million Air Force contract for Maverick missiles and parts.

General Dynamics Corp. was awarded a $63.3 million Air Force contract for support of F-16 aircraft and Atlas II - - - .

Olin Corp. won a $51 million contract for Navy 20-millimeter ammunition and Army small-arms propellant.

Aerojet General Corp. got a $16.1 million Air Force contract for MX missile rockets.

United Technologies Corp. received a $15.1 million Army contract for Uh-601 helicopters.

WALL STREET JOURNAL, 5/15/90:

Lockheed Missiles and Space Co. received a $971 million contract from the National Aeronautics and Space Administration to oversee design and development of new generation rocket motors - - - -.

Hughes Aircraft Co., a unit of General Motors Corp., was given a $77 million Air Force contract to build a North Atlantic Treaty Organization air defense system for Iceland.

Unisys Corp. won a $25.8 million Navy contract for submarine navigation equipment.

Pan Am World Services Inc., a unit of Pan Am Corp., received a $12.6 million Air Force contract for support of the Eastern Space and Missile Center.

And on and on it goes. You might ask, “But how can companies that are now barred from even bidding on government jobs for massive ”rip-offs‟ be getting contracts?” I thought you would never ask! By allowing one “corporation” to die and birthing a nice new one to bid. I certainly hope all you good business men in my troops are taking lessons--not for corruption but rather as to how to do business in Satan’s world using his own tools to get to his vulnerable spots.

I would also like to point out another couple of items: In the same paper of May 14 it says, “The nation’s rural poor are going hungry because food-stamp benefits aren’t enough to cover higher food costs in impoverished rural counties - - -.” Does this not touch your heart?

And, while you pay off hundreds of billions of dollars to “bailout” the S&Ls because of the mismanagement and junk bond portfolios, you get the following: Wall Street Journal, 5/15/90: “AMID THE RUBBLE OF THE BATTERED JUNK-BOND MARKET, SOME POWERFUL NEW PLAYERS ARE STIRRING: THE MAJOR BANKS.

“Using bank’s newly won powers to underwrite corporate bonds, Citicorp, J. P. Morgan & Co and Bankers Trust New York Corp. have all established groups specializing in sales and trading of high-risk, high-yield junk bonds. And First Chicago Corp. has just begun staffing up for a junk-bond effort - - - - - - -.”

Do you see the correlation? These are the top Conspiracy banks, my friends! And, by the way, Mr. Robert Bartley, Editor, The Wall Street Journal is a prominent member of the Movers and Shakers of the Trilateral Commission. I knew you knew that.

Here is just a little side blast by your government at Japan: “Japanese Prime Minister Toshiki Kaifu said his nation would maintain a ban on rice imports to protect domestic growers despite U.S. demands for improved market access. ”Rice and rice cultivation have a special significance for our country and in light of this we will continue to adhere to the basic policy of self-sufficiency,‟ Mr. Kaifu told legislators. Japanese consumers pay up to six times world prices for domestic rice as the government props up inefficient rice producers with substantial subsidies.”

Now isn’t that just awful? Well read on from the same day’s paper and see if you can spot any similarities: “Wall Street Journal, 5/14/90: “Brach’s Candy Co. said the Commerce Department rejected its request to have the company’s Chicago plant designated a Foreign Trading Zone.

“The refusal by the department’s Foreign Trade Zones Board means that the candy manufacturer--owned by Switzerland’s Jacobs Suchard AG--won’t be allowed to import sugar at world prices, but must instead continue to buy the essential ingredient under import quotas that boost its annual costs by about $20 million.

“- - - - - if it didn’t get the relief it sought it might close the aging Chicago plant--an island of high-paying, unionized production jobs in the midst of the city’s blighted West Side--and shift the about 3,400 jobs to either Mexico or Canada. - - - -”

Oh yes, just one paper is material for dozens of Express writings. Note another tid-bit on one page on the 15th: “CIBA-GEIGY LTD. TO DEVELOP ALLERGY TREATMENT PRODUCTS.” And on the adjacent page: “Jacobs Engineering Group Inc. said it received two contracts valued at $79 million from Ciba-Geigy Corp. to design and construct a dyestuff manufacturing facility and a chemical plant in St. Gabriel, La.

“Ciba-Geigy Corp. is the U.S. unit of Swiss-based Ciba-Geigy Ltd., a maker of agricultural chemicals, dyestuffs, and other products - - -.” And further, what do you think causes the most allergies? Right on! Dyes, pesticides, etc. Who do you think might also be high ranking in the Councils of Foreign Relations? See, the game gets to be more and more fun, does it not? Now try the Trilateral Commission and the Bilderbergers.

And one last distraction from the same edition says that Bush backs getting a base on Mars in 30 years. Dear ones, there was a base on Mars over 30 years ago! Then in a fashion unlike anything else, the government issued the following suggestions to prevent deliberate terrorist attacks on airliners: “The presidential panel made dozens of recommendations to counter the terrorist threat, including: the establishment of a new supervisory office-assistant secretary for security and intelligence--within the Transportation Department; increased importance for the security operation within the FAA; and the assigning of federal security managers with direct access to FAA chiefs at major international and domestic airports. The panel also urged the government to alert passengers to credible threats and to establish criteria for when passengers should be notified - - - - - .” So be it!

I apologize for this long and tedious delay, Dharma, but our brothers must begin to see the generalizations and read those back pages--for guess what the front page read: “DESPITE HIS SUCCESSES, BAKER’S CRITICS SAY HE LACKS A BROAD STRATEGY”, “ATTEMPT’s TO RESTORE THE CARIBOU FALTER IN THE MAIN WOODS”, “U.S. FOOD FIRMS FIND EUROPE’S HUGE MARKET HARDLY A PIECE OF CAKE” and “CAR MAGAZINE WRITERS SOMETIMES MOONLIGHT FOR FIRMS THEY REVIEW”.

NOW, BACK TO WHERE WE LEFT OFF WITH YOUR CONSTITUTION

Section 10. Powers Denied to the States

a. No State shall enter into any treaty, alliance, or confederation; grant letters of marque and reprisal; coin money; emit bills of credit; make any thing but gold and silver coin a tender in payment of debts; pass any bill of attainder, ex post facto law, or law impairing the obligation of contracts, or grant any title of nobility.

*[The framers had lived through the disaster of the Continental dollar. Today’s fiscal conservatives argue that this country’s economic problems are a direct consequence of the Supreme Court’s failure to uphold the monetary provisions of the Constitution. Well, all of your problems are from failure to uphold the Constitution. The ex post facto law was a provision aimed at the welter of state laws favoring debtors over creditors.]

b. No State shall, without the consent of the Congress, lay any imposts or duties on imports or exports, except what may be absolutely necessary for executing its inspection laws; and the net produce of all duties and imposts, laid by any State on imports or exports, shall be for the use of the treasury of the United States; and all such laws shall be subject to the revision and control of the Congress.

c. No State shall, without the consent of Congress, lay any duty of tonnage, keep troops, or ships of war in time of peace, enter into any agreement or compact with another State, or with a foreign power, or engage in war, unless actually invaded, or in such imminent danger as will not admit of delay. *[The state militia was to bear the brunt until Congress could act. During Washington’s two-term Presidency, the U.S. army grew from 840 men to 7,108 men, as an example--how many men do you think you have now?]

*[The First Congress represented you people beyond your best hopes. It organized the three branches of government, regulated foreign commerce, created a national bank and the national judiciary system, admitted the states of Vermont and Kentucky, initiated the Constitutional amendment process, established the census, funded the national debt, and dealt with petitions for increased tariffs on imported mustard, paint, cordage, cotton clothes and on and on. What do you have now? Bills presented to the president which cannot be line vetoed of things lumping such things as a pork-barrel requests with aid to Panama--one having nothing what-so-ever to do with the other and yet action cannot be taken on one without the other passing or failing also. “You’ve come a long way, Baby” I believe is a slogan of sorts. But it hasn’t been good!]

ARTICLE 2

EXECUTIVE DEPARTMENT

Section 1. President and Vice President.

a. Term of office. The executive power shall be vested in a President of the United States of America. He shall hold his office during the term of four years, and together with the Vice President, chosen for the same term, be elected as follows;

b. Electors. Each State shall appoint, in such manner as the legislature thereof may direct, a number of electors, equal to the whole number of Senators and Representatives to which the State may be entitled in the Congress; but no Senator or Representative, or person holding an office of trust or profit under the United States, shall be appointed an elector.

Former method of electing President and Vice President.

*[Superseded by the 12th Amendment.] The electors shall meet in their respective States, and vote by ballot for two persons, of whom one at least shall not be an inhabitant of the same State with themselves. And they shall make a list of all the persons voted for, and of the number of votes for each; which list they shall sign and certify, and transmit sealed to the seat of government of the United States, directed to the President of the Senate. The President of the Senate shall, in the presence of the Senate and House of Representatives, open all the certificates, and the votes shall then be counted. The person having the greatest number of votes shall be the President, if such number be a majority of the whole number of electors appointed; and if there be more than one who have such majority, and have an equal number of votes, then the House of Representatives shall immediately choose by ballot one of them for President; and if no person have a majority, then from the five highest on the list the said house shall in like manner choose the President. But in choosing the President the votes shall be taken by States, the representation from each State having one vote; a quorum for this purpose shall consist of a member or members from two-thirds of the States, and a majority of all the States shall be necessary to a choice. In every case, after the choice of the President, the person having the greatest number of votes of the electors shall be the Vice President. But if there should remain two or more who have equal votes, the Senate shall choose from them by ballot the Vice President. *[Boy, that one really got a bashing by the acute wisdom of a rewriting of that section by amendment no. 12! But this is how total deterioration begins.]

c. Time of elections. The Congress may determine the time of choosing the electors, and the day on which they shall give their votes; which day shall be the same throughout the United States.

d. Qualifications of the President. No person except a natural born citizen, or a citizen of the United States, at the time of the adoption of this Constitution, shall be eligible to the office of President; neither shall any person be eligible to that office who shall not have attained to the age of thirty-five years, *[That is about as specific as you can get--35 years of age; not merely requiring “maturity” or “adequate age”] and been fourteen years a resident within the United States.

e. Vacancy. *[This Clause has been affected by the 25th Amendment.] In case of the removal of the President from office or of his death, resignation, or inability to discharge the powers and duties of the said office, the same shall devolve on the Vice President, and the Congress may by law provide for the case of removal, death, resignation, or inability, both of the President and Vice President, declaring what officer shall then act as President, and such officer shall act accordingly, until the disability be removed, or a President shall be elected.

f. The President’s salary. The President shall, at stated times, receive for his services, a compensation, which shall neither be increased nor diminished during the period for which he shall have been elected, and he shall not receive within that period any other emolument from the United States, or any of them.

g. Oath of office. Before he enters on the execution of his office, he shall take the following oath or affirmation: -- “I do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will faithfully execute the office of President of the United States, and will to the best of my ability, preserve, protect and defend the Constitution of the United States.” *[Do you think the founding fathers might be squirming in their graves?]

Section 2. Powers of the President.

a. Military powers; reprieves and pardons. The President shall be Commander in Chief of the Army and Navy of the United States, and of the militia of the several States, when called into the actual service of the United States; he may require *[This led to the Presidential cabinet. It was referred to a “privy council”. This, however, also became obsolete for power as the Presidents have moved on to utilizing input directly from their “advisors” such as Kissinger, etc., who are not even connected to the governing bodies.] the opinion, in writing, of the principal officer in each of the executive departments [the ONE explicit reference to bureaucracy.] upon any subject relating to the duties of their respective offices, and he shall have power to grant reprieves and pardons for offences against the United States, except in cases of impeachment. [Boy, that was a close one with Nixon, don’t you think?]

b. Treaties; appointments. He shall have power, by and with the advice and consent of the Senate, to make treaties, provided two-thirds of the Senators present concur; and he shall nominate, and by and with the advice and consent of the Senate, shall appoint ambassadors, other public ministers and consuls, judges of the Supreme Court, and all other officers of the United States, whose appointments are not herein otherwise provided for, and which shall be established by law: but the Congress may by law vest the appointment of such inferior officers as they think proper, in the President alone, in the courts of law, or in the heads of departments.

c. Filling vacancies. The President shall have power to fill up all vacancies that may happen during the recess of the Senate, by granting commissions which shall expire at the end of their next session.

Section 3. Duties of the President.

He shall from time to time give to the Congress information of the state of the Union, and recommend to their consideration such measures as he shall judge necessary and expedient; he may, on extraordinary occasions, convene both houses, or either of them, and in case of disagreement between them with respect to the time of adjournment, he may adjourn them to such time as he shall think proper; he shall receive ambassadors and other public ministers; he shall take care that the laws be faithfully executed, and shall commission all the officers of the United States. *[Well, I would say that he does a very good job of “executing” the laws.]

Section 4. Impeachment.

The President, Vice President and all civil officers of the United States shall be removed from office on impeachment for, and conviction of, treason, bribery, or other high crimes and misdemeanors. *[The last several of your Presidents have been guilty of all--why do you not do something lawfully written to get rid of them?]

* * * * * * * * *

Hatonn to clear. Please let me know when you are ready to continue.

5/17/90 #2 HATONN

ARTICLE 3

JUDICIAL DEPARTMENT

Section 1. The Federal Courts.

The judicial power of the United States shall be vested in one Supreme Court, and in such inferior courts as the Congress may from time to time ordain and establish. The judges, both of the Supreme and inferior courts, shall hold their offices during good behavior, and shall, at stated times, receive for their services, a compensation, which shall not be diminished during their continuance in office.

Section 2. Jurisdiction of the Federal Courts.

a. Federal courts in general. The judicial power shall extend to all cases, in law and equity, arising under this Constitution, the laws of the United States, and treaties made or which shall be made, under their authority;--to all cases affecting ambassadors, other public ministers and consuls;--to all cases of admiralty and maritime jurisdiction;--to controversies to which the United States shall be a party;--to controversies between two or more States;--between a State and citizens of another State;--between citizens of different States;--between citizens of the same State claiming lands under grants of different States, and between a State, or the citizens thereof, and foreign states, citizens or subjects. *[Parts of this section were altered by the 11th Amendment.]

b. Supreme Court. In all cases affecting ambassadors, other public ministers and consuls, and those in which a State shall be a party, the Supreme Court shall have original jurisdiction. In all the other cases before mentioned, the Supreme Court shall have appellate jurisdiction, both as to law and fact, with such exceptions, and under such regulations as the Congress shall make.

c. Rules respecting trials. The trial of all crimes, except in cases of impeachment, shall be by jury; and such trial shall be held in the State where the said crimes shall have been committed; but when not committed within any State, the trial shall be at such place or places as the Congress may by law have directed.

Section 3. Treason. *[The only crime defined in the Constitution. Talking or thinking about committing a treasonable act is not considered treason in the U. S.--YET!]

a. Definition of treason. Treason against the United States shall consist only in levying war against them, or in adhering to their enemies, giving them aid and comfort. No person shall be convicted of treason unless on the testimony of two witnesses to the same overt act, or on confession in open court.

b. Punishment of treason. The Congress shall have power to declare the punishment of treason, but no attainder of treason shall work corruption of blood, *[The next generation will not be penalized.] or forfeiture except during the life of the person attainted.

ARTICLE 4

THE STATES AND THE FEDERAL GOVERNMENT

Section 1. State Records.

Full faith and credit shall be given in each State to the public acts, records, and judicial proceedings of every other State. *[Acts required of the states and drawn from the Articles of Confederation.] And the Congress may by general laws prescribe the manner in which such acts, records, and proceedings shall be proved, and the effect thereof.

Section 2. Privileges and Immunities of Citizens.

a. Privileges. The citizens of each State shall be entitled to all privileges and immunities of citizens in the several States.

b. Extradition. A person charged in any State with treason, felony, or other crime, who shall flee from justice, and be found in another State, shall, on demand of the executive authority of the State from which he fled be delivered up, to be removed to the State having jurisdiction of the crime.

c. Fugitive workers. No person held to service or labor in one State, under the laws thereof, escaping into another shall in consequence of any law or regulation herein, be discharged from such service or labor, but shall be delivered up on claim of the party to whom such service or labor may be due. *[Superseded by the 13th Amendment. In 1857, Chief Justice Roger Brooke Taney declared that blacks were not people but “articles of merchandise.” He invalidated the Missouri Compromise and made the Civil War all but inevitable. The fugitive slave clause, a Southern proposal, was not sanctioned under the Articles of Confederation. It was part of the historic Northwest Ordinance. But by 1860, slavery had become a national institution, legal wherever not forbidden by state law, and it had considerable Federal protection. Oh yes indeed, the laws had flaws and herein lies the irony--and further, by “voting-in” a thing does not make it so. Declaring the blacks to not be “people” made them no less people; nor the Indians nor, nor, nor.]

Section 3. New States and Territories.

a. Admission of new States. New States may be admitted by the Congress into this Union; but no new State shall be formed or erected within the jurisdiction of any other State; nor any State be formed by the junction of two or more States, or parts of States, without the consent of the legislatures of the States concerned, as well as of the Congress.

b. Power of Congress over territory and property. The Congress shall have power to dispose of and make all needful rules and regulations respecting the territory or other property belonging to the United States; and nothing in this Constitution shall be so construed as to prejudice any claims of the United States, or of any particular State. *[Please note the separation of the United States and “any particular State”. This is important when you get to the income tax laws, IRS, etc. If you reside in a “state” you are a citizen of that State--you are not a citizen of the United States as such. If this were true, the Constitution would have to read United State’s citizen. It does not!]

Section 4. Guarantees to the States.

The United States shall guarantee to every State in this Union a republican form of government, *[No action has ever been taken under this clause.] and shall protect each of them against invasion; and on application of the legislature or of the executive (when the legislature cannot be convened) against domestic violence.

ARTICLE 5

METHOD OF AMENDMENT

The congress, whenever two-thirds of both houses shall deem it necessary, shall propose amendments to this Constitution, or, on the application of the legislatures of two-thirds of the several States, shall call a convention for proposing amendments, which, in either case shall be valid to all intents and purposes, as part of this Constitution, when ratified by the legislatures of three-fourths of the several States, or by conventions in three-fourths thereof, as the one or the other mode of ratification may be proposed by the Congress; provided that no amendments which may be made prior to the year one thousand eight hundred and eight shall in any manner affect the first and fourth clauses in the ninth section of the first article, and that no State, without its consent, shall be deprived of its equal suffrage in the Senate. *[The only amendment that can’t be proposed. The clause was adopted to head off concern that three-fourths of the states might be brought to do things fatal to particular states, such as abolishing them altogether or depriving them of their equality in the Senate.]

ARTICLE 6

*[This is counterbalanced by the 10th Amendment.]

GENERAL PROVISIONS

a. Public debt. All debts contracted and engagements entered into, before the adoption of this Constitution, shall be as valid against the United States under this Constitution, as under the Confederation. *[This was introduced by the mercurial Governor Edmund Randolph; it’s been disclaimed by some as “legal robbery, such as the history of civilized nations can scarcely produce a parallel to.” Pierce Butler (S. C.) was concerned that redemption of government paper at face value would succor the “bloodsuckers who had speculated on the distresses of others. . . ” The question of full or partial redemption was left unresolved.]

b. Supremacy of the Constitution. This Constitution, and the laws of the United States which shall be made in pursuance thereof; and all treaties made, or which shall be made, under the authority of the United States, shall be the supreme law of the land; *[The important clause, lifted from the magna Carta, was prompted by Congress‟ demand that states repeal laws violating the Treaty of Paris. States cannot pass laws contrary to the Constitution. The principle of Federal supremacy was tested in the Whiskey Rebellion (1794), and again in South Carolina’s Ordinance of Nullification (1832) declaring void the Tariff Acts of 1828, and again of course in the Civil War.]

c. Oath of office, no religious test *[Adopted unanimously by the delegates, though 11 of the states had a religious qualification for state representatives. Many also required voters to own property and office holders to be well off. Nowhere does the Constitution actually speak of separation of church and state. That there was no religious test provided ample ammunition for anti-Constitutionalists during the ratification process. God is not mentioned anywhere in the Constitution (but IS in the Declaration of Independence).] shall ever be required as a qualification to any office or public trust under the United States.

ARTICLE 7

RATIFICATION OF THE CONSTITUTION

The ratification of the conventions of nine States shall be sufficient for the establishment of this Constitution between the States so ratifying the same.

Done in Convention by the unanimous consent of the States present the Seventeenth Day of September in the Year of our Lord one thousand seven hundred and eighty seven and of the Independence of the United States of America the Twelfth. In Witness whereof We have hereunto subscribed our Names.

G. Washington

President and deputy from Virginia

New Hampshire

John Langdon                Nicholas Gilman

Delaware

Geo. Read                John Dickinson

Jaco. Broom                Gunning Bedford Jr.

Richard Bassett

Massachusetts

Nathaniel Gorham           Rufus King

Connecticut

Wm. Saml Johnson           Roger Sherman

Maryland

McHenry                     Danl. Carroll

Dan: of St. Thos. Jenifer

New York

Alexander Hamilton

Virginia

John Blair                James Madison Jr.

New Jersey

Wil. Livingston                David Brearly

Wm. Paterson                Jona: Dayton

North Carolina

Wm. Blount                Hu. Williamson

Richd. Dobbs Spaight

Pennsylvania

B. Franklin                Robt Morris

Thos. FitzSimons           James Wilson

Thomas Mifflin                Geo. Clymer

Jared Ingersoll                Gouv Morris

South Carolina

J. Rutledge                Charles Pinckney

Charles C. Pinckney           James Wilson

Pierce Butler

Georgia

William Few                Abr. Baldwin

Attest: William Jackson, Secretary

IN CONVENTION MONDAY, SEPTEMBER 17TH, 1787.

Resolved,

That the preceding Constitution be laid before the United States in Congress assembled, and that it is the Opinion of this Convention, that it should afterwards be submitted to a Convention of Delegates, chosen in each State by the People thereof, under the Recommendation of its Legislature, for their Assent and Ratification; and that each Convention assenting to, and ratifying the Same, should give Notice thereof to the United States in Congress assembled.

Resolved, That it is the Opinion of this Convention, that as soon as the Conventions of nine States shall have ratified this Constitution, the United States in Congress assembled should fix a Day on which Electors should be appointed by the States which shall have ratified the same and a Day on which the Electors should assemble to vote for the President, and the Time and Place for commencing Proceedings under this Constitution. . .By the Unanimous Order of the Convention. *[Congress was not asked for its approval of the proposed Constitution, and didn’t give it, but if Congress had decided not to send the Constitution to the states, there wasn’t much its framers could have done. Ratification would be decided by “We the People” in convention state by state rather than by potentially hostile state legislatures, whose powers would be clipped by the Constitution. Just after the convention, James Madison said that “the document would neither effectually answer its national object nor prevent the local mischiefs which everywhere excite disgusts against state governments.”]

About 10,000 amendments have been introduced in Congress. Thirty-three were formalized and sent to the states for ratification. The seven not adopted by the necessary three-fourths of the states include two amendments in the First Congress‟ package of a dozen. The ten that were adopted are called, collectively, the Bill of Rights.

Perhaps you should be reminded of the seven that were not ratified.

1789: concerning the ratio of members in the House of Representatives.

1789: concerning compensation to members of Congress.

1810: concerning the abrogation of citizenship for accepting gifts or titles of nobility from a foreign power without the consent of Congress. It missed adoption by only one state.

1861: concerning non-Congressional interference in slavery. Offered to head off the Civil War, it was adopted by only two states. It was the first proposed amendment signed by a President (Buchanan) before distribution to the states. (Just before he was murdered, President Lincoln signed the proposed Thirteenth Amendment.)

1924: concerning the labor of persons under 18 years of age. It was opposed by manufacturing associations and some religious groups.

1972: concerning equality of rights regardless of gender. E.R.A. fell three states short of adoption.

1978: concerning representation of the District of Columbia in the House and Senate. D.C. has a population larger than do four of the states. This one will continue to come up.

Three new proposals for amendments that are arousing interest would require: a balanced Federal budget; a four-year term for Representatives to coincide with the Presidential term; and modification of the treaty requirement, possibly to a straight majority decision. Then, of course, you are aware of the effort of Mr. Bush to cause an amendment to ban flag burning.

Dharma, allow us to leave this now. We will continue with the Bill of Rights.

Thank you for your service. I shall now move to stand-by that you might close this portion. Good-day.

CHAPTER 13

1/30/91 #1 HATONN

THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO

QUOTE:

Americans, who have been watching the degeneration of our society, the increase in violence, drugs, pornography, and the national debt, often write us for advice about what to do “once the nation falls” into socialism, insolvency and surrender. Some use the forbidden “C” word, by asking what they should do “when the communists take over.” My friends, when the Thought-theology (psychopolitics) of what we understand is communism finally takes over in America, it will NOT be called by that name. The Hammer and Sickle will probably never adorn any flag. (Communism will be called “democracy” and accepted by most Americans with dancing in the streets!)

Does this sound preposterous? Think about it. How would you know “when communism, sold as democracy,” is the ultimate law of the land? If those who are now employing “more powerful levers and more subtle webs” succeed in their plans, most of those living in this country may not notice much of a difference from what they think of as the American Way these days!

Karl Marx, the Jewish hippy who invented what is known today as “Scientific socialism”, was not himself a communist and never claimed to be one. Mr. Marx, it is now known, collaborated with some wealthy totalitarian socialists, and they let him put his name on their joint effort, and it was titled, THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO. It was a scheme of powerful levers and subtle webs. There is so little difference between socialism and communism that 70 years after the COMMUNIST MANIFESTO was published, Lenin, the socialist founder of modern communism, called himself a communist but named Russia and other conquered territories the Union of Socialist Republics. Regardless of what communism is called, it would be identified by at least ten basic planks as set forth in the MANIFESTO. These political planks need to be listed here, not only as a review but as a template by which to gauge the American government and policies today. (Hatonn: I have given you all of these but perhaps you will see and hear more clearly if they are again laid forth from Earth-man.)

1) ABOLITION OF PROPERTY IN LAND AND APPLICATION OF ALL RENTS TO PUBLIC USE.

Did you know that the Federal Government of Washington, D.C. now owns over 40% of the land mass of the United States? That is more land than the entire country east of the Mississippi River. It does so in direct violation of the United States Constitution. The Federal Government now owns more than 10% of all industrial properties, and owns railroads, barge lines, etc. As the government buys more and more land, this property is taken off the tax rolls, and this increases the taxes all of us must pay on the land we suppose that we own. Most Americans think that they own their land. They think that a certain parcel upon which they live actually belongs to them. Have your lawyer explain to you why your deeds have been drawn as they have or why you and your wife are called “tenants in common” and other strange language and phrases. Here is the rule of law: If you must pay the state or county a “property tax”, and the state or county can sell your property to someone else if you fail to pay the tax, you are not the actual and lawful owner of that land or property! Marx called the use tax on land, rent. Today it is called “property tax” and while universally accepted by most Americans, the property tax is 100% Marxist (communist) in nature. How then will you know when “communism takes over?”

The land that is still informally held in private hands, is now subject to state and municipal controls called “land use” and you can only do certain things on land that you suppose you own. If you actually owned it, instead of being merely a “tenant with a vested interest in it”, no city, state or federal controls could be imposed upon it. Yet, you accept zoning restrictions as normal and allow the city to impose “rent controls”. You sit tight when the Federal Government tells you, via an unconstitutional statute, that you must rent “your property” to anyone who comes to your door, regardless of race, color, national origin and sexual preference. From where did they get the lawful jurisdiction to tell you what you can do on “your property”? If indeed it is your property, there is no such authority except that which you voluntarily submit to. However, since you are merely a tenant paying property use tax rent on the land, they have every right to tell you how you will use that property and how far from the property line you must build any house, etc. Can you imagine Patrick Henry putting up with such nonsense? Of course not! But then, Patrick Henry was a Freeman, not a communist. He did not hold communist ideas about the use of land, as most Americans today do. How about you? Are you a communist when it comes to land use? As to the use of land, every Senator and every Congressman is a communist today. Nothing much will change “when communism takes over”, except that you will know that you are a mere tenant and not a land owner as you had supposed for years. Some of you tenants will be pushed off the state’s land so that another tenant can use your nice home and farm and if you illegally resist, you may be legally shot.

When the communist agent, Woodie Guthrie, wrote the now famous song, “This Land is My Land; this Land is Your Land...” he was writing with the communist understanding about land and land ownership. Yet patriotic groups, ignorant of communist objectives, often sing that song with the same attitude and reverence as they do with America, the Beautiful. Good grief!

2) A HEAVY PROGRESSIVE OR GRADUATED INCOME TAX.

This is probably the best known of the Marxist-Communist political concepts in use today in America. If there is any communist statute or regulation that has been imposed unlawfully on most Americans, and one which affects their very lives and fortunes the most, the communist income tax has to be it. If there was any statute that employed more “powerful levers” or “subtle webs”, you would be hard pressed to find it. As with the progressive tax on property, it is a communist idea of “from each according to his ability and to each according to his need” that finds exact expression in the federal and state graduated income tax laws. Yet 90% of all Americans accept that system of federal revenue taxation as if it were both Scriptural and American. It is neither. It comes from the Babylonian Talmud, and is the main cornerstone of communist Thought-theology, Marxism-Leninism is not only a political thought, but is also the religion of the communist-socialist. I was sitting at a restaurant meal with two Baptist ministers and their wives recently. These men had come to see me regarding several theological opinions that I hold and set forth in STAR WARS 4. During the discussion, the subject of the Marxist federal income tax came up, and I stated that I had not filed a return in over 20 years. One of the minister’s wives blurted right out, “I think I should turn you in!” Here was a woman claiming to be a Christian who was perfectly at ease turning in another Christian to the federal authorities over the matter of a communist taxing system! What did the two ministers say concerning the outburst from this wife? Nothing. Now, how could they understand the deeper meanings of STAR WARS 4 when they were functional communists in Thought-theology (Psychopolitics)? Here is a plank of the COMMUNIST MANIFESTO so ingrained in their sub-conscious minds that they were silent when this woman suggested that I be turned over to the authorities! It is a well-known hallmark of communism when you see people turning in their neighbors to the authorities. It is now beginning on a large scale in America with such carefully prepared TV shows as UNSOLVED MYSTERIES, where the TV uses brutal murders, drug and child abuse crimes to get the public accustomed to thinking about turning people in so as to solve these crimes. You will become a “state hero” and even paid $1,000 for your help. Next, you will be paid for turning in people who own firearms or teach the citizenry about unlawful government activities. Will you really recognize the point “when communism takes over?”

3) ABOLITION OF ALL RIGHT TO INHERITANCE.

In spite of the federal Estate Tax of 1916, your Marxist government has yet to accomplish this objective. They have imposed a heavy inheritance tax, illegally confiscating a large part of that property a man leaves to his children. After a couple of generations, the property is gone. How many people do you know who still live on their grandfather’s farm or ranch? Naturally, the lower classes, who have chosen not to save enough to purchase property, have no inheritances to leave. The super-rich have been provided the use of tax-exempt foundations so that their wealth is passed on to their posterity. It is the great middle-class that the Marxist objectives are directed toward, and which succeed very well in America. Where does the federal government get the authority and jurisdiction to tax the property of the deceased?

4) CONFISCATION OF THE PROPERTY OF EMIGRANTS AND REBELS.

Emigrants are people who leave a country, and that does not apply to Americans. However, look at what is done to Americans your government calls “rebels.” All your government needs to do is allege that a person is a “tax resister” or a drug pusher and his property and real estate can be confiscated without due process. Some of you saw the story on INSIDE EDITION where a citizen’s property was taken by the Federal authorities without due process merely because she had rented the house to people later determined to have been using the house for drug traffic. All your government needs to do is allege that property, real estate, cars, boats, etc., are owned by those involved in drugs, and this property can be taken and sold under Public Law 99-570 set in place in 1986. You have read the horror stories.

Some minimum wage seaman can sneak drugs aboard a million dollar ship, unknown to the owners or the captain, and the ship is confiscated by the government without due process of law! HOW WILL YOU KNOW WHEN COMMUNISM TAKES OVER?

5) CENTRALIZATION OF CREDIT IN THE HANDS OF THE STATE, BY MEANS OF A NATIONAL BANK WITH STATE CAPITAL AND AN EXCLUSIVE MONOPOLY.

It was through the Federal Reserve Act of 1913 that the private banking cartel known as the FEDERAL RESERVE BANK came into being. It is through this scheme, with the government controlling the banks and credit for the benefit of the secret shareholders, that the effect of this objective of the communists came into being in the United States. The super rich bankers, while they liked the controls envisioned by Karl Marx, decided that all the usury and profits should go into THEIR pockets instead of the federal coffers. It is this small bank of International Bankers who decide how much interest you are going to pay on your home mortgage and they have the monopoly power to force other banks to charge the same rates. Individual credit can be given or withheld at the whim of these bankers. The private FEDERAL RESERVE BANKING SYSTEM is neither “federal” nor does it have any “reserves” as commonly thought. The local Federal Reserve Bank is not listed under agencies of the Federal Government in your phone book, but listed in the white pages as any other private business.

The FEDERAL RESERVE NOTES, which you carry in your pocket, though printed by the federal government for those private banker’s use, and identified as “legal tender”, are in fact privately circulated bank notes. As “notes” they do not certify that the U.S. Treasury has gold or silver to “back them” but state on their face that the U.S. Government is in debt to that amount. You are not paying your bills with certificates of wealth, but with evidences of federal debt. You are passing the U.S. debt to the bankers around among yourselves as if it was lawful money. The private Federal Reserve makes huge profits for its member banks, and yet it pays no federal or state income taxes, and they have never been audited by any government agency. A couple of years ago, Senator Metcalf of Washington State launched a campaign against the FEDERAL RESERVE and had it put on the ballot to restore the right to create money to the Congress as specified in the Constitution. The people in Washington State were so ignorant or communist-minded that they actually voted it down! HOW WILL YOU KNOW...?

In 1933, when so many banks lost their shirts and had to repay their depositors or close their doors, the FEDERAL RESERVE ACT was changed to incorporate the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) (Hatonn: Note “Corporation” which designates private.) Here is how that works, and we can see it with the current Savings and Loan scandals. In good times, the bankers make huge profits. However, in bad times, the American taxpayers are called upon to bail out the bankers, letting them retain their personal assets. How will you know when “communism takes over”? Most people are so accustomed to the yoke of communism, thrust upon them in the name of “democracy” and “social security”, that they believe that these things must be the form of government our Forefathers gave us. They think it is normal to have total taxes in amounts to 50% of income. Where is their Great Republic based upon the Common Law and the Constitution? For all practical purposes, it no longer exists.

6) CENTRALIZATION OF THE MEANS OF COMMUNICATION AND TRANSPORTATION IN THE HANDS OF THE STATE.

All radio and television networks are licensed and permitted to operate only at the good pleasure of the federal government through the Federal Communications Commission. Because their programming is under strict federal guidelines, anti-communist programs are rarely aired. How many of you can recall one TV program, in the past 30 years, which set forth the communist objectives for the conquest of America and the world? Instead, all programming is designed to promote socialist thinking, and our country is never referred to as a republic but ALWAYS AS A DEMOCRACY. All news is designed to promote the communists and their leading individuals as reasonable people, and anti-communist nations, such as South Africa, are always cast in an unfavorable light. Communist objectives for America, such as degeneration of moral values, interracial marriage, promiscuous sex, and homosexual life styles, are treated in both the news and the “situation comedies” as totally normal and health behavior, and are given to us and our children on a daily basis.

All transportation by air is under either the Federal Aviation Agency or the Civil Aeronautics Administration, and the government controls how these private businesses operate and the fares and rates that they can charge. The federal government controls every form of interstate commerce, and sets the rates that these private businesses can charge and even how long a truck driver can drive his own truck in a given day.

7) EXTENSION OF FACTORIES AND INSTRUMENTS OF PRODUCTION OWNED BY THE STATE; THE BRINGING INTO CULTIVATION OF WASTE LANDS, THE IMPROVEMENT OF THE SOIL ACCORDING TO A COMMON PLAN.

The federal government now owns and operates more than 25,000 corporate units in direct competition with private enterprise. Most of these corporations are operated at staggering losses, even though they pay no property taxes and no interest on invested capital. All of these, along with their losses, are being operated without the slightest shred of Constitutional authority. Furthermore, according to figures taken from the Federal Budget, the aggregate losses of these federally owned businesses and property, including the lost state and local taxes thereon, exceed the total amount collected each year on the personal income taxes! According to the LIBERTY AMENDMENT COMMITTEE, from whom these statistices were taken, the sale of these unlawfully owned businesses would retire about one third of the national debt, and make the personal individual income taxes a thing of the past. This author is 100% in favor of bringing wastelands into cultivation and improving the soil. However, this must be done on a private enterprise basis, and not as the result of federal bureaucratic intervention. However, in accordance to the Marxist orientation of our government, swarms of New Officers (to use the language of the Declaration of Independence) have been descending upon our farmers. There is the Bureau of Land Management, Bureau of Reclamation, Bureau of Mines, Environmental Protection Agency, and many others. I do not need to comment on the crisis now being faced by America’s independent farmers. It is not the result of incompetent farmers but because of federal meddling in both their agricultural and financial affairs.

8) EQUAL LIABILITY OF ALL TO LABOR, ESTABLISHMENT OF INDUSTRIAL ARMIES, ESPECIALLY IN AGRICULTURE.

In the first sentence, the emphasis should be on the word, liability. This is to be a “worker’s paradise” and therefore all have an equality liability, a pecuniary obligation, to labor. Every citizen, according to Marx, is required to labor, and every person is to be assigned a job. There is to be no non-laboring middle class working as salesmen and shopkeepers. In spite of massive government boondoggles in agriculture, the American farmer has found a way to produce food that feeds not only our country, but those countries as the USSR and China which still suppose that the Marxist way for agriculture may someday work. Once the farmers finally fail in large numbers, not because of agricultural flaws so much as corporate debt, the Marxist agriculture armies, gathered from those “huddled masses yearning to be free”, that now clog up the welfare rolls, will be sent forth to plant, till and harvest in the vain hope that they can feed the people.

9) COMBINATION OF AGRICULTURE WITH MANUFACTURING; GRADUAL ABOLITION OF THE DISTINCTION BETWEEN TOWN AND COUNTRY BY A MORE EQUITABLE DISTRIBUTION OF THE POPULATION OVER THE COUNTRY.

The destruction of the cities has been going on since the Roosevelt Depression. Socialist confiscatory property and business taxes on producers, and welfare handouts to non-producers, have driven commerce and industry out of the cities and provides the excuse for federal control of land use, environmental impact studies, and regional planning. Federal regional planning done between states and over state lines, is the way this Marxist plank is being carried out today.

10) FREE EDUCATION OF ALL CHILDREN IN PUBLIC SCHOOLS, ABOLITION OF CHILDREN’S FACTORY LABOR IN ITS PRESENT FORM. COMBINATION OF EDUCATION WITH INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTION.

When Karl Marx wrote “free” he meant compulsory education of the children under the control of the State. Because of the contract with the State known as the “Marriage License”, your children are legally Wards of the State. They must have “shots” and a Social Security number “required to protect the State’s wards”. State run and tax financed government schools began soon after the publishing of the COMMUNIST MANIFESTO, with the key leader at that time being Horace Mann. Next came socialized or often called “progressive” education under the guidance of John Dewey. How many of you remember having to read about the wonders of socialism in books by Lincoln Stephens in high school? The most socialist class in any high school is not history or social science but English, where the teacher can direct the children to read certain books and make reports on them. English is the only required class for all students, and it is there that the communists have directed their most attention. Under Biblical law, early American instruction, where students were studying Greek and Latin by 9 years of age, has always been the responsibility of the parents and their church assembly. Children were taught the moral values of the parents and of their church. Today, it is the State that determines what the standards will be for the children’s education. Federal Aid to Education determines how the States will set up the basic teachings and philosophy and this is exactly what Marx had in mind. This form of education teaches the child to look to the State for help, and the State becomes the child’s “god”. Christian instruction, in contrast, teaches the child to look to God, and that if he needs a hand he finds one at the end of his arm. As you look at our youth educated in government schools, observe their appearance and their attitudes, and remember that crime and drug use is increasing 7X as fast as the population, you will see the evil genius of Karl Marx in full bloom. As you re-read this section, notice that I have drawn a clear distinction between “instruction” and “education”. It is humanistic, New Age, and Eastern philosophy that man is intrinsically good. Hence the use of the word “education” by the modern socialist, which means from the Latin, “draw the good out”. In contrast, the Bible teaches that all men are sinners, and that they are basically of a sinful, wicked nature. Thus, there is no way to “draw good out” of them. Christian philosophy, based upon the truth of the Bible, teaches that children are to be instructed, that is to have the good of God’s Laws put into them so that they can be pleasing in God’s sight. Today, those church groups that teach that God’s Laws are still in full force and effect, always refer to their schools as Christian Instruction. Those churches who have gone the way of humanism, teaching that God’s Laws, Statutes and Judgments were abandoned at The Cross, rightly call their schools “Christian Education”. The term “Christian Education” is an oxymoron, an absurd contradiction in meaning to those of us with even a smattering of classical study.

As to the second part of Marx’s 10th Plank, children under 16 are not permitted to work for wages. All private apprenticeships have been abolished for children seeking to learn a trade before the age of 16. Roosevelt’s socialist friends had the Fair Labor Standards Act passed in 1937 where apprenticeships are now under control of the State.

I have taken six pages to teach you what communism really is from the works of their founders, Karl Marx. Now, fellow American, how many of the Marxist Ten Planks have you accepted as normal, necessary, and indeed the American Way?

(Hatonn: Please pay close attention to that which I will now quote from the same document but bearing more attention. After that I shall again ask Dharma to outline the Executive Orders which are now signed and in place in your government.)

J. Edgar Hoover, in his classic book on the communist threat to America, MASTERS OF DECEIT, wrote that his greatest fear was that Americans would become “state of mind communists” while adamantly denying any interest or adherence to communism. My friends, that is exactly what has happened. Most Americans go along with every single plank of the Communist Manifesto and even suppose that it is the American Way!

Now, my friends, the more powerful levers and more subtle webs have been set in place.

Several months ago I wrote about the Marxist income tax and the reasons why I was opposed to it. I further stated in public print that I had not filed any returns for 20 years nor paid any tax in all that time. These ON TARGET Northpoint Team Reports are widely photocopied and circulated with my permission and encouragement. However, they go from friend to friend and then to the Christian ignorant among the silent majority, and ultimately to the socialist enemy. You cannot believe the letters we get from professing Christians! I have read their letter admonishing me to read Romans 13, supposing that I had not managed to read that far into the New Testament. They call my attention to Christ’s words to “render unto Caesar...” and think that whatever is demanded by government under a pretext of law must be dutifully turned over to socialist schemes, heathen peoples around the world and social dropouts around the country as part of our Christian witness, testimony, and responsibility.

According to these Christians, educated into the communist Thought-theology psychopolitics of the government schools, apparently the American Colonists should have paid the tax on tea demanded of King George instead of “damaging their Christian testimony in an act of violence” by dumping it all into Boston harbor. The tax was, after all, “the Law” and imposed lawfully by those in authority. Worse than that, when the King wanted to confiscate “assault rifles” being stored in Concord, “Christian patriots should have turned them over to the Red Coats instead of killing people at Concord Bridge”.

Those early Americans are identified as Patriots, but those of us who object to the very same things today are thought of as un-American at best and unChristian at worst. Do you see the problem we have today? Christians are now “state of mind Communists” as feared and predicted years and years ago. How do I reason with a “state of mind” communist, who supposes that his political, moral and economic understanding comes right out of the Bible?

The Federal Income Tax Statutes, and the Supreme Court decisions supporting them, clearly state that wages and salaries are not “income”. Yet Christian communists in America, in what profess to be patriotic assemblies, have been conned into waiving that statutory provision and to “voluntarily” agreeing to pay the first part of their increase not to God’s Law but to Caesar, in direct violation of God’s Law set forth in Scripture. And they wonder why God stopped blessing America right after the Marxist Income Tax Statutes went into effect! Looking deeper still, we find that even the Marxist Income Tax Statutes made Constitutional by the 16th Amendment, applies only to those non-white citizens by privilege of the 14th Amendment. It also includes corporate officers, folks who live in Washington, D.C. and other Federal enclaves, military people and those who work in government jobs. But, people who exchange their time for wages, salaries, commissions, etc., are not required to file returns or pay federal taxes. Oh, your minister never told you these things? And your dad never knew them? Why are you giving the first portion of the wonderful blessings God gives you through increase of your land and labor of your hands and mind, to promote communism, totalitarian socialism and other wicked things at home and abroad? Shame on you! Repent of your ways.

I will tell you why you pay without a whimper! It is because you are scared to death of the wicked agents of the Internal Revenue and their well-publicized cruel activities and brutal enforcement procedures. Most of you lack the guts for such basic Christian service to your country, if the truth was really known. Some of my best friends and most generous supporters have confessed this fear to me privately and I have wept for their souls. You must understand, Scripture teaches that the fearful, right along with the unbelievers, murderers, whoremongers, sorcerers, idolaters and liars shall have their part in the lake which burns with fire and brimstone. Read Revelation 21:8 about those listed among the non-overcomers! Those who are afraid, are just as wicked in God’s Eyes, as some of the most terrible of anti-Christ people! Take your STRONG’S CONCORDANCE and do a word study on all the variations of the word fear and it will open your eyes of understanding. Oh, how I pray that some of my wonderful Team Members and other financial supporters will turn from their fearful ways and not be included among that wretched lot at the end of time.

Did you know that if you file income tax returns, you place your legal status under Admiralty Law, and waive your Common Law rights under the first Ten Amendments to the Constitution? The fearful, under an ironic twist to God’s Law, find themselves unprotected by the 1st Amendment and cannot lawfully claim the right to religious freedom or the right of free speech, etc. They cannot claim the right to keep and bear arms as set forth in the 2nd Amendment. Since so few Americans remain who have these rights, the laws on the gradual confiscation of any “semi-automatic weapon” are now being enacted, beginning with the so-called assault rifles, and hand guns that have an ammunition magazine or “clip”. Are you surprised? These laws have been on the books for 20 years awaiting this day and hour! I know that some do not believe me on this, but see for yourself. Go to your local library and ask the librarian to show you where the UNITED STATES CODE books are shelved. There are 25 of these in the set, reddish-brown in color. They are printed by the United States Government. Select Volume 9 and turn to page 554. Read public law 87-297 signed into law by John F. Kennedy in 1961. Every President since then has worked to gradually enact its provisions, knowing that most Americans would not approve. Read along through that public law to page 559, and you will see that it calls for our Armed Forces to be eliminated from NATIONAL CONTROL, which in turn wipes out our sovereignty as a nation. In the third state we shall see a “zero military” and before stage one closes, all citizen-owned guns will be banned. This issue of national disarmament is now being discussed with world leaders, and the ban on certain defensive weapons here at home is not new at all, but part of a treasonous scheme to render America as a nation, and our citizens as individuals, helpless against the Socialist-Communist conquest of the world.

Here is another problem: Are you sitting under a minister who is a state of mind communist, one of the fearful who still files income tax returns? Sure, he may be a nice guy. Sure, he may seem to be a kindly, loving man. But he is one of the fearful, classified by Godly John and Jesus Christ as being among the whoremongers and liars? Are you sending God’s tithe and your offerings to any “religious group” that is claiming “tax exemption” and thus under the jurisdiction of our communist democracy of the District of Columbia? If you read our materials long enough, you will see a thread of theme about the ministers and preaching in America that is causing most of our problems. I remember back in the Old Testament, God’s nation of Israel had some major problems under King Jeroboam. You might need to see how God dealt with His People in those days, as sort of a forecast of what is soon to pass in America. (I Kings 12, etc.) The bottom line then was that Jeroboam “made priests of the lowest of the people” (v.31). Christ, through St. John in Revelation 21:8, says that the lowest of people are the “fearful”. You cannot be Godly and fearful at the same time, and the Bible world study suggested previously should have established that fact firmly in your mind. Therefore, all fearful are also ungodly, if you can follow that logic. The very first Psalm, a fantastic collection of distilled wisdom, begins with this most important truth: “Blessed is the man that walketh not in the counsel of the ungodly--fearful...” How many of my wonderful friends and readers are still taking counsel of the fearful, men whom the Bible calls priests of the lowest of people, who it so often also appears, are state of mind communists?

END OF QUOTING--and so be it.

Now, Dharma, allow us to again present the executive orders which have now been brought into play--obviating even the need of Congressional agreement in order to become law against you-the-people.

Before we do so, however, I am going to ask you a few questions and let us see if you REALLY see and understand that which I give you and that which IS!

1. What is the name of the new Soviet Foreign Minister?

2. What is the first plank in the COMMUNIST MANIFESTO?

3. Who’s picture is on the $20 Federal Bank “note”?

4. What is an SS12? Who developed it? Where is it now?

5. What did you have for breakfast on Saturday last?

6. If you attend church, give me the doctrines according to denomination! Where did your minister get his “education” and did he get a “Christian Education” or “Christian Instructions”?

7. What do you REALLY know about this “Christian Community” within your own town? Funny thing about the one in Tehachapi, California--they offer to drive these Satanic speakers from out of the city--or worse; death!

WHAT DO YOU REALLY KNOW ABOUT ANYTHING? Tell me the top 10 stats from Sunday’s Superbowl! Welcome Home America! God have mercy on your children in the Middle East!

U.S. EXECUTIVE ORDERS NOW IN EFFECT (CHECK THEM ONE BY ONE AGAINST THE COMMUNIST MANIFESTO)

1. EXECUTIVE ORDER 10995 takes over all communications media.

2. EXECUTIVE ORDER 10997 takes over all electric power, petroleum, gas, fuel and minerals.

3. EXECUTIVE ORDER 10998 takes over all food resources and farms.

4. EXECUTIVE ORDER 10999 takes over all means of transportation, controls highways and seaports.

5. EXECUTIVE ORDER 11000 drafts all citizens into work forces under the governmental supervision.

6. EXECUTIVE ORDER 11001 takes over all health, welfare and educational functions.

7. EXECUTIVE ORDER 11002 empowers the Postmaster General to register all citizens nationwide.

8. EXECUTIVE ORDER 11003 takes over all airports and aircraft.

9. EXECUTIVE ORDER 11004 takes over housing and finance authorities and housing designated as “unsafe”. Establishes new locations for populations, relocates communities, builds new housing with public funds.

10. EXECUTIVE ORDER 11005 takes over all railroads, inland waterways, and public storage facilities.

11. EXECUTIVE ORDER 11051 designates responsibilities of the Office of Emergency Planning giving authorization to put the above orders into effect in times of increased international tension or economic or financial crisis.

Then comes the big one: Under EXECUTIVE ORDER 11490 all of the above orders are immediately activated.

John F. Kennedy, at Columbia University in 1963, said it perfectly: “The high office of the President has been used to foment a plot to destroy America’s freedom and before I leave office, I must inform the citizens of their plight.” Ten days later, John F. Kennedy was assassinated! THINK ABOUT IT AMERICA!!

Gyeorgos Ceres Hatonn

CHAPTER 14

10/14/90 HATONN

WE DIDN’T SAY “JEWS”

As we have gotten more attention in the current circumstance of Middle Eastern /U.S. /Arab/ Israeli involvement teetering on the brink of nuclear war, it is again time to define terms. I am Hatonn, to present truth in the Light of higher knowledge; no more and no less. I bend not to the objections of special interest groups who would deceive you and neither do I allow injustice towards groups who, in most instances, know not the facts regarding themselves.

ZIONISTS VS. “JEWISH RACES”

I experienced upon your placement as a “Jew” and I know of that which I project. I am NOT, herein, speaking of “Jews”; I speak herein of what is known as the Khazars‟ Thirteenth Tribe who would settle in the area of Palestine and Lebanon in the latter days--known as Israel.

It is time to repeat the “PROTOCOLS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ZIONIST MEN OF WISDOM”. I did not label these ones--THEY labeled themselves with this title. I simply give unto you the projection of those “protocols” that you might evaluate for self, the truth of it.

(I ask that the portion of “WHO ARE THE KHAZARS?” be affixed to the writing preface for identification.)

We are utilizing this information in Express format because of the use of the term “Zionists”. When we refer to the Zionists, the stones and rocks start being flung at our people and it is a part of the plan of disinformation; however, the stones strike and give pain to all human forms.

ISRAEL/PALESTINE--THIS

LISTEN to what is being given forth on this day as Israel denounces condemnation from the nations regarding brutality of 10/08/90. The Arab world feels the statements are not nearly strong enough--I will write a scenario from 1982, in the current Journal, wherein you can see that all that has changed is a name here and there. Precious ones, you have placed “war” in your cycles; why do you think it would simply go away without attention?

The building of the Zionist Temple on Temple Mount in Jerusalem is also a portion of the prophecies and the Cornerstones were just laid forth this week. It was covered up in the Establishment media but truth is “slipping out”--even from the Israelis.

Just today an ambassador from Israel stated that, “It was a ‘fringe element’ of ISRAELI’S, called ”ZIONISTS‟ who went to the Holy place in efforts to lay the cornerstones for the new temple‟ but most ”JEWS‟ were simply ”at the wall‟ to honor the Jewish Holy day.” I know not how you get more definitive than that! The Arab world peoples have now been barred from their most Holy placement--therefore, what think you is going on behind those barricades? The Holy Mosque is atop what the Jews call “Temple Mount” and belongs to the Palestinians. YOU BE THE JUDGE!

The “JEWS” of today are more and more controlled--in ignorance of the fact--by the Zionists. THE JEWS WILL BE THE ONES TO SUFFER THE GREATEST PAIN AT THE HANDS OF THESE UNGODLY MEN--IT IS ALREADY SO AND HAS BEEN FOR CENTURIES. ONLY NOW IS IT SO BLATANTLY OBVIOUS AS YOU MOVE INTO THE FINAL PROJECTIONS OF THE PROPHECIES. SO BE IT. WE HEREIN REPRINT THE “PROTOCOLS”; PLEASE READ CAREFULLY WITHOUT CASTING BLAME AT THE PRINTERS FOR THEY DID NOT WRITE OF THEM! THEY WERE WRITTEN BY THE LEADERS OF THE ZIONIST NATION OF PEOPLE BIRTHED FROM THE KHAZARS WHO ASSUMED (TOOK) THE TITLE OF “JEWS”--THEY ARE NOT OF THE TRIBES OF “JEWISH ISRAEL”. THEY “FIRST” STOLE THE JEWISH BIRTHRIGHT AND THEN THEIR LANDS AND PROPERTY--THEIR INTENT IS TO OWN AND RULE THE ENTIRE OF THE WORLD. May you read with an open and discerning mind that which follows. Look into the eyes of the “Israeli ”LEADERS‟” who speak on your vidiot box this day and you shall be given to SEE the truth of these words!

5/5/90 HATONN

Proverbs 29:18 says:

WHERE THERE IS NO VISION, THE PEOPLE PERISH.

Hatonn present in the Light of Radiance. May we share a bit more vision so that the way becomes more lighted. Thank you.

BECAUSE IT’S NOT HOW YOU THINK IT IS!

Why do I implore you to look at the ugly instead of as the New Age Movement would have you look? Because they pronounce falseness unto you and if the vision is incorrect or there is no vision in truth, man shall perish. No more and no less. You must awaken unto the truth of your existence and know the players in the game of control and you must do so before it becomes too late to longer matter.

KHAZARS

Prior to unfolding more of the story as pertains to Israel and the Zionists, you must realize that I am speaking not of the beloved Jewish “people” of your world, any more than I would have you believe all Catholic priests and nuns practice (or even know of) the activities within the walls of a cloistered convent. For instance, we have one with us who served as a Catholic priest for more than thirty years with a parish of some 10-15,000 parishioners. He was only in a cloistered convent on one occasion and that was for a white veil ceremony. Of course you ones know not these things--that is precisely WHY I am telling you these tales of unpleasant and seemingly paranoic circumstances.

If you do not know what it is you need to correct, how can you be in the correcting of it?

You cannot begin to understand world circumstance in any segment of geographical location without some knowledge about the past seven decades of struggle for control of the Kremlin. But that struggle, in turn, is a portion of an even bigger historical picture. You are still witnessing in full flower the ongoing and climaxing of a war of more than a millennium between the two most bitter enemies on earth. It is the war between Russia and the Khazars. And, dear ones, how many of you have even the vaguest notion of who or what are Khazars?

The kingdom of the Khazars vanished from the map of the world many centuries ago, but their impact is greater this day than in any prior time segment. Today most people have never even heard of them or their lands, so you need not bow your head in embarrassment. If you do not continue and then follow up with a bit of research to prove my words unto self--then bow your head in embarrassment before God who would delight in seeing you of His creations come into Truth.

In its day the Khazar Kingdom was a very major power indeed, holding sway over a large empire of subjugated peoples. It had to be reckoned with by the two neighboring superpowers of that day. To the south and west of Khazaria, the Byzantine Empire was in full flower with its Eastern Orthodox Christian civilization. To the southeast, the Khazar Kingdom bordered on the expanding Moslem Empire of the Arab Caliphs. The Khazars influenced the histories of both of these other empires but, far more importantly, the Khazar Kingdom occupied what was later to become a southern portion of Russia between the Black and Caspian Seas. As a result, the historical destinies of the Russians and the Khazars became intertwined in ways which have persisted down to the present day.

I suggest that if you have trouble with this information and also in locating information regarding these people, you should get a book by a British writer/historian about the Khazars. Arthur Koestler, THE 13TH TRIBE -- THE KHAZAR EMPIRE AND ITS HERITAGE. No, Dharma, do not get it for I shall give you all you need know about it. But for others, let me see--yes, Random House, New York should be a source.

The Khazars were derived from a mixture of Finns, Turks and Mongols (this latter is important when considering the projections of one Nostradamus, as to the anti-Christ). As early as the third century AD, they were identifiable in constant warfare in the areas of Persia and Armenia. Later, in the 5th century, the Khazars were among the devastating hordes of Attila, the Hun. Around 550 AD, the nomadic Khazars began settling themselves in the area around the northern Caucasus between the Black and Caspian Seas. The Khazar capital of Itil was established at the mouth of the Volga River, where it emptied into the Caspian, in order to control the river traffic. The Khazars then extracted a toll of 10% on any and all cargo which passed Itil on the River. Ah yes, taxways all the way to the 5th century. Anyone who refused to pay the tax (toll) was immediately attacked and slaughtered--not greatly different from today.

With their kingdom firmly established in the Caucasus, the Khazars gradually began to create an empire of subjugated peoples. Other tribes, who were comparatively peaceful, were promptly attacked and conquered. They then became attached as portions of the Khazar Empire, required to pay tribute continually to the Khazar Kingdom and to the Khazar coffers.

This is not different in concept for all conquered peoples have had to give tribute to the conquering Empire, but I assure you, not in the manner of the Khazars. The so-called great empires of the world always gave something in return for the tribute they extracted. Rome, for example, made citizens of those they conquered, and in return for the taxes they levied, they brought civilization, order and protection against attack from would-be invaders.

Not so in the Khazar Empire. The peoples who were subject to the Khazars received only one thing in return for their payments of tribute, and that was only one thin and shaky promise that the Khazars would refrain from further attacks and pillage--so long as the tributes were paid. The subjects of the Khazar Empire, therefore, were simply nothing more than victims of a giant mafia type protection racket. The Khazar overlords were therefore resented universally and bitterly throughout their domain, but they were also feared because of the merciless way in which they dealt with anyone who stood up to them. And so the Khazar Empire expanded until it occupied large areas of what is now Russia and south-eastern Europe. By the eighth century, the Khazar Empire extended northward to Kiev and westward to include the Magyars, the ancestors of modern Hungary.

Then a stunning event took place in the mid-700’s AD. The Khazars had been under continual pressure from their Byzantine and Moslem neighbors to adopt either Christianity or Islam; but the Khazar ruler, called the Khakan, had heard of a third religion called Judaism. Apparently for political reasons of independence, the Khakan announced that the Khazars were adopting Judaism as their authorized religion.

Overnight an entirely new group of people, the warlike Khazars, suddenly proclaimed themselves to be Jews--adoptive Jews--and formed their tribe straight away. The Khazar Kingdom began to be described as the “Kingdom of the Jews” by historians of the day. Succeeding Khazar rulers took Jewish names, and during the late ninth century the Khazar Kingdom became a haven for Jews from other lands.

Meanwhile, the brutal Khazar domination over other peoples continued quite unchanged. But then a new factor appeared on the scene. During the 8th century they came coursing down the great rivers, the Dnieper, the Don, the Volga. They were the eastern branch of the Vikings--ouch! They were known as the Varangians, or as the Rus. Like other Vikings, the Rus were bold adventurers and fierce fighters but, when they tangled with the Khazars, the Rus often ended up paying tribute like everyone else. When two titans meet, it is always interesting for the probabilities change moment by moment. Now, isn’t all this history fascinating? You started your journey of hate and confrontation and enslavement so far back it, too, is forgotten.

About 862 a Rus leader name Rurik founded the city of Novgorod, and the Russian Nation was born. The Rus Vikings settled among the Slavonic tribes under Khazar domination, and the struggle between Vikings and Khazars changed in character. It then became a struggle by the emerging nation of Russia for independence from Khazar oppression.

Over a century after the founding of Russia’s first city, another momentous event took place. Russia’s leader, Price Vladimir of Kiev, accepted baptism as a Christian in the year 989 and a big to-do was made of it, of course. He then actively promoted Christianity in Russia, and his memory is revered by Russians today as “Saint Vladimir”, and so, over a thousand years ago, Russia’s tradition as a Christian nation began. How many of you know this? How many of you children realize that Russia is a Christian nation? You all teach and proffer that the Russians are atheistic--those are the Soviets, my friends, who are preaching the no-God theories.

Vladimir’s conversion also brought Russia into alliance with Byzantium. The Byzantine rulers had always feared the Khazars, and the Russians were still struggling to free themselves. And so, in the year 1016, combined Russian and Byzantine forces attacked the Khazar Kingdom. The Khazar Empire was shattered, and the kingdom of the Khazars itself fell into decline. Eventually most of the Khazar Jews migrated to other areas. Many of them wound up in eastern Europe, where they mingled and intermarried with other Jews. Like the Semitic Jews some 1000 years earlier, the Khazar Jews became dispersed. The kingdom of the Khazars was no more.

As they moved and lived among the Jewish people, the Khazar Jews passed on a distinct heritage in a militant form--known as ZIONISM! You thought I wasn’t going to get there, didn’t you? This was passed on from generation to generation and became more and more militant and reached out in every direction in its efforts to consume and control. This particular group all but consumed Germany in the early third of this century of your counting. In the view of Khazar Jews, the land occupied by ancient Israel is to be retaken -- not by miracle but by armed force. This is what is meant by “Zionism” today, and this is the force that created the nation which today calls itself Israel.

The other major ingredient of the Khazar Jew heritage is total hatred for Christianity, and for the Russian people as the champions of the Christian faith. Christianity is viewed as the force which caused the ancient so-called Kingdom of the Jews, the Khazar Kingdom, to collapse. Having once dominated much of what is present-day Russia, the Khazar Jews still want to reestablish that domination -- and for a millennium they have been trying continually to do just that.

In 1917 the Khazar Jews passed a major milestone toward the creation of their own state in Palestine. That same year they also created the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia--financed by some very familiar foundations out of America. Be patient and you shall begin to see the linkage of the secret societies and moneychangers. There, of course, followed a Christian Holocaust, the likes of which the world has never seen. The Khazar Jews were once again in control of Russia after more than 900 years, and they set about the task of destroying Christianity by destroying Christians -- over 100,000,000 of them (almost makes the projections from Germany look feeble, does it not?). Worse, and in addition, Godly Jews everywhere take note; at the same time over 20,000,000 religious Jews also died at the hands of their own proclaimed people, the Khazar Jews.

This is what, my friends, the Russian Christians were up against in their half century plus struggle to overthrow the atheistic Bolsheviks, but they finally succeeded in their overthrow program, and now the 1000-year-old war between the Russian Christians and Khazar Zionist Jews is reaching a climax. The majority of those displaced Bolsheviks relocated immediately to America. At stake is not only the future of Russia, and of Christianity, albeit it totally corrupted in any event, but also of the Jewish people as a whole--and the Jewish people as a whole haven’t the vaguest idea that this is happening to them. They follow along thinking that someday soon they will have their nation back--oh no, you Godly Jews of the tribes of Abraham will be sacrificed as never seen before upon your placement. It will be the Jews who will pay the ultimate price at the hands of the Zionists, and they will kill you while you stand in protection of them.

There was a leader of the Jewish people that we would give tribute now; Rabbi Joel Teitelbaum, who died in New York in 1979. Interestingly enough--he died in the morning, and was buried the same afternoon. Yet, over 100,000 Jewish men arrived in time for the funeral. It is hard to imagine how many more would have come if time had been longer. The services were pushed ahead to prevent the crowds and the investigation into the cause of death.

A tribute was later given in the New York Times and clearly it spoke for myriads of Jewish people. Among the words within the tribute was a phrase I would share; “He was the undisputed leader of all Jews everywhere who had not been infected by Zionism”; and also, quote, “With a courage all too rare in our time, he called the Zionist state a work of Satan, a sacrilege, and a blasphemy.” The shedding of blood for the sake of the Zionist state was abhorrent to him. He was also removed for he was a troublemaker and troublemakers and bringers of truth are “taken out”. Hence my scribe’s nervous indigestion. Well, God wants no more martyrs--the time for the impact of martyrs is finished--God wants alert, thinking and “living” people.

That tribute, however, was given and the words were spoken by Orthodox Jews mourning for their fallen leader. And the new Christian rulers of Russia would agree, for they, too, regard the Zionist state of Israel as a counterfeit, a cruel and dangerous hoax for Christian and Jew alike. The Khazar state, called the “Kingdom of the Jews” over a thousand years ago, was a total, deadly parasite, living on the tribute from conquered peoples. Likewise today, Israel depends for its survival on a never-ending flow of support from outside. Guess where almost all of it comes from! Left unchecked, the Russians believe that the Khazar Jews will destroy Christianity by means of Zionism, and Russia through Bolshevism; so Russia’s Christian rulers are on the offensive against their enemies of over a thousand years--the Zionist Khazars.

Americans, who call yourselves Christians, have not cared enough to open your eyes to effort at saving your own country, or to defend your faith--you just walk out on it rather than repair and come back into the Christness. So now your land has become the battleground of the Christian Russians and their deadly enemies -- the Bolsheviks and the Zionists. Like it or not, dear ones, you are caught in a total all holds open war. This, Oberli, is why the war this time will be in your Hemisphere. America is the new crown jewel in the global Zion.

KHAZARS IN COLOMBIA?

Does it not make sense why the cosmospheres are sitting above Panama and why Israeli arms have ended up in Colombia? Oh dear people of the lies--please hear our call before it is too late to make impact. If you do not, ”tis important that you do know WHY it has come upon you!

No, dear ones, I do not jest--Dharma, please copy the article from yesterday’s paper.

ISRAELI ARMS SHIPMENT ENDS UP IN COLOMBIA: New York Times. (May 5, 1990).

“A supply of Uzi machine guns and other weapons, approved by the Israeli government last year for shipment to the eastern Caribbean island of Antigua, wound up instead in the hands of one of Colombia’s most notorious drug traffickers. (Hatonn: remember the Israeli Mossad trains those cartel fighters.)

“The Colombian authorities discovered the Israeli-made weapons and hundreds of thousands of rounds of ammunition when they searched the ranch of Jose Rodriguez Gacha three months ago, after he was ambushed and killed by Colombian police.

“The mystery of how they made their way there has set off a number of investigations, roiled the ruling family of Antigua and posed a sensitive diplomatic problem for Washington and Jerusalem, U.S. officials say.

“Israel has said only that it approved the arms for sale to the Antiguan government.

“Antiguan officials say they neither ordered nor received the arms.

“Evidence recently uncovered by a government investigation there traced the shipment to two former Israeli army officers, U.S. and Antiguan officials say.

“One of the two, officials say, is wanted in Colombia on charges that he imported arms illegally and trained narcotics traffickers in armed tactics; the other is being sought by the United States because his produce company in Antigua defaulted on $1.3 million in loans from the United States.”

And so the time-bomb ticks!

Dharma, allow us a break please because I desire that the “PROTOCOLS OF THE MEETINGS OF THE ZIONIST MEN OF WISDOM” and the comparative U.S. of A. “SECRET NEW CONSTITUTION SUMMARY” be in a separate segment.

I hear your frustration, chela, as to how we can get all this timely information integrated and out to the people. Yes it would appear that everything needs to be in a daily Express. Perhaps we’ll have to move to a Book of the Month Club. We will do that which we can and retain your sanity, dear one. You ask how some other information was given to “mysterious” ones prior to now--from me! From Jesus Sananda! and from God!--specifically and exactly as you receive it--directly as you write it, you are not alone! It all checks out in earth material so rest easy and gently, dear ones. It would be good to note herein, however, that ones prior had need of ego to utilize their own identities and it was costly indeed. In the beginning of our contacts and work it seems innocuous indeed and choices are not always heard clearly as to outcome. So be it. All the information checks out in very physical manifestation and therefore, ones know the truth of the writings and then it moves beyond dangerous in scope. Your work is indeed important.

I hold you most closely in my shield in that you might not walk in constant terror--but do not lose thy caution unto carelessness for ye, too, are given into free-will choices. Be ever in the “remembering” and we will manage. I again caution all of you who walk in this space--to take care and do not become careless in this placement for the comradery often overshines the degree of caution necessary. And keep off that telephone! This is but a reminder to pay attention for Dharma lives in two dimensions and is at total risk. Her work is no more important than another’s but it must come first in sequence so she is at first and prior risk. So be it; always, a word to the wise should be sufficient. We must effort to remove some of the pressures of life from her for she is emotionally failing--we desire no robots. Let us please work diligently at the projects for this dwelling is again at immediately impending legal risk and the distraction is too costly to our work. To have to even temporarily relocate this scribe is unthinkable. Salu.

I stand aside while you close out this portion.

Hatonn to clear, please.

THE PROTOCOLS OF THE MEETINGS OF

THE ZIONIST MEN OF WISDOM

The following is taken from the “Protocols of the Meetings of the Zionist Men of Wisdom”, from a book published in 1920 by Small, Maynard and Co., using the Protocols from Nilus which first appeared around 1884.

PROTOCOL NO. I

Let us put aside phraseology and discuss the inner meaning of every thought; by comparison and deductions let us illuminate the situation. In this way I will describe our system both from our own point of view and from that of the Goys (Gentiles).

It must be remembered that people with base instincts are more numerous than those with noble ones; therefore, THE BEST RESULTS IN GOVERNING ARE ACHIEVED THROUGH VIOLENCE AND INTIMIDATION AND NOT THROUGH ACADEMIC DIS-CUSSION.

In the early stages of social life they submitted to brute and blind force; afterwards -- to the Law, which is the same force but disguised. I deduce from this that according to the laws of nature, RIGHT LIES IN MIGHT.

POLITICAL FREEDOM IS NOT A FACT BUT AN IDEA. ONE MUST KNOW HOW TO EMPLOY THIS IDEA. . .

In our day the power of gold has replaced liberal rulers. There was a time when faith ruled. THE IDEA OF FREEDOM CANNOT BE REALIZED BECAUSE NO ONE KNOWS HOW TO MAKE REASONABLE USE OF IT.

The DESPOTISM OF CAPITAL, which is entirely in our hands, holds out to it a straw which THE STATE MUST GRASP, although against its will, or otherwise fall into the abyss.

POLITICS HAVE NOTHING IN COMMON WITH MORALS. . .

He who desires to rule must resort to cunning and hypocrisy. The great popular qualities -- honesty and frankness -- become vices in politics. . . These qualities must be the attributes of Goy countries; but we by no means should be guided by them.

Our right lies in might. The word “RIGHT” IS AN ABSTRACT IDEA, unsusceptible of proof. This word means nothing more than: Give me what I desire so that I may have evidence that I am stronger than you.

With the present instability of all authority our power will be more unassailable than any other, BECAUSE IT WILL BE INVISIBLE UNTIL IT IS SO WELL ROOTED THAT NO CUNNING CAN UNDER-MINE IT.

THE END JUSTIFIES THE MEANS. In laying our plans we must turn our attention not so much to the good and moral as to the necessary and useful. Before us lies a plan in which a strategic line is shown, from which we must not deviate on pain of risking the collapse of many centuries of work.

ONLY A PERSON PREPARED FROM CHILDHOOD to autocracy can understand the words which are formed by political letters.

Only an autocrat can outline great and clear plans which allocate in an orderly manner all the parts of the mechanism of the government machinery.

Look at those beasts, steeped in alcohol, stupefied by wine, the unlimited use of which is granted by liberty.

Surely you cannot allow our own people to come to this. The people of the GOYS ARE STUPEFIED BY SPIRITUOUS LIQUORS: THEIR YOUTH IS DRIVEN INSANE through excessive study of the classics, and vice to which they have been instigated by our agents -- tutors, valets, governesses -- in rich houses, by clerks, and so forth, and by our women in the pleasure places of the Goys.

Our motto is POWER AND HYPOCRISY. Only power can conquer in politics. . VIOLENCE MUST BE THE PRINCIPLE; HYPOCRISY AND CUNNING THE RULE of those governments which do not wish to lay down their crowns at the feet of the agents of some new power. THIS EVIL IS THE SOLE MEANS OF ATTAINING THE GOAL OF GOOD. For this reason WE MUST NOT HESITATE AT BRIBERY, FRAUD, AND TREASON when these can help us to reach our end. In politics it is necessary to SEIZE THE PROPERTY OF OTHERS WITHOUT HESITATION if in so doing we attain submission and power.

We must follow a program of violence and hypocrisy, not only for the sake of profit, but also as a duty and for the sake of victory.

Even in olden times we shouted among the people the words “Liberty, Equality, and Fraternity.” These words have been repeated so many times since by unconscious parrots, which, flocking from all sides to the bait, have ruined the prosperity of the world and true individual freedom. . .

On the ruins of natural and hereditary aristocracy we built an aristrocracy of our intellectual class -- THE MONEY ARISTOCRACY. We have established this new aristocracy on the qualification of wealth, which is dependent upon us, and also upon science, which is promoted by our wise men.

. . we always played upon the most sensitive chords of the human mind, namely, GREED, AND THE INSATIABLE SELFISH DESIRES OF MAN.

The fact that the representatives of the nation can be deposed, delivers them into our power and practically places their appointment in our hands.

PROTOCOL NO. II

It is necessary for us that wars, whenever possible, should bring no territorial advantages; this will SHIFT WAR TO AN ECONOMIC BASIS and force nations to realize the strength of our predominance; such a situation will put both sides at the mercy of our million-eyed international agency, which will be unhampered by any frontiers. THEN OUR INTERNATIONAL RIGHTS WILL DO AWAY WITH NATIONAL RIGHTS.

The Administrators chosen by us from among the people in accordance with their capacity for servility will not be experienced in the art of government, and consequently THEY WILL EASILY BECOME PAWNS IN OUR GAME, in the hands of our scientists and wise counselors, specialists trained from early childhood for governing the world. . . . The Goys are not guided by the practice of impartial historical observation. . . Therefore, we need give them no consideration. Until the time comes LET THEM AMUSE THEMSELVES, OR LIVE IN THE HOPE OF NEW AMUSEMENTS OR IN THE MEMORIES OF THOSE PAST. . . . Intelligent Goys will boast of their knowledge, and verifying it logically, they will put into practice all scientific information compiled by our agents for the purpose of educating their minds in the direction which we require.

Do not think that our assertions are without foundation: the successes of Darwinism, Marxism and Nietzscheism were engineered by us. The demoralizing effects of these doctrines upon the minds of the Goys should be already obvious to us.

There is one great force in the hands of modern states which arouses thought movements among the people. That is THE PRESS. . . but governments were unable to profit by this power and IT HAS FALLEN INTO OUR HANDS. Through it we have attained influence, while remaining in the background. Thanks to the press, WE HAVE GATHERED GOLD IN OUR HANDS, ALTHOUGH WE HAD TO TAKE IT FROM RIVERS OF BLOOD AND TEARS.

But it cost us the sacrifice of many of our own people. EVERY SACRIFICE ON OUR PART IS WORTH A THOUSAND GOYS BEFORE GOD.

PROTOCOL NO. III

Today I can tell you that our goal is close at hand. Only a small distance remains, AND THE CYCLE OF THE SYMBOLIC SERPENT -- THE SYMBOL OF OUR PEOPLE -- WILL BE COMPLETE. When this circle is completed, then all the European states will be closed in it as in strong claws.

To induce all lovers of authority to abuse their power, we have PLACED ALL THE FORCES IN OPPOSITION TO EACH OTHER. . . . . WE HAVE ARMED ALL THE PARTIES; . . . WE HAVE OPENED THE ARENAS IN DIFFERENT STATES, WHERE REVOLTS ARE NOW OCCURRING, AND DISORDERS AND BANK-RUPTCY WILL SHORTLY APPEAR EVERYWHERE.

People are shackled by poverty to heavy labor more surely than they were by slavery and serfdom. They could liberate themselves from those in one way or another, whereas they cannot free themselves from misery. We have included in constitutions rights, which for the people are fictitious and are not actual rights. All the so-called “rights of the people” can exist only in the abstract and can never be realized in practice. What difference does it make to the toiling proletarian, bent double by heavy toil, oppressed by his fate, that the babblers receive the right to talk, journalists the right to mix nonsense with reason in their writings, if the proletariat has no other gain from the constitution than the miserable crumbs which we throw from our table in return for his vote to elect our agents. REPUBLICAN RIGHTS ARE BITTER IRONY TO THE POOR MAN, FOR THE NECESSITY OF ALMOST DAILY LABOR PREVENTS HIM FROM USING THEM. . .

We will present ourselves in the guise of SAVIORS OF THE WORKERS from this oppression. . . The aristocracy which benefited by the labor of the people by right have interest that the workers should be well fed, healthy, and strong.

We, on the contrary, are concerned in the opposite -- in the degeneration of the Goys. Our power lies in the CHRONIC MALNUTRITION AND IN THE WEAKNESS OF THE WORKER, BECAUSE THROUGH THIS HE FALLS UNDER OUR POWER AND IS UNABLE TO FIND EITHER STRENGTH OR ENERGY TO COMBAT IT.

When the time comes for our universal ruler to be crowned, the same hands will sweep away everything which may be an obstacle in our way.

The Goys are NO LONGER ACCUSTOMED TO THINKING without our scientific advice. Consequently, they do not see the imperative need of upholding that which we will sustain by all means, when our kingdom is established, namely, the teaching in the schools of the only true science, the first of all sciences -- the science of the construction of human life, of social existence, which requires the division of labor and, consequently, the separation of people into classes and castes. It is necessary that all should know that equality cannot exist, owing to the different nature of various kinds of work; that there cannot be (equal responsibility before the law.)

. . .occupation and labor must be differentiated so as not to cause human suffering by the discrepancy between education and work. . .the people, in their ignorance, blindly believing the printed word, and owing to the misconceptions which have been fostered by us, feel a hatred towards all classes whom they consider superior to themselves since they do not understand the importance of each caste.

This hatred will be still more ACCENTUATED BY THE ECONOMIC CRISIS, which will stop financial transactions and all industrial life. Having organized a general economic crisis by all possible underhand means, and with the help of gold which is all in our hands, we will throw great crowds of workmen into the street, simultaneously, in all countries in Europe. These crowds will gladly shed the blood of those of whom they, in the simplicity of their ignorance, have been jealous since childhood and whose property they will then be able to loot.

THEY WILL NOT HARM OUR PEOPLE BECAUSE WE WILL KNOW OF THE TIME OF THE ATTACK AND WE WILL TAKE MEASURES TO PROTECT THEM.

Remember the French Revolution . . . the secrets of its preparation are well known to us, for it was the work of our hands.

Since then we have carried the masses from one disappointment to another, so that they will renounce even us in favor of a DESPOT SOVEREIGN OF ZIONIST BLOOD, WHOM WE ARE PREPARING FOR THE WORLD.

At present, as an international force, WE ARE INVULNERABLE. . .

Of course, they are not told that this unification will be achieved only under our rule. Thus, the people condemn the just and acquit the unjust, MORE AND MORE CONVINCED THAT THEY CAN DO WHAT THEY PLEASE. Owing to this, the people destroy all stability and create disorder on every occasion.

The word “Liberty” brings all societies into conflict with all authority, be it that of God or Nature. This is why, at the moment of our enthronement, WE SHALL STRIKE THIS WORD FROM THE DICTIONARY. . .

PROTOCOL NO. IV

WHO AND WHAT CAN OVERTHROW AN UNSEEN POWER? For such is the character of our power. External Masonry acts as a screen for it and its aims, but the plan of action of this power, and its very headquarters, will always remain unknown to the people.

It is for this reason that we must UNDERMINE FAITH, tearing from the minds of the Goys the very principal of God and Soul, and SUBSTITUTING MATHEMATICAL FORMULAS AND MATERIAL NEEDS.

In order that the minds of the Goys may HAVE NO TIME TO THINK AND NOTICE THINGS, it is necessary to divert them in the direction of industry and commerce. Thus all nations will seek their own profit, and while engaged in the struggle, THEY WILL NOT NOTICE THEIR COMMON ENEMY.

The intense struggle for supremacy, the shocks to economic life, will create, moreover have already created, disappointed disgust for high politics and religion. Their only guide will be calculation, i.e. gold, for which they will have a real cult because of the material delights which it can supply. It will be at that stage that the lower classes of the Goys, not for the sake of doing good, nor even for the sake of wealth, but solely BECAUSE OF THEIR HATRED TOWARDS THE PRIVILEGED, WILL FOLLOW US AGAINST OUR COMPETITORS FOR POWER, THE INTELLIGENT GOYS.

PROTOCOL NO. V

What form of government can be given to societies in which bribery has penetrated everywhere, where riches are obtained only by clever trick and semi-fraudulent means, where corruption reigns, where morality is sustained by punitive measures and where cosmopolitan convictions have eliminated patriotic feelings and religion? WHAT FORM OF GOVERNMENT CAN BE GIVEN TO SUCH SOCIETIES OTHER THAN A DESPOTISM SUCH AS I SHALL DESCRIBE?

We will mechanically regulate all the functions of political life of our subjects BY NEW LAWS. These laws will gradually ELIMINATE ALL THE CONCESSIONS AND LIBERTIES PERMITTED BY THE GOYS. Our kingdom will be crowned by such a majestic despotism that it will be able, at all times and in all places, to crush both antagonistic and discontented Goys.

At the time when people considered rulers as an incarnation of the will of God, they subjected themselves without murmur to the autocracy of the sovereigns . . . when we deprived them of their belief in God, then authority was thrown into the street, all, is it not the same to the world who will be its master -- whether it be the head of Catholicism or our despot of Zionist blood? To us, however, the Chosen People, it is by no means a matter of indifference. TEMPORARILY, A WORLD COALITION OF THE GOYS WOULD BE ABLE TO HOLD US IN CHECK, BUT WE ARE INSURED AGAINST THIS BY ROOTS OF DISSENSION SO DEEP AMONG THEM THAT THEY CANNOT NOW BE EXTRACTED. We have set at variance the personal and national interests of the Goys; we have incited religious and race hatred, nurtured by us in their hearts for twenty centuries. Owing to all this, no state will obtain the help it asks for from any side because each of them shall think that a coalition against us will be disadvantageous to it. We are too powerful -- we must be taken into consideration. No country can reach even an insignificant private understanding without our being a secret party to it.

THE PROPHETS HAVE TOLD US THAT WE WERE CHOSEN BY GOD HIMSELF TO REIGN OVER THE WORLD. God endowed us with genius to enable us to cope with the problem. Were there a genius in the opposing camp, he would struggle against us, but a newcomer is not equal to an old inhabitant. The struggle between us would be of such a merciless nature as the world has never seen before; moreover their genius would be too late.

All the wheels of government mechanism move by the action of the motor which is in our hands, and THAT MOTOR IS GOLD.

The most important problem of our government is to weaken the popular mind by criticism; to disaccustom it to thought, which creates opposition; TO DEFLECT THE POWER OF THOUGHT into mere empty eloquence.

At all times both peoples and individuals have mistaken words for deeds. . .We will appropriate to ourselves. . . all shades of opinion, and we will provide our orators with the same aspect, and they will talk so much that they will EXHAUST THE PEOPLE by their speeches and cause them to turn away from orators in disgust.

To control public opinion it is necessary to perplex it by the expression of numerous contradictory opinions UNTIL THE GOYS GET LOST IN THE LABRYINTH, AND COME TO UNDERSTAND THAT IT IS BEST TO HAVE NO OPINION ON POLITICAL QUESTIONS.

Such questions are not intended to be understood by the people, since only he who rules knows them. This is the first secret.

The second secret necessary for the success of governing consists in so multiplying popular failings, habits, passions, and conventional laws that no one will be able to disentangle himself in the chaos, and consequently, PEOPLE WILL CEASE TO UNDERSTAND EACH OTHER. This measure would help us to sow dissension within all parties, TO DISINTEGRATE ALL THOSE COLLECTIVE FORCES WHICH STILL DO NOT WISH TO SUBJUGATE THEMSELVES TO US; TO DISCOURAGE ALL INDIVIDUAL INITIA-TIVE WHICH MIGHT IN ANY DEGREE HAMPER OUR WORK.

THERE IS NOTHING MORE DANGEROUS THAN INDIVIDUAL INITIATIVE. IF IT HAS A TOUCH OF GENIUS IT CAN ACCOMPLISH MORE THAN A MILLION PEOPLE AMONG WHOM WE HAVE SOWN DISSENSIONS. We must direct the education of the Goy societies so that their arms will drop hopelessly when they face every task where initiative is required.

We will so tire the Goys by all this that we will force them to offer us an international power, which by its position will enable us conveniently to absorb, without destroying, all governmental forces of the world and thus to form a MONSTER WHICH WILL BE CALLED THE SUPER-GOVERNMENTAL ADMINISTRATION. Its hands will be stretched out like pincers in every direction so that this colossal organization cannot fail to conquer all the peoples.

PROTOCOL NO. VI

We will soon begin to ESTABLISH GREAT MONOPOLIES -- reservoirs of huge wealth, upon which even the large fortunes of the Goys will depend to such an extent that they will be drowned, together with the governmental credits, on the day following the political catastrophe.

The aristocracy of the Goys as a political force is dead. We do not need to take it into consideration; BUT AS LANDOWNERS THEY ARE HARMFUL TO US BECAUSE THEY CAN BE INDEPENDENT IN THEIR RESOURCES OF LIFE. FOR THIS REASON WE MUST DEPRIVE THEM OF THEIR LAND AT ANY COST.

It is necessary that industry should suck out of the land both labor and capital and through speculation deliver into our hands all the money of the world, thus throwing all the Goys into the ranks of the proletarians. THEN THE GOYS WILL BOW BEFORE US IN ORDER TO OBTAIN THE MERE RIGHT OF EXISTENCE.

To destroy Goy industry we will create among the Goys, as an aid to speculation, the STRONG DEMAND FOR BOUNDLESS LUXURY which we have already developed.

Let us raise wages, which, however, will be of no benefit to the workers, for we will simultaneously cause the rise in prices of first necessity under the pretext that this is due to the decadence of agriculture, and of the cattle industry.

We will also artfully and deeply undermine the sources of production BY TEACHING THE WORKMEN ANARCHY AND THE USE OF ALCOHOL, AT THE SAME TIME TAKING MEASURES TO EXPEL ALL THE INTELLIGENT GOYS FROM THE LAND.

That the true situation SHOULD NOT BE NOTICED BY THE GOYS UNTIL THE PROPER TIME, we will mask it by a pretended desire to help the working classes, and great economic principles, an active propaganda of which principles is being carried on through the dissemination of our economic theories.

PROTOCOL NO. VII

THE INTENSIFICATION OF ARMAMENT AND THE INCREASE OF THE POLICE FORCE ARE ESSENTIAL TO THE REALIZATION OF THE ABOVE-MENTIONED PLANS. It is necessary that there should be, besides ourselves, in all countries ONLY THE MASS OF THE PROLETARIAT, A FEW MILLIONAIRES DEVOTED TO US, POLICEMEN, AND SOLDIERS.

WE MUST CREATE UNREST, DISSENSIONS, AND HATRED throughout Europe and through European affiliations, also on other continents. . . .they will realize that we have the power to create disorder or to restore order whenever we wish. . . .we will entangle by intrigues all the threads stretched by us into all the governmental bodies by means of politics, economic treaties, or financial obligations. . . . In this way the peoples and the governments of the Goys, taught by us TO REGARD ONLY THE SURFACE OF THAT WHICH WE SHOW THEM, will look upon us as benefactors and saviors of mankind.

We must be able to OVERCOME ALL OPPOSITION BY PROVOKING A WAR by the neighbors of that country which dares to oppose us. Should, however, those neighbors, in their turn, decide to unite against us we must RESPOND BY A WORLD WAR.

In short, to sum up our system of shackling the Goy governments of Europe, WE WILL SHOW OUR POWER TO ONE OF THEM BY ASSASSINATION AND TERRORISM, AND WOULD THERE BE A POSSIBILITY OF ALL OF THEM RISING AGAINST US, WE WILL ANSWER THEM WITH AMERICAN, CHINESE OR JAPANESE GUNS.

PROTOCOL NO. VIII

Our government must be surrounded . . . with publicists, experienced lawyers, administrators, diplomats and, finally, people educated along special lines in our special advanced schools.

These people will be familiar with the reverse side of human nature, with all its sensitive chords, upon which they must know how to play. These chords are the STRUCTURE OF THE INTELLECTS OF THE GOYS, THEIR TENDENCIES, THEIR FAILINGS, THEIR VICES, AND THEIR VIRTUES, the peculiarities of classes and castes.

It is for this reason that ECONOMICS IS THE CHIEF SCIENCE TAUGHT BY THE JEWS. We will be surrounded by a crowd of bankers, traders, capitalists, and most important of all, by millionaires, because in essence EVERYTHING WILL BE DECIDED BY A QUESTION OF FIGURES.

PROTOCOL NO. IX

. . .because their anti-Semitism is necessary TO ENABLE US TO CONTROL OUR SMALLER BROTHERS. I will not further explain this, as it has already been the object of numerous discussions.

In reality, THERE ARE NO OBSTACLES BEFORE US. Our super-government exists under such extra-legal conditions that it is common to designate it by an energetic and strong word -- a Dictatorship.

I can honestly state that, at the present time, WE ARE LAWMAKERS; WE ARE THE JUDGES AND INFLICT PUNISHMENT; WE EXECUTE AND PARDON; WE AS THE CHIEF OF ALL OUR ARMIES, RIDE THE LEADER’s HORSE. . . . WE POSSESS BOUNDLESS AMBITION, BURNING GREED FOR MERCILESS REVENGE, AND BITTER HATRED.

From us emanates an all-embracing terror. People of all opinions and of all doctrines are in our service; people who desire to restore monarchies, demagogues, socialists, communists, and other utopians. . . . ALL THE GOVERNMENTS HAVE BEEN TORTURED BY THIS PROCEDURE; THEY BEG FOR PEACE, AND FOR THE SAKE OF PEACE ARE PREPARED TO MAKE ANY SACRIFICE, BUT WE WILL NOT GIVE THEM PEACE UNTIL THEY RECOGNIZE OUR INTERNATIONAL SUPER-GOVERNMENT OPENLY AND WITH SUBMISSION.

The division into parties has delivered all of them to us, because in order to conduct a party struggle money is required, and we have it all.

We have affected legal procedure, electoral law, the press, personal freedom, and, MOST IMPORTANT, THE CORNERSTONE OF FREE EXISTENCE.

WE HAVE MISLED, CORRUPTED, FOOLED, AND DEMORALIZED THE YOUTH of the Goys by education along principles and theories known by us to be false, but which we ourselves have inspired.

You may say that there will be an armed rising against us if our plans are discovered prematurely; but in anticipation of this we have such a terrorizing manoeuvre in the West that even the bravest soul will shudder.

Underground passages will be established by that time in all capitals, from where THEY CAN BE EXPLODED, together with all their institutions and national documents.

PROTOCOL NO. X

I beg you to remember that the government and the masses are satisfied with VISIBLE RESULTS IN POLITICS. It is important to know one detail in our policy. It will help us in discussing division of authority, freedom of speech, of the press, of religion (faith), the right of assembly, equality before the law, inviolability of property and of the home, indirect taxes and the retrospective force of law. ALL SUCH QUESTIONS SHOULD NEVER BE DIRECTLY AND OPENLY DISCUSSED before the masses. When it becomes necessary for us to discuss them, they should not be elaborated but merely mentioned, without going into details, pointing out that modern legal principles are being accepted by us. The significance of this reticence lies in the fact that a principle which has not been openly declared gives us freedom of action to exclude, unnoticed, one point or another, whereas if elaborated the principle becomes as good as established.

WHEN WE ACCOMPLISH OUR COUP D’ETAT, WE WILL SAY TO THE PEOPLES: “EVERYTHING WENT BADLY; ALL OF YOU HAVE SUFFERED. WE WILL ABOLISH THE CAUSE OF YOUR SUFFERINGS, THAT IS TO SAY, NATIONALITIES, FRONTIERS AND NATIONAL CURRENCIES. OF COURSE YOU ARE FREE TO CONDEMN US, BUT WOULD YOUR JUDGEMENT BE JUST IF YOU WERE TO PRONOUNCE IT BEFORE GIVING A TRIAL TO WHAT WE WILL GIVE YOU?” THEREAFTER THEY WILL EXALT US WITH A SENTIMENT OF UNANIMOUS DELIGHT AND HOPE. THE VOTING SYSTEM WHICH WE HAVE USED AS A TOOL FOR OUR ENTHRONEMENT, AND TO WHICH WE HAVE ACCUSTOMED EVEN THE PREARRANGED AGREEMENTS, WILL HAVE PERFORMED ITS LAST SERVICE AND WILL MAKE ITS LAST APPEARANCE IN THE EXPRESSION OF A UNANIMOUS DESIRE TO BECOME MORE CLOSELY ACQUAINTED WITH US BEFORE HAVING PRONOUNCED A JUDGEMENT.

To attain this we must FORCE ALL TO VOTE, without class discrimination, to establish the autocracy of the majority, which cannot be obtained from the intellectual classes alone. . . . WE WILL NOT ALLOW THE FORMATION OF INDIVIDUAL MINDS. . . We will thus create such a blind power that it will be unable to move without the guidance of our agents, sent by us to replace their leaders.

THE MASSES WILL SUBMIT TO THIS REGIME BECAUSE THEY WILL KNOW THAT THEIR EARNINGS, PERQUISITES, AND OTHER BENEFITS DEPEND UPON THESE LEADERS.

The plan of government must EMANATE ALREADY FORMED from one head. . . Consequently, the inspired work of our leaders must not be thrown to the mercy of the mob or even of a limited group.

These plans will not immediately upset contemporary institutions. They will only alter their organization. . .

. . .it is not the institutions that are important, but their functions.

When we injected the poison of liberalism into the state organism, its entire political complexion changed; the states became infected with a mortal disease, namely, the decomposition of the blood. IT IS ONLY NECESSARY TO AWAIT THE END OF THEIR AGONY.

. . the constitution, as you well know, is nothing more than a school for dispute, discussion, disagreement, fruitless party agitation, dissention, party tendencies -- in other words, a school for everything which weakens the efficiency of government. . . . A president chosen from the mob, from among our creatures, our slaves.

To accomplish our plan, we will engineer the election of presidents whose past record contains some hidden scandal, some “Panama” -- then they will be FAITHFUL EXECUTORS OF OUR ORDERS FROM FEAR OF EXPOSURE, and from the natural desire of every man who has reached authority to retain the privileges, advantages, and dignity connected with the position of president. The chamber of Deputies will elect, protect, and screen the president, but we will deprive it of the right of initiating laws or of amending them, for THIS RIGHT WILL BE GRANTED BY US TO THE RESPONSIBLE PRESIDENT, A PUPPET IN OUR HANDS. . . . We will justify this prerogative under the pretext that the president, as chief of the national army, must control it in order to protect the new republican constitution, which he, as a responsible representative of this consitition, is bound to defend.

. . .THE KEYS TO THE SHRINE WILL BE IN OUR HANDS

. . .

We will also take away from the Chamber, with the introduction of the new republican constitution, the right of interpellation (questioning) in regard to governmental measures, under the pretext that political secrets must be preserved. WITH THE AID OF THIS NEW CONSTITUTION WE WILL REDUCE THE NUMBER OF REPRESENTATIVES TO THE MINIMUM, thus also reducing to the same extent political passions and passion for politics.

Moreover, the president, as chief executive, will have the right to CONVENE OR DISSOLVE PARLIAMENT, and in the case of dissolution, DEFER THE APPOINTMENT OF A NEW PARLIAMENT. . . . Under our guidance the president will interpret in ambiguious ways such existing laws as it is possible to so interpret. Moreover, he will annul them when the need is pointed out to him by us; HE WILL ALSO HAVE THE RIGHT TO PROPOSE TEMPORARY LAWS AND EVEN MODIFICATION IN THE CONSTITUTIONAL WORK OF THE GOVERNMENT, alleging as the motive for so doing, the exigencies of the welfare of the country.

BY SUCH MEASURES WE WILL BE ABLE TO DESTROY GRADUALLY, STEP BY STEP, EVERYTHING THAT, UPON ENTERING INTO OUR RIGHTS, WE WERE OBLIGED TO INTRODUCE INTO GOVERNMENT CONSTITUTIONS AS A TRANSITION TO THE IMPERCEPTIBLE ABOLITION OF ALL CONSTITUTIONS, WHEN THE TIME COMES TO CONVERT ALL GOVERNMENTS INTO OUR AUTOCRACY.

But you know well that to render such a universal expression of desire possible, IT IS NECESSARY CONTINUOUSLY TO DISTURB THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN THE PEOPLE AND THE GOVERNMENT IN ALL COUNTRIES, AND SO TO EXHAUST EVERYBODY BY THE DISSENSION, INOCULATION OF DISEASES, AND MISERY, AND TO MAKE THE GOYS SEE NO OTHER SOLUTION THAN AN APPEAL TO OUR MONEY AND COMPLETE RULE.

Should we give the people a rest, however, the longed for moment will probably never arrive.

PROTOCOL NO. XI

BY THESE MEASURES, I MEAN THE FREEDOM OF THE PRESS, THE RIGHT OF ASSEMBLY, RELIGIOUS FREEDOM, ELECTORAL RIGHTS, AND MANY OTHER THINGS WHICH MUST DISAPPEAR FROM THE HUMAN REPERTOIRE, OR MUST BE FUNDAMENTALLY ALTERED ON THE DAY FOLLOWING THE DECLARATION OF THE NEW CONSTITUTION.

IT IS NECESSARY FOR US THAT, FROM THE FIRST MOMENT OF ITS PROCLAMATION, WHEN THE PEOPLE ARE STILL DUMBFOUNDED BY THE ACCOMPLISHED REVOLUTION AND ARE IN A STATE OF TERROR AND SURPRISE, THEY SHOULD REALIZE WE ARE SO STRONG, SO INVULNERABLE, AND SO MIGHTY THAT WE SHALL IN NO CASE PAY ATTENTION TO THEM, AND NOT ONLY WILL WE IGNORE THEIR OPINIONS AND DESIRES, BUT BE READY TO AND CAPABLE OF SUPPRESSING AT ANY MOMENT OR PLACE ANY SIGN OF OPPOSITION WITH INDISPUTABLE AUTHORITY. WE SHALL WANT THE PEOPLE TO REALIZE THAT WE HAVE TAKEN AT ONCE EVERYTHING WE WANTED, AND THAT WE SHALL UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHARE OUR POWER WITH THEM. THEN THEY WILL CLOSE THEIR EYES TO EVERYTHING OUT OF FEAR AND WILL AWAIT FURTHER DEVELOPMENTS.

The Goys are like a flock of sheep -- we are wolves.

Do you know what happens to sheep when wolves get into the fold?

They will also close their eyes to everything because we will PROMISE TO RETURN TO THEM ALL THEIR LIBERTIES after the enemies of peace have been subjugated and all the parties pacified.

Is it necessary to say how long they would have to wait for the return of their liberties?

Why have we conceived and inspired this policy for the Goys without giving them an opportunity to examine its inner meaning if not for the purpose of ATTAINING BY A CIRCUITOUS METHOD WHAT IS UNATTAINABLE FOR OUR SCATTERED RACE BY A DIRECT ROAD?

This constituted a base for our organization of secret Masonry which is not known to and whose aims are not even suspected by these cattle, the Goys. They have been decoyed by us into our numerous ostensible organizations, which appear to be Masonic Lodges, so as to DIVERT THE ATTENTION of their coreligionists.

GOD HAS GIVEN US, HIS CHOSEN PEOPLE, THE POWER TO SCATTER, AND WHAT TO ALL APPEARS TO BE OUR WEAKNESS, HAS PROVED TO BE OUR STRENGTH, AND HAS NOW BROUGHT US TO THE THRESHOLD OF UNIVERSAL RULE.

LITTLE REMAINS TO BE BUILT ON THESE FOUNDATIONS.

PROTOCOL NO. XII

Not one notice will be made public without our control. This is already being done by us, since the NEWS FROM ALL PARTS OF THE WORLD IS RECEIVED THROUGH SEVERAL AGENCIES IN WHICH IT IS CENTRALIZED.

. . .we have already managed to subjugate the minds of the Goys to such an extent that almost ALL OF THEM SEE WORLD EVENTS THROUGH COLORED GLASSES WHICH WE PUT OVER THEIR EYES; . . .

All our newspapers will represent different tendencies, namely, aristocratic, republican, revolutionary, even anarchistic, so long of course as the constitution lasts. Like the Indian God Vishnu, these periodicals will have one hundred arms, each of which will reach the pulse of every group of public opinion. When the pulse beats faster, these arms will guide opinion toward our aims, SINCE THE EXCITED PERSON LOSES THE POWER OF REASONING AND IS EASILY LED. Those fools who believe that they repeat the opinion expressed by the newspapers of their party will be repeating our opinions or those which we desire them to have. Imagining that they are following the press of their party, they will follow the flag which we will fly for them.

These attacks against us will also seem to CONVINCE THE PEOPLE THAT COMPLETE LIBERTY OF THE PRESS STILL EXISTS, and it will give our agents the opportunity to declare that the papers opposing us are mere wind-bags, since they are unable to find any real ground to refute our orders.

With such measures, thought will become an educational instrument in the hands of our government, which WILL NOT ALLOW THE PEOPLE TO BE LED ASTRAY into realms of fancy and dreams about beneficent progress.

We will surely conquer our enemies, because THEY WILL NOT HAVE THE PRESS AT THEIR DISPOSAL in which to express themselves in full. Moreover, with the above mentioned plans against the press, we will not even need to refute them seriously.

PROTOCOL NO. XIII

The need of daily bread forces the Goys to silence and compels them to remain our obedient servants.

To prevent them from reaching any independent decisions, WE WILL DIVERT THEIR MINDS BY AMUSEMENTS, GAMES, PASTIMES, PASSIONS, AND CULTURAL CENTERS FOR THE PUBLIC. WE WILL SOON BEGIN TO OFFER PRIZE CONTESTS. . . Such attractions will definitely deflect the mind from problems over which we would otherwise have to fight with the people. By losing more and more the custom of independent thought, they will begin to talk in unison with us, because we alone will provide new lines of thought through persons with whom, of course, we will presumably have no connection.

The role of liberal Utopians will be definitely terminated when our government is recognized. . . . For it was by the word “progress” that we have successfully turned the brains of the stupid Goys. There are no brains among the Goys to realize that this word is but a cover for digression from the truth, unless it is applied to material inventions, since there is but one truth and there is no room for progress.

When our kingdom is established, our orators will discuss the great problems which have stirred humanity for the purpose of bringing it finally under our blessed rule.

WHO WILL THEN SUSPECT THAT ALL THESE PROBLEMS WERE INSTIGATED BY US, ACCORDING TO A POLITICAL PLAN WHICH HAS NOT BEEN DISCLOSED BY ANY ONE DURING SO MANY CENTURIES?

PROTOCOL NO. XIV

WHEN WE BECOME RULERS WE WILL NOT TOLERATE THE EXISTENCE OF ANY OTHER RELIGION EXCEPT OUR OWN, WHICH PROCLAIMS ONE GOD, WITH WHOM OUR FATE IS BOUND UP BECAUSE WE ARE THE CHOSEN PEOPLE, AND OUR FATE HAS DETERMINED THE FATE OF THE WORLD. FOR THIS REASON WE MUST DESTROY ALL OTHER RELIGIONS.

The benefits of peace, although attained through centuries of unrest, will serve to demonstrate the beneficial character of our rule. . . . The useless changes of government, to which we ourselves prompted the Goys, when we were undermining their governmental apparatus, will become such a nuisance to the people by that time, that THEY WILL PREFER TO ENDURE ANYTHING FROM US RATHER THAN RISK A REPETITION OF FORMER UNREST AND HARDSHIPS.

Our philosophers will discuss all the shortcomings of the Goy religion, but nobody will ever discuss our religion IN THE LIGHT OF ITS TRUE ASPECT, AND NOBODY WILL EVER THOROUGHLY UNDERSTAND IT, except our own people, who will never dare to disclose its secrets.

PROTOCOL NO. XV

When we finally become rulers by means of revolutions, which will be arranged so that they shall take place simultaneously in all countries and immediately after all existing governments shall have been officially pronounced as incapable (which may not happen soon, perhaps not before a whole century), WE WILL SEE TO IT THAT NO PLOTS ARE HATCHED AGAINST US. TO EFFECT THIS, WE WILL KILL HEARTLESSLY ALL WHO TAKE UP ARMS AGAINST THE ESTABLISHMENT OF OUR RULE.

THE ESTABLISHMENT OF ANY NEW SECRET SOCIETY WILL BE MET BY THE DEATH PENALTY, and those societies which now exist and are known to us and either work or have worked for us, will be disbanded and their members exiled to continents far removed from Europe.

We will deal in the same manner with those Masons among the Goys who know too much.

This is only obtained by its majestic and unshakable power, which will convey the impression that it is inviolable BECAUSE OF ITS MYSTICAL NATURE, NAMELY, BECAUSE CHOSEN BY GOD. Such, until recently has been the Russian Autocracy -- our ONLY DANGEROUS ENEMY throughout the world, WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE POPE.

Meanwhile, until our rule is established, we, on the contrary, will organize and multiply free Masonic lodges in all the countries of the world. WE WILL ATTRACT TO THEM ALL THOSE WHO ARE AND WHO MAY BECOME PUBLIC-SPIRITED, because in these lodges will be the chief source of information and from them will emanate our influence. . . . these lodges will be administered by our wise men.

You have no idea how easy it is to bring even the most intelligent Goys to a state of unconscious credulity. . . To the same extent as our people ignore success for the sake of carrying out their plans, so are the Goys ready to sacrifice all their plans for the sake of success. Their psychology makes the problem of direction easier for us. Those tigers in appearance have the souls of sheep and nonsense filters through their heads. As a hobby we have given them the dream of submerging human individualism through the symbolic idea of collectivism.

They have not yet discovered and will not discover that this hobby IS A CLEAR INFRINGEMENT ON THE PRINCIPAL LAW OF NATURE, WHICH, FROM THE BEGINNING OF THE WORLD, CREATED A BEING UNLIKE ALL OTHERS, PRECISELY FOR THE SAKE OF EXPRESSING HIS INDIVIDUALITY.

If we were able to lead them to such insane and blind beliefs, does it not obviously prove the low level of development of the Goy mind as compared to our mind? IT IS PRECISELY THE THING WHICH GUARANTEES OUR SUCCESS.

How far-sighted were our wise men of old when they said that to attain a serious object ONE MUST NOT STOP AT THE MEANS, NOR SHOULD ONE COUNT THE VICTIMS SACRIFICED TO THE CAUSE. We have not counted the victims from among the Goys, those seeds of cattle. Although we have sacrificed many of our own peoples, we have already given them in return a formerly undreamed-of position on earth. THE COMPARATIVELY FEW VICTIMS FROM AMONG OUR OWN PEOPLE HAVE SAVED OUR RACE FROM DESTRUCTION.

Death is the unavoidable end of all. IT WOULD BE BETTER TO ACCELERATE THIS END FOR THOSE WHO INTERFERE WITH OUR CAUSE THAN FOR OUR PEOPLE OR FOR US, OURSELVES, THE CREATORS OF THIS CAUSE, TO DIE. We kill Masons in such a way that none but the brothers suspect, not even the victims; they all die when it is necessary, apparently from a natural death.

. .The purely animal mind of the Goys is incapable of analysis and observation. . .

It is through this difference in the process of reasoning between us and the Goys that it becomes possible clearly to demonstrate the stamp of God’s elect as compared to the instinctive and bestial mentality of the Goys. They see, but they cannot foresee, and they cannot invent anything except material things. IT IS CLEAR, THEREFORE, THAT NATURE HERSELF INTENDED US TO RULE AND GUIDE THE WORLD.

OUR LAWS WILL BE SHORT, CLEAR, IRREVOCABLE, AND REQUIRING NO INTERPRETATION, so that everybody will be able to know them thoroughly. The chief point emphasized in them will be a HIGHLY DEVELOPED OBEDIENCE TO AUTHORITY, which will eliminate all abuses, for all without exception will be responsible before the supreme power vested in the highest authority.

For instance: Our judges will know that by attempting to show stupid mercy, they overstep the law of justice, which was created solely for exemplary punishment of crimes and not for the manifestation of moral qualities on the part of the judge. Such qualities are commendable in private, but not in public life, which constitutes the educational forum of human life.

. . ALL THE WORLD’s MONEY WILL BE CONCENTRATED IN OUR HANDS; consequently, our government need not fear expense.

Our autocracy will be consistent in every respect, and consequently every manifestation of our great power will be respected and unconditionally obeyed.

Thus, they will become imbued with the idea that it is impossible for them to do without this guardian and guide if they wish to live in a world of peace and quiet. They will recognize the autocracy of our sovereign, whom they will respect and almost deify. . . With regard to the secrets of our political plans, BOTH THE MASSES AND THEIR ADMINISTRATION ARE LIKE LITTLE CHILDREN.

IT IS THE RIGHT OF THE STRONG TO UTILIZE HIS POWER IN ORDER TO LEAD HUMANITY TOWARDS A SOCIAL ORDER ESTABLISHED BY THE LAW OF NATURE, NAMELY, OBEDIENCE. . . . Consequently, let us be the strongest for the common good.

WE MUST SACRIFICE WITHOUT HESITATION THOSE INDIVIDUALS WHO VIOLATE THE EXISTING ORDER, for in exemplary punishment of evil there lies a great educational process.

WHEN THE KING OF ISRAEL PLACES THE CROWN OFFERED TO HIM BY EUROPE ON HIS SACRED HEAD, HE WILL BECOME THE PATRIARCH OF THE WORLD. The necessary sacrifices made by him will never equal the number of victims sacrificed to the mania of greatness during the centuries of rivalry between the Goy governments.

Our sovereign will be in constant communication with the people, delivering from tribunes addresses which will be spread to all parts of the world.

PROTOCOL NO. XVI

It was necessary for us to infiltrate into their educational system such principles as have successfully broken down their social order.

We will obliterate from the memory of the people all those facts pertaining to former centuries which are not to our advantage, leaving only those which emphasize the mistakes of the Goy governments. THE STUDY OF PRACTICAL LIFE, OF OBLIGATORY SOCIAL ORDER, OF THE INTER-RELATIONSHIP OF HUMAN BEINGS, THE AVOIDANCE OF EVIL, EGOTISTICAL EXAMPLES THAT PLANT THE SEED OF EVIL, AND OTHER QUESTIONS OF A PEDAGOGICAL NATURE, WILL HEAD THE EDUCATIONAL PROGRAM. This program will differ for each caste, never allowing education to be of a uniform character. Such a system is of special importance.

EACH CASTE MUST BE EDUCATED WITH STRICT LIMITATIONS according to its particular occupation and the nature of the work. Accidental genius has always been able and always will be able to rise to a higher caste, but, for the sake of this rare exception, to open the door to the inefficient, and to admit them to higher castes or ranks, enabling them to occupy positions of others born and trained to fill them -- is absolute insanity. You, yourself, know what happened to the Goys when they yielded to this nonsense.

. . teachers will read supposedly unbiased lectures on problems of human relationship, on the law of imitation, on the cruelty of unrestricted competition, and finally, on new philosophical theories which have not yet been disclosed to the world.

In short, knowing from the experience of many centuries that MEN LIVE AND ARE GUIDED BY IDEAS, that these ideas are imbued only by means of education given to persons of all ages, . . . WE WILL ABSORB AND APPROPRIATE TO OUR OWN ADVANTAGE THE LAST TRACES OF INDEPENDENT THOUGHT, WHICH FOR A LONG TIME HAVE BEEN DIRECTED TO THE GOAL AND TO THE IDEAS NECESSARY TO US. THE SYSTEM OF ENSLAVING THOUGHT IS ALREADY IN ACTION THROUGH SO-CALLED VISUAL EDUCATION.

THIS SYSTEM TENDS TO TURN THE GOYS INTO THOUGHTLESS, OBEDIENT ANIMALS, EXPECTING TO SEE IN ORDER TO UNDERSTAND. In France, one of our best agents, Bourgeois, has already announced a new program of visual education.

PROTOCOL NO. XVII

Lawyers . . . will receive a salary, regardless of whether the defense has been successful or not.

. . it is only a question of a few years before the complete collapse of Christendom. It will be still easier to deal with other religions, but it is too early to discuss this problem.

When the moment comes to ANNIHILATE THE VATICAN COMPLETELY, an invisible hand, pointing towards this court, will guide the masses in their assault.

The King of Israel will become the real Pope of the Universe, the Patriarch of the International Church.

According to our program, ONE-THIRD OF OUR SUBJECTS WILL WATCH THE OTHERS from a pure sense of duty, as volunteers for the government. Then it will not be considered disgraceful to be a spy and an informer; on the contrary, it will be regarded as praiseworthy. Unfounded reports, however, will be severely punished to prevent abuse of this privilege.

PROTOCOL NO. XVIII

We have forced the rulers to admit their own weakness by adopting open measure of police protection, and thereby we have ruined the prestige of their authority.

TO GUARD THE SOVEREIGN OPENLY IS EQUIVALENT TO AN ADMISSION OF THE WEAKNESS OF HIS GOVERNMENTAL ORGANIZATION.

We will arrest criminals upon the first more or less well founded suspicion.

PROTOCOL NO. XIX

Sedition is nothing but the barking of a lap dog at an elephant. From the point of view of the government which is well organized, not from the police standpoint but with regards to its social basis, the lap dog barks at the elephant because he does not realize his strength. It is only necessary for the elephant to show his strength once and the dog barks no more; he begins to wag his tail the moment he sees the elephant.

PROTOCOL NO. XX

. . THE RESULT OF OUR ACTIONS IS MEASURED IN FIGURES.

In our government the sovereign will have the legal fiction of OWNING EVERYTHING IN HIS KINGDOM (which is easily put into practice), and can resort to LEGAL CONFISCATION OF ALL MONEY in order to regulate its circulation throughout the country. Consequently, the best method of taxation is the levying of a PROGRESSIVE TAX ON PROPERTY.

Progressive taxation, assessed according to the amount of capital, will produce a much greater revenue than the present system of taxing every one at an equal rate, which is useful to us now ONLY AS A MEANS OF EXCITING REVOLT AND DISCONTENT AMONG THE GOYS. The power of our sovereign will rest mainly in equilibrium and in guarantees of peace. . . . Public needs must be met by those who can best afford to do so and by those from whom there is something to take.

Such a measure will eliminate the hatred of the poor towards the rich. . .

Even small sums in excess of a certain definite and broadly calculated fund, should not be allowed to be kept in the state treasury, because MONEY IS INTENDED TO CIRCULATE, and every impediment to circulation is detrimental to the governmental mechanism, which the money lubricates; the congestion of lubricating substances can stop the proper functioning of the mechanism.

THE ECONOMIC CRISES WERE CREATED BY US FOR THE GOYS ONLY BY THE WITHDRAWAL OF MONEY FROM CIRCULATION. Huge amounts of capital were kept idle and were taken away from the nations, which were thus compelled to apply to us for loans. Payment of interest on these loans burdened the state finances and made the states subservient to capital. The concentration of industry HAVING TAKEN PRODUCTION OUT OF THE HANDS OF THE ARTISAN AND PUT IT INTO THE HANDS OF CAPITALISTS, SUCKED ALL THE POWER OUT OF THE PEOPLE AND ALSO OUT OF THE STATE.

. . SINCE WE TOOK AS MUCH GOLD AS POSSIBLE OUT OF CIRCULATION.

The budget of revenues and the budget of expenditures will be PLACED SIDE BY SIDE, in order that they may always be compared with each other.

THE PERIOD OF LOANS FOLLOWED AND . . . BROUGHT ALL THE GOY STATES TO BANKRUPTCY.

You can well understand that such a management of financial affairs as we induced the Goys to pursue cannot be adopted by us.

Indeed, what is a loan, especially a foreign loan, if not a leech?

SO LONG AS THE LOANS WERE DOMESTIC, THE GOYS ONLY SHIFTED THE MONEY FROM THE POCKETS OF THE POOR INTO THOSE OF THE RICH; BUT WHEN WE BRIBED THE PROPER PERSONS TO MAKE THE LOANS FOREIGN, THEN THE NATIONAL RICHES POURED INTO OUR HANDS AND ALL THE GOYS BEGAN TO PAY US THE TRIBUTE OF SUBJECTS.

. . has forced their countries into debt to our banks to such an extent that THEY CAN NEVER PAY OFF THEIR DEBTS. It should be realized, however, that we have gone to great pains in order to bring about such a state of affairs.

THIS PROVES THE GENIUS OF OUR DISTINGUISHED MIND, for we were able to present the question of loans to them in such a light that they saw in loans an advantage for themselves.

IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO GOVERN WITHOUT A DEFINITE PLAN.

PROTOCOL NO. XXI

. . we will also DESTROY ALL STOCK EXCHANGES, for we will not allow the prestige of our authority to be shaken by the shifting of the prices of our securities. We will fix the full price of their value legally without any possibility of its fluctuation. (A rise leads to a fall, and this was precisely what we did to the Goy stocks and bonds at the beginning.)

We will replace the stock exchanges by great government credit institutions. . . These institutions will be in a position to throw daily on the market 500,000,000 shares of industrial stocks, or to buy up a like amount. Thus all industrial enterprises will become dependent upon us. YOU CAN WELL IMAGINE WHAT POWER THAT WILL GIVE US.

PROTOCOL NO. XXII

In all that I have hitherto reported to you I have carefully tried to show you a true picture of the mystery of present events, as also of those of the past, which all flow into the stream of great events, the results of which will be seen in the near future. I have exposed our secret plans which govern our relations with the Goys, as well as our financial policy. There remains but little to add.

We hold in our hands the greatest modern power -- gold. In the course of two days we can get it from our treasuries in any desired quantity.

Is there any more need for us to prove that our rule is decreed by God? DO WE NOT PROVE BY SUCH WEALTH THAT ALL THE EVIL WHICH WE WERE FORCED TO DO DURING SO MANY CENTURIES HAS SERVED IN THE END TO TRUE HAPPINESS -- TO THE RESTORATION OF ORDER? . . . We will be able to prove that we are benefactors, who have brought true welfare and individual freedom to the tortured world, insuring at the same time the possibility of enjoying peace, quiet, and dignity of relationships, UPON THE SOLE CONDITION, OF COURSE, THAT OBEDIENCE TO THE LAWS ESTABLISHED BY US IS PRACTICED.

Our power will be glorious because it will be mighty; it will rule and guide, and not helplessly crawl after leaders and orators, shouting insane words which they call great principles, and which in reality are simply Utopian. OUR POWER WILL LEAD TO ORDER, WHICH, IN TURN BRINGS HAPPINESS TO THE PEOPLE. The prestige of this power will excite mystical adoration, and the peoples will bow before it. TRUE POWER DOES NOT YIELD TO ANY RIGHT, EVEN BE IT THAT OF GOD. None will dare approach it in order to deprive it even of an atom of its might.

PROTOCOL NO XXIII

To teach the people obedience they must be taught modesty, and to accomplish this THE PRODUCTION OF LUXURIES MUST BE LIMITED.

We will RESTORE HANDICRAFT, which will undermine the private capital of manufacturers. . . .big manufacturers often influence . . . the thoughts of the people against the government.

A people, practicing handicraft, does not know what unemployment means, and this makes them cling to existing conditions and consequently to the power of authority. Unemployment is most dangerous for a government. IT WILL HAVE FINISHED ITS WORK FOR US AS SOON AS AUTHORITY FALLS INTO OUR HANDS.

DRUNKENNESS WILL ALSO BE FORBIDDEN BY LAW and will be punishable as a crime against human decency, for man becomes bestial under the influence of alcohol.

The sovereign who will replace the present existing governments . . . must destroy such a society, IF NECESSARY DROWN IT IN ITS OWN BLOOD, in order to resurrect it as a well-organized army, which consciously struggles against the infection of any anarchy affecting the state organism.

HE, GOD’S ELECT, IS CHOSEN FROM ABOVE FOR THE PURPOSE OF CRUSHING THE INSANE FORCES THAT ARE MOVED BY INSTINCT AND NOT BY INTELLECT, BY BESTIALITY AND NOT BY HUMANITARIANISM.

Then we will say to the peoples: “Pray to God and bow before him who bears the mark of predestination, to whom God Himself showed His Star, so that none but He Himself should free you from all sinful forces and from evil.

PROTOCOL NO. XXIV

A few members of the seed of David will train the sovereigns and their successors, who will be selected not by right of inheritance, but according to their personal ability.

ONLY THOSE OF AN UNDOUBTEDLY ABLE AND FIRM, EVEN CRUEL CHARACTER, WILL RECEIVE THE REINS OF GOVERNMENT FROM OUR WISE MEN.

Only the sovereign and his three sponsors will know the future.

Nobody will know the aims of the sovereign when he issues his orders, and thus nobody will dare oppose him.

Naturally, the mental capacity of the sovereign must be equal to the plan of rule herein contained. For this reason he will not mount the throne before a TEST OF HIS MIND is made by the above mentioned Wise Men.

The King of Israel must not be influenced by his passions, especially by sensuality. No particular element of his nature must have the ”upper hand and rule over his mind. SENSUALITY, MORE THAN ANYTHING ELSE, UPSETS MENTAL ABILITY AND CLEARNESS OF VISION BY DEFLECTING THOUGHT TO THE WORST AND MOST BESTIAL SIDE OF HUMAN NATURE.

The Pillar of the Universe in the person of the World Ruler, sprung from the sacred seed of David, MUST SACRIFICE ALL PERSONAL DESIRES FOR THE BENEFIT OF HIS PEOPLE.

OUR SOVEREIGN MUST BE IRREPROACHABLE.

* * * * * * * *

Now you who are in shocking disbelief, bear with me a bit longer. The entire text is over 63 pages in length----and that is just the summary of the main, detailed document which has not been seen outside the “privileged” circles.

Dharma asks, “But what of the Jewish people who live and work and dwell in all ways among us?” So be it, chela. Did you know all of this information? Neither do they!! The “ordinary” Jewish person will be sacrificed in the most outrageous manner. The Zionist Jews have more hatred for the “Jew” than all other beings on your placement placed in one lump anywhere or at any time. They are the tools of the teachings.

Who are Goys? Again I repeat for your memory prompting--they are ALL except the Zionists.

Frightening? I should certainly hope so, beloved chelas. It is a good time to use your earthly phrase: “If you aren’t in a panic; you don’t understand the situation!”

Dharma, please close this portion and print it. Let us then check on the time and desires of the group and we may or may not finish with THE SECRET NEW CONSTITUTION summary today. It has been far too long a work period so we will look carefully at timing.

10/14/90 HATONN

There is great misunderstanding regarding Jews, Zionists, U.S. Nationalism and anti-Semitism, or, any other anti-anything.

DEFINITION: ZIONISM

Zionism is a secular political movement dedicated to the establishment of a Jewish state. It seeks to transform religious hopes and the yearning for individual freedom into a nationalistic political program. Not until the first Zionist Congress in 1897 did Theodor Herzl call for a “legally secured Jewish home in Palestine.” Zionism uses the mask of religion to hide its blatant nationalism, racism and atheistic philosophy. (Doesn’t sound like Father Joseph’s or Mother Mary’s Jewish children to me!)

CHAPTER 15

4/1/93 #1 CERES ‘ATONN

You will also find that the 13th (short-version) of the Protocols of Zion, will also be making more and more sense as you see that it has been accomplished according to their plans for your citizenry:

“13: We have already established our own men in all important positions. We must endeavor to provide the Goyim with lawyers and doctors; the lawyers are au courant with all interests; doctors, once in the house, become confessors and directors of consciences. And,

“15. If one of our people should unhappily fall into the hands of justice amongst the Christians, we must rush to help him; find as many witnesses as he needs to save him from his judges, until we become judges ourselves.”

Also there is a letter, remember, where a Jewish Rabbi of Arles in Provence, wrote to the Grand Sanhedrin, which had its seat in Constantinople, for advice, as the people of Arles were threatening the synagogues. What should the Jews do? This was the reply:

“Dear beloved brethren in Moses, we have received your letter in which you tell us of the anxieties and misfortunes which you are enduring. We are pierced by as great pain to hear it as yourselves.

“The advice of the Grand Satraps and Rabbis is the following:

“1. As for what you say that the King of France obliges you to become Christians: do it, since you cannot do otherwise, but let the law of Moses be kept in your hearts.

“2. As for what you say about the command to despoil you of your goods” (the law was that on becoming converted Jews gave up their possessions); “make your sons merchants, that little by little they may despoil the Christians of theirs.

“3. As for what you say about their making attempts on your lives: make your sons doctors and apothecaries, that they may TAKE AWAY CHRISTIANS‟ LIVES.

“4. As for what you say of their destroying your synagogues: make your sons canons and clerics in order that they may destroy their churches.

“5. As for the many other vexations you complain of: arrange that your sons become advocates and lawyers, and see that they always mix themselves up with the affairs of State, in order that by putting Christians under your yoke you may dominate the world and be avenged on them.

“6. Do not swerve from this order that we give you, because you will find by experience that, humiliated as you are, you will reach the actuality of power.

“Signed V.S.S.V.F.F., Prince of the Jews, 21st Caslue (November), 1489.”

So this is “just old stuff!”? How interesting to note that the CIA is now predominantly KGB (Soviets) and Mossad (Israel Secret Service) and ALL are branches of the British-Israel EMPIRE.

CHAPTER 16

(Editor’s note: We are herein reprinting the entire United Nations Charter at the request of Commander Ceres ‘ATONN. This document stands in direct opposition to the beautiful Declaration of Independence and the sweeping Constitution of the United States--two outstanding documents of freedom for we-the-people.

Here, in this United Nations Charter, we have a diabolical document AND organization, covertly dedicated to world control. A running start on this Elite project was really first established during Woodrow Wilson’s sorry time as bought-and-paid-for President, near the end of World War I, but the American people were still awake and independent enough then to throw out that older “incarnation” called The League of Nations.

By the time World War II was about over, the American people were finally asleep and preoccupied enough for the Satanic Khazarian Zionist Elite to easily establish their United Nations stronghold in “their” New York City, as well as begin the countdown toward final world control through this United Nations Charter document. Acknowledge it and weep. Read it and become informed. Understand it and get mad!)

INTRODUCTORY NOTE

The Charter of the United Nations was signed on 26 June 1945, in San Francisco, at the conclusion of the United Nations Conference on International Organization, and came into force on 24 October 1945. The Statute of the International Court of Justice is an integral part of the Charter.

Amendments to Articles 23, 27 and 61 of the Charter were adopted by the General Assembly on 17 December 1963 and came into force on 31 August 1965. The amendment to Article 109, adopted by the General Assembly on 20 December 1965, came into force on 12 June 1968.

The amendment to Article 23 enlarges the membership of the Security Council from eleven to fifteen. The amended Article 27 provides that decisions of the Security Council on procedural matters shall be made by an affirmative vote of nine members (formerly seven) and on all other matters by an affirmative vote of nine members (formerly seven), including the concurring votes of the five permanent members of the Security Council.

The amendment to Article 61 enlarges the membership of the Economic and Social Council from eighteen to twenty-seven.

The amendment to Article 109, which relates to the first paragraph of that Article, provides that a General Conference of Member States for the purpose of reviewing the Charter may be held at a date and place to be fixed by a two-thirds vote of the members of the General Assembly and by a vote of any nine members (formerly seven) of the Security Council. Paragraph 3 of Article 109, which deals with the consideration of a possible review conference during the tenth regular session of the General Assembly, has been retained in its original form in its reference to a vote of any seven members of the Security Council‟, the paragraph having been acted upon in 1955 by the General Assembly, at its tenth regular session, and by the Security Council.

CHARTER OF THE UNITED NATIONS

WE THE PEOPLES OF THE UNITED NATIONS DETERMINED

to save succeeding generations from the scourge of war, which twice in our lifetime has brought untold sorrow to mankind, and

to reaffirm faith in fundamental human rights, in the dignity and worth of the human person, in the equal rights of men and women and of nations large and small, and

to establish conditions under which justice and respect for the obligations arising from treaties and other sources of international law can be maintained, and

to promote social progress and better standards of life in larger freedom,

AND FOR THESE ENDS

to practice tolerance and live together in peace with one another as good neighbours, and

to unite our strength to maintain international peace and security, and

to ensure, by the acceptance of principles and the institution of methods, that armed force shall not be used, save in the common interest, and

to employ international machinery for the promotion of the economic and social advancement of all peoples,

HAVE RESOLVED TO COMBINE OUR EFFORTS TO ACCOMPLISH THESE AIMS

Accordingly, our respective Governments, through representatives assembled in the city of San Francisco, who have exhibited their full powers found to be in good and due form, have agreed to the present Charter of the United Nations and do hereby establish an international organization to be known as the United Nations.

Chapter I

PURPOSES AND PRINCIPLES

Article 1

The Purposes of the United Nations are:

1. To maintain international peace and security, and to that end: to take effective collective measures for the prevention and removal of threats to the peace, and for the suppression of acts of aggression or other breaches of the peace, and to bring about by peaceful means, and in conformity with the principles of justice and international law adjustment or settlement of international disputes or situations which might lead to a breach of the peace;

2. To develop friendly relations among nations based on respect for the principle of equal rights and self-determination of peoples, and to take other appropriate measures to strengthen universal peace;

3. To achieve international co-operation in solving international problems of an economic, social, cultural, or humanitarian character, and in promoting and encouraging respect for human rights and for fundamental freedoms for all without distinction as to race, sex, language, or religion; and

4. To be a center for harmonizing the actions of nations in the attainment of these common ends.

Article 2

The Organization and its Members, in pursuit of the Purposes stated in Article 1, shall act in accordance with the following Principles.

1. The Organization is based on the principle of the sovereign equality of all its members.

2. All Members, in order to ensure to all of them the rights and benefits resulting from membership, shall fulfil in good faith the obligations assumed by them in accordance with the present Charter.

3. All Members shall settle their international disputes by peaceful means in such a manner that international peace and security, and justice, are not endangered.

4. All Members shall refrain in their international relations from the threat or use of force against the territorial integrity or political independence of any state, or in any other manner inconsistent with the Purposes of the United Nations.

5. All Members shall give the United Nations every assistance in any action it takes in accordance with the present Charter, and shall refrain from giving assistance to any state against which the United Nations is taking preventive or enforcement action.

6. The Organization shall ensure that states which are not Members of the United Nations act in accordance with these Principles so far as may be necessary for the maintenance of international peace and security.

7. Nothing contained in the present Charter shall authorize the United Nations to intervene in matters which are essentially within the domestic jurisdiction of any state or shall require the Members to submit such matters to settlement under the present Charter; but this principle shall not prejudice the application of enforcement measures under Chapter VII.

Chapter II

MEMBERSHIP

Article 3

The original Members of the United Nations shall be the states which, having participated in the United Nations Conference on International Organization at San Francisco, or having previously signed the Declaration by United Nations of 1 January 1942, sign the present Charter and ratify it in accordance with Article 110.

Article 4

1. Membership in the United Nations is open to all other peace-loving states which accept the obligations contained in the present Charter and, in the judgement of the Organization, are able and willing to carry out these obligations.

2. The admission of any such state to membership in the United Nations will be effected by a decision of the General Assembly upon the recommendation of the Security Council.

Article 5

A Member of the United Nations against which preventive or enforcement action has been taken by the Security Council may be suspended from the exercise of the rights and privileges of membership by the General Assembly upon the recommendation of the Security Council. The exercise of these rights and privileges may be restored by the Security Council.

Article 6

A Member of the United Nations which has persistently violated the Principles contained in the present Charter may be expelled from the Organization by the General Assembly upon the recommendation of the Security Council.

Chapter III

ORGANS

Article 7

1. There are established as the principal organs of the United Nations: a General Assembly, a Security Council, an Economic and Social Council, a Trusteeship Council, an International Court of Justice, and a Secretariat.

2. Such subsidiary organs as may be found necessary may be established in accordance with the present Charter.

Article 8

The United Nations shall place no restrictions on the eligibility of men and women to participate in any capacity and under conditions of equality in its principal and subsidiary organs.

Chapter IV

THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY

Composition

Article 9

1. The General Assembly shall consist of all the Members of the United Nations.

2. Each Member shall have not more than five representatives in the General Assembly.

Functions and Powers

Article 10

The General Assembly may discuss any questions or any matters within the scope of the present Charter or relating to the powers and functions of any organs provided for in the present Charter, and, except as provided in Article 12, may make recommendations to the Members of the United Nations or to the Security Council or to both on any such questions or matters.

Article 11

1. The General Assembly may consider the general principles of co-operation in the maintenance of international peace and security, including the principles governing disarmament and the regulation of armaments, and may make recommendations with regard to such principles to the Members or to the Security Council or to both.

2. The General Assembly may discuss any questions relating to the maintenance of international peace and security brought before by any Member of the United Nations, or the Security Council, or by a state which is not a Member of the United Nations in accordance with Article 35, paragraph 2, and, except as provided in Article 12, may make recommendations with regard to any such questions to the state or states concerned or to the Security Council or to both. Any such question on which action is necessary shall be referred to the Security Council by the General Assembly either before or after discussion.

3. The General Assembly may call the attention of the Security Council to situations which are likely to endanger international peace and security.

4. The powers of the General Assembly set forth in this Article shall not limit the general scope of Article 10.

Article 12

1. While the Security Council is exercising in respect of any dispute or situation the functions assigned to it in the present Charter, the General Assembly shall not make any recommendation with regard to that dispute or situation unless the Security Council so requests.

2. The Secretary-General, with the consent of the Security Council, shall notify the General Assembly at each session of any matters relative to the maintenance of international peace and security which are being dealt with by the Security Council and shall similarly notify the General Assembly, or the Members of the United Nations if the General Assembly is not in session, immediately the Security Council ceases to deal with such matters.

Article 13

1. The General Assembly shall initiate studies and make recommendations for the purpose of:

a. promoting international co-operation in the political field and encouraging the progressive development of international law and its codification;

b. promoting international co-operation in the economic, social, cultural, educational, and health fields, and assisting in the realization of human rights and fundamental freedoms for all without distinction as to race, sex, language, or religion.

2. The further responsibilities, functions and powers of the General Assembly with respect to matters mentioned in paragraph 1(b) above are set forth in Chapters IX and X.

Article 14

Subject to the provisions of Article 12, the General Assembly may recommend measures for the peaceful adjustment of any situation, regardless of origin, which it deems likely to impair the general welfare or friendly relations among nations, including situations resulting from a violation of the provisions of the present Charter setting forth the Purposes and Principles of the United Nations.

Article 15

1. The General Assembly shall receive and consider annual and special reports from the Security Council; these reports shall include an account of the measures that the Security Council has decided upon or taken to maintain international peace and security.

2. The General Assembly shall receive and consider reports from the other organs of the United Nations.

Article 16

The General Assembly shall perform such functions with respect to the international trusteeship system as are assigned to it under Chapters XII and XIII, including the approval of the trusteeship agreements for areas not designated as strategic.

Article 17

1. The General Assembly shall consider and approve the budget of the Organization.

2. The expenses of the Organization shall be borne by the Members as apportioned by the General Assembly.

3. The General Assembly shall consider and approve any financial and budgetary arrangements with specialized agencies referred to in Article 57 and shall examine the administrative budgets of such specialized agencies with a view to making recommendations to the agencies concerned.

Article 18

1. Each member of the General Assembly shall have one vote.

2. Decisions of the General Assembly on important questions shall be made by a two-thirds majority of the members present and voting. These questions shall include: recommendations with respect to the maintenance of international peace and security, the election of the non-permanent members of the Security Council, the election of the members of the Economic and Social Council, the election of members of the Trusteeship Council in accordance with paragraph 1(c) of Article 86, the admission of new Members to the United Nations, the suspension of the rights and privileges of membership, the expulsion of Members, questions relating to the operation of the trusteeship system, and budgetary questions.

3. Decisions on other questions, including the determination of additional categories of questions to be decided by a two-thirds majority, shall be made by a majority of the members present and voting.

Article 19

A Member of the United Nations which is in arrears in the payment of its financial contributions to the Organization shall have no vote in the General Assembly if the amount of its arrears equals or exceeds the amount of the contributions due from it for the preceding two full years. The General Asembly may, nevertheless, permit such a Member to vote if it is satisfied that the failure to pay is due to conditions beyond the control of the Member.

Procedure

Article 20

The General Assembly shall meet in regular annual sessions and in such special sessions as occasion may require. Special sessions shall be convoked by the Secretary-General at the request of the Security Council or of a majority of the Members of the United Nations.

Article 21

The General Assembly shall adopt its own rules of procedure. It shall elect its President for each session.

Article 22

The General Assembly may establish such subsidiary organs as it deems necessary for the performance of its functions.

Chapter V

THE SECURITY COUNCIL

COMPOSITION

Article 23

1. The Security Council shall consist of fifteen Members of the United Nations. The Republic of China, France, the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, and the United States of America shall be permanent members of the Security Council. The General Assembly shall elect ten other Members of the United Nations to be non-permanent members of the Security Council, due regard being specially paid, in the first instance to the contribution of Members of the United Nations to the maintenance of international peace and security and to the other purposes of the Organization, and also to equitable geographical distribution.

2. The non-permanent members of the Security Council shall be elected for a term of two years. In the first election of the non-permanent members after the increase of the membership of the Security Council from eleven to fifteen, two of the four additional members shall be chosen for a term of one year. A retiring member shall not be eligible for immediate re-election.

3. Each member of the Security Council shall have one representative.

Functions and Powers

Article 24

1. In order to ensure prompt and effective action by the United Nations, its Members confer on the Security Council primary responsibility for the maintenance of international peace and security, and agree that in carrying out its duties under this responsibility the Security Council acts on their behalf.

2. In discharging these duties the Security Council shall act in accordance with the Purposes and Principles of the United Nations. The specific powers granted to the Security Council for the discharge of these duties are laid down in chapters VI, VII, VIII, and XII.

3. The Security Council shall submit annual and, when necessary, special reports to the General Assembly for its consideration.

Article 25

The Members of the United Nations agree to accept and carry out the decisions of the Security Council in accordance with its present Charter.

Article 26

In order to promote the establishment and maintenance of international peace and security with the least diversion for armaments of the world’s human and economic resources, the Security Council shall be responsible for formulation, with the assistance of the Military Staff Committee referred to in Article 47, plans to be submitted to the Members of the United Nations for the establishment of a system for the regulation of armaments.

Voting

Article 27

1. Each member of the Security Council shall have one vote.

2. Decisions of the Security Council on procedural matters shall be made by an affirmative vote of nine members.

3. Decisions of the Security Council on all other matters shall be made by an affirmative vote of nine members including the concurring votes of the permanent members; provided that, in decisions under Chapter VI, and under paragraph 3 of Article 52, a party to a dispute shall abstain from voting.

Procedure

Article 28

1. The Security Council shall be so organized as to be able to function continuously. Each member of the Security Council shall for this purpose be represented at all times at the seat of the Organization.

2. The Security Council shall hold periodic meetings at which each of its members may, if it so desires, be represented by a member of the government or by some other specially designated representative.

3. The Security Council may hold meetings at such places other than the seat of the Organization as in its judgment will best facilitate its work.

Article 29

The Security Council may establish such subsidiary organs as it deems necessary for the performance of its functions.

Article 30

The Security Council shall adopt its own rules of procedure, including the method of selecting its President.

Article 31

Any Member of the United Nations which is not a member of the Security Council may participate, without vote, in the discussion of any question brought before the Security Council whenever the latter considers that the interests of that Member are specially affected.

Article 32

Any Member of the United Nations which is not a member of the Security Council or any state which is not a Member of the United Nations, if it is a party to a dispute under consideration by the Security Council, shall be invited to participate, without vote, in the discussion relating to the dispute. The Security Council shall lay down such conditions as it deems just for the participation of a state which is not a Member of the United Nations.

Chapter VI

PACIFIC SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES

Article 33

1. The parties to any dispute, the continuance of which is likely to endanger the maintenance of international peace and security, shall, first of all, seek a solution by negotiation, enquiry, mediation, conciliation, arbitration, judicial settlement, resort to regional agencies or arrangements, or other peaceful means of their own choice.

2. The Security Council shall, when it deems necessary, call upon the parties to settle their dispute by such means.

Article 34

The Security Council may investigate any dispute, or any situation which might lead to international friction or give rise to a dispute, in order to determine whether the continuance of the dispute or situation is likely to endanger the maintenance of international peace and security.

Article 35

1. Any Member of the United Nations may bring any dispute, or any situation of the nature referred to in Article 34, to the attention of the Security Council or of the General Assembly.

2. A state which is not a Member of the United Nations may bring to the attention of the Security Council or of the General Assembly any dispute to which it is a party if it accepts in advance, for the purposes of the dispute, the obligations of pacific settlement provided in the present Charter.

3. The proceedings of the General Assembly in respect of matters brought to its attention under this Article will be subject to the provisions of Articles 11 and 12.

Article 36

1. The Security Council may, at any stage of a dispute of the nature referred to in Article 33 or of a situation of like nature, recommend appropriate procedures or methods of adjustment.

2. The Security Council should take into consideration any procedures for the settlement of the dispute which have already been adopted by the parties

3. In making recommendations under this Article the Security Council should also take into consideration that legal disputes should as a general rule be referred by the parties to the International Court of Justice in accordance with the provisions of the Statute of the Court.

Article 37

1. Should the parties to a dispute of the nature referred to in Article 33 fail to settle it by the means indicated in that Article, they shall refer it to the Security Council.

2. If the Security Council deems that the continuance of the dispute is in fact likely to endanger the maintenance of international peace and security, it shall decide whether to take action under Article 36 or to recommend such terms of settlement as it may consider appropriate.

Article 38

Without prejudice to the provisions of Articles 33 to 37, the Security Council may, if all the parties to any dispute so request, make recommendations to the parties with a view to a pacific settlement of the dispute.

Chapter VII

ACTION WITH RESPECT TO THREATS TO THE PEACE, BREACHES OF THE PEACE, AND ACTS OF AGGRESSION

Article 39

The Security Council shall determine the existence of any threat to the peace, breach of the peace, or act of aggression and shall make recommendations, or decide what measures shall be taken in accordance with Articles 41 and 42, to maintain or restore international peace and security.

Article 40

In order to prevent an aggravation of the situation, the Security Council may, before making the recommendations or deciding upon the measures provided for in Article 39, call upon the parties concerned to comply with such provisional measures as it deems necessary or desirable. Such provisional measures shall be without prejudice to the rights, claims, or position of the parties concerned. The Security Council shall duly take account of failure to comply with such provisional measures.

Article 41

The Security Council may decide what measures not involving the use of armed force are to be employed to give effect to its decisions, and it may call upon the Members of the United Nations to apply such measures. These may include complete or partial interruption of economic relations and of rail, sea, air, postal, telegraphic, radio, and other means of communication, and the severance of diplomatic relations.

Article 42

Should the Security Council consider that measures provided for in Article 41 would be inadequate or have proved to be inadequate, it may take such action by air, sea, or land forces as may be necessary to maintain or restore international peace and security. Such action may include demonstrations, blockade, and other operations by air, sea, or land forces of Members of the United Nations.

Article 43

1. All Members of the United Nations, in order to contribute to the maintenance of international peace and security, undertake to make available to the Security Council, on its call and in accordance with a special agreement or agreements, armed forces, assistance, and facilities, including rights of passage, necessary for the purpose of maintaining international peace and security.

2. Such agreement or agreements shall govern the numbers and types of forces, their degree of readiness and general location, and the nature of the facilities and assistance to be provided.

3. The agreement or agreements shall be negotiated as soon as possible on the initiative of the Security Council. They shall be concluded between the Security Council and Members or between the Security Council and Members or between the Security Council and groups of Members and shall be subject to ratification by the signatory states in accordance with their respective constitutional process.

Article 44

When the Security Council has decided to use force it shall, before calling upon a Member not represented on it to provide armed forces in fulfillment of the obligations assumed under Article 43, invite that Member, if the Member so desires, to participate in the decisions of the Security Council concerning the employment of contingents of that Member’s armed forces.

Article 45

In order to enable the United Nations to take urgent military measures, Members shall hold immediately available national air-force contingents for combined international enforcement action. The strength and degree of readiness of these contingents and plans for their combined action shall be determined within the limits laid down in the special agreement or agreements referred to in Article 43, by the Security Council with assistance of the Military Staff Committee.

Article 46

Plans for the application of armed force shall be made by the Security Council with the assistance of the Military Staff Committee.

Article 47

1. There shall be established a Military Staff Committee to advise and assist the Security Council on all questions relating to the Security Council’s military requirements for the maintenance of international peace and security, the employment and command of forces placed at its disposal, the regulation of armaments, and possible disarmament.

2. The Military Staff Committee shall consist of the Chiefs of Staff of the permanent members of the Security Council or their representatives. Any Member of the United Nations not permanently represented on the Committee shall be invited to the Committee to be associated with it when the efficient discharge of the committee’s responsibilities requires the participation of that Member in its work.

3. The Military Staff Committee shall be responsible under the Security Council for the strategic direction of any armed forces placed at the disposal of the Security Council. Questions relating to the command of such forces shall be worked out subsequently.

4. The Military Staff Committee, with the authorization of the Security Council and after consultation with appropriate regional agencies, may establish regional sub-committees.

Article 48

1. The action required to carry out the decisions of the Security Council for the maintenance of international peace and security shall be taken by all the Members of the United Nations or by some of them, as the Security Council may determine.

2. Such decisions shall be carried out by the Members of the United Nations directly and through their action in the appropriate international agencies of which they are members.

Article 49

The Members of the United Nations shall join in affording mutual assistance in carrying out the measures decided upon by the Security Council.

Article 50

If preventive or enforcement measures against any state are taken by the Security Council, any other state, whether a Member of the United Nations or not, which finds itself confronted with special economic problems arising from the carrying out of those measures shall have the right to consult the Security Council with regard to a solution of those problems.

Article 51

Nothing in the present Charter shall impair the inherent right of individual or collective self-defence if an armed attack occurs against a Member of the United Nations, until the Security Council has taken measures necessary to maintain international peace and security. Measures taken by Members in the exercise of this right of self-defence shall be immediately reported to the Security Council and shall not in any way affect the authority and responsibility of the Security Council under the present Charter to take at any time such action as it deems necessary in order to maintain or restore international peace and security.

Chapter VIII

REGIONAL ARRANGEMENTS

Article 52

1. Nothing in the present Charter precludes the existence of regional arrangements or agencies for dealing with such matters relating to the maintenance of international peace and security as are appropriate for regional action, provided that such arrangements or agencies and their activities are consistent with the Purposes and Principles of the United Nations.

2. The Members of the United Nations entering into such arrangements or constituting such agencies shall make every effort to achieve pacific settlement of local disputes through such regional arrangements or by such regional agencies before referring them to the Security Council.

3. The Security Council shall encourage the development of pacific settlement of local disputes through such regional arrangements or by such regional agencies either on the initiative of the states concerned or by reference from the Security Council.

4. This Article in no way impairs the application of Articles 34 and 35.

Article 53

1. The Security Council shall, where appropriate, utilize such regional arrangements or agencies for enforcement action under the authority. But no enforcement action shall be taken under regional arrangements or by regional agencies without the authorization of the Security Council, with the exception of measures against any enemy state, as defined in paragraph 2 of this Article, provided for pursuant to Article 107 or in regional arrangements directed against renewal of aggressive policy on the part of any such state, until such time as the Organization may, on request of the Governments concerned, be charged with the responsibility for preventing further aggression by such a state.

2. The term enemy state as used in paragraph 1 of this Article applies to any state which during the Second World War has been an enemy of any signatory of the present Charter.

Article 54

The Security Council shall at all times be kept fully informed of activities undertaken or in contemplation under regional arrangements or by regional agencies for the maintenance of international peace and security.

Chapter IX

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL CO-OPERATION

Article 55

With a view to the creation of conditions of stability and well-being which are necessary for peaceful and friendly relations among nations based on respect for the principle of equal rights and self-determination of peoples, the United Nations shall promote:

a. Higher standards of living, full employment, and conditions of economic and social progress and development;

b. solutions of international economic social, health, and related problems; and international cultural and educational co-operation; and

c. universal respect for, and observance of, human rights and fundamental freedoms for all without distinction as to race, sex, language or religion.

Article 56

All Members pledge themselves to take joint and separate action in co-operation with the Organization for the achievement of the purposes set forth in Article 55.

Article 57

1. The various specialied agencies, established by intergovernmental agreement and having wide international responsibilities, as defined in their basic instruments, in economic, social, cultural, educational, health and related field, shall be brought into relationship with the United Nations in accordance with the provisions of Article 63.

2. Such agencies thus brought into relationship with the United Nations are hereinafter referred to as specialized agencies.

Article 58

The Organization shall make recommendations for the co-ordination of the policies and activities of the specialized agencies.

Article 59

The Organization shall, where appropriate, initiate negotiations among the states concerned for the creation of any new specialized agencies required for the accomplishment of the purposes set forth in Article 55.

Article 60

Responsibility for the discharge of the functions of the Organization set forth in this Chapter shall be vested in the General Assembly and, under the authority of the General assembly, in the Economic and Social council, which whall have for this purpose the powers set forth in Chapter X.

Chapter X

THE ECONOMIC AND SOCIAL COUNCIL

Composition

Article 61

1. The Economic and Social Council shall consist of twenty-seven Members of the United Nations elected by the General Assembly.

2. Subject to the provisions of paragraph 3, nine members of the Economic and Social Council shall be elected each year for a term of three years. A retiring member shall be eligible for immediate re-election.

3. At the first election after the increase in the membership of the Economic and Social Council from eighteen to twenty-seven members, in addition to the members elected in place of the six members whose term of office expires at the end of that year, nine additional members shall be elected. Of these nine additional members, the term of office of three members so elected shall expire at the end of one year, and of three other members at the end of two years, in accordance with arrangements made by the General Assembly.

4. Each member of the Economic and Social Council shall have one representative.

Functions and Powers

Article 62

1. The Economic and Social Council may make or initiate studies and reports with respect to international economic, social, cultural, educational, health, and related matters and may make recommendations with respect to any such matters to the General Assembly, to the Members of the United Nations, and to the specialized agencies concerned.

2. It may make recommendations for the purpose of promoting respect for, and observance of, human rights and fundamental freedoms for all.

3. It may prepare draft conventions for submission to the General Assembly, with respect to matters falling within its competence.

4. It may call, in accordance with the rules prescribed by the United Nations, international conferences on matters falling within its competence.

Article 63

1. The Economic and Social Council may enter into agreements with any of the agencies referred to in Article 57, defining the terms on which the agency concerned shall be brought into relationship with the United Nations. Such agreements shall be subject to approval by the General Assembly.

2. It may co-ordinate the activities of the specialized agencies through consultation with and recommendations to such agencies and through recommendations to the General Assembly and to the Members of the United Nations.

Article 64

1. The Economic and Social Council may take appropriate steps to obtain regular reports from the specialized agencies. It may make arrangements with the Members of the United Nations and with the specialized agencies to obtain reports on the steps taken to give effect to its own recommendations and to recommendations on matters falling within its competence made by the General Assembly.

2. It may communicate its observations on these reports to the General Assembly.

Article 65

The Economic and Social Council may furnish information to the Security Council and shall assist the Security Council upon its request.

Article 66

1. The Economic and Social Council shall perform such functions as fall within its competence in connexion with the carrying out of the recommendations of the General Assembly.

2. It may, with the approval of the General Assembly, perform services at the request of Members of the United Nations and at the request of specialized agencies.

3. It shall perform such other functions as are specified elsewhere in the present Charter or as may be assigned to it by the General Assembly.

Voting

Article 67

1. Each member of the Economic and Social Council shall have one vote.

2. Decisions of the Economic and Social Council shall be made by a majority of the members present and voting.

Procedure

Article 68

The Economic and Social Council shall set up commissions in economic and social fields for the promotion of human rights and such other commissions as may be required for the performance of its functions.

Article 69

The Economic and Social Council shall invite any Member of the United Nations to participate, without vote, in its deliberations on any matter of particular concern to that Member.

Article 70

The Economic and Social Council may make arrangements for representatives of the specialized agencies to participate, without vote, in its deliberations and in those of the commissions established by it, and for its representatives to participate in the deliberations of the specialized agencies.

Article 71

The Economic and Social Council may make suitable arrangement for consultation with non-governmental organizations which are concerned with matters within its competence. Such arrangements may be made with international organizations and, where appropriate, with national organizations after consultation with the Member of the United Nations concerned.

Article 72

1. The Economic and Social Council shall adopt its own rules of procedure, including the method of selecting its President.

2. The Economic and Social Council shall meet as required in accordance with its rules, which shall include provision for the convening of meetings on the request of a majority of its members.

Chapter XI

DECLARATION REGARDING NON-SELF-GOVERNING TERRITORIES

Article 73

Members of the United Nations which have or assume responsibilities for the administration of territories whose peoples have not yet attained a full measure of self-government recognize the principle that the interests of the inhabitants of these territories are paramount, and accept as a sacred trust the obligation to promote to the utmost, within the system of international peace and security established by the present Charter, the well-being of the inhabitants of these territories, and, to this end:

a. to ensure, with due respect for the culture of the peoples concerned, their political, economic, social, and educational advancement, their just treatment, and their protection against abuses;

b. to develop self-government, to take due account of the political aspirations of the peoples, and to assist them in the progressive development of their free political institutions, according to the particular circumstances of each territory and its peoples and their varying stages of advancement;

c. to further international peace and security;

d. to promote constructive measures of development, to encourage research, and to co-operate with one another and, when and where appropriate, with specialized international bodies with a view to the practical achievement of the social, economic, and scientific purposes set forth in this Article; and

e. to transmit regularly to the Secretary-General for information purposes, subject to such limitation as security and constitutional considerations may require, statistical and other information of a technical nature relating to economic, social, and educational conditions in the territories for which they are respectively responsible other than those territories to which Chapters XII and XIII apply.

Article 74

Members of the United Nations also agree that their policy in respect of the territories to which this Chapter applies, no less than in respect of their metropolitan areas, must be based on the general principle of good-neighbourliness, due account being taken of the interests and well-being of the rest of the world, in social, economic, and commercial matters.

Chapter XII

INTERNATIONAL TRUSTEESHIP SYSTEM

Article 75

The United Nations shall establish under its authority an international trusteeship system for the administration and supervision of such territories as may be placed thereunder by subsequent individual agreements. These territories are hereinafter referred to as trust territories.

Article 76

The basic objectives of the trusteeship system, in accordance with the Purposes of the United Nations laid down in Article 1 of the present Charter, shall be:

a. to further international peace and security;

b. to promote the political, economic, social, and educational advancement of the inhabitants of the trust territories, and their progressive development towards self-government or independence as may be appropriate to the particular circumstances of each territory and its peoples and the freely expressed wishes of the peoples concerned, and as may be provided by the terms of each trusteeship agreement;

c. to encourage respect for human rights and for fundamental freedoms for all without distinction as to race, sex, language, or religion, and to encourage recognition of the interdependence of the peoples of the world; and

d. to ensure equal treatment in social, economic, and commercial matters for all Members of the United Nations and their nationals, and also equal treatment for the latter in the administration of justice, without prejudice to the attainment of the fore going objectives and subject to the provisions of Article 80.

Article 77

1. The trusteeship system shall apply to such territories in the following categories as may be placed thereunder by means of trusteeship agreements:

a. territories now held under mandate;

b. territories which may be detached from enemy states as a result of the Second World War; and

c. territories voluntarily placed under the system by states responsible for their administration.

2. It will be a matter for subsequent agreement as to which territories in the foregoing categories will be brought under the trusteeship system and upon what terms.

Article 78

The trusteeship system shall not apply to territories which have become Members of the United Nations, relationship among which shall be based on respect for the principle of sovereign equality.

Article 79

The terms of trusteeship for each territory to be placed under the trusteeship system, including any alteration or amendment, shall be agreed upon by the states directly concerned, including the mandatory power in the cases of territories held under mandate by a case of territories held under mandate by a Member of the United Nations, and shall be approved as provided for in Articles 83 and 85.

Article 80

1. Except as may be agreed upon in individual trusteeship agreements, made under Articles 77, 79, and 81, placing each territory under the trusteeship system, and until such agreements have been concluded, nothing in this Chapter shall be construed in or of itself to alter in any manner the rights whatsoever of any states or any peoples or the terms of existing international instruments to which members of the United Nations may respectively be parties.

2. Paragraph 1 of this Article shall not be interpreted as giving grounds for delay or postponement of the negotiation and conclusion of agreements for placing mandated and other territories under the trusteeship system as provided for in Article 77.

Article 81

The trusteeship agreement shall in each case include the terms under which the trust territory will be administered and designate the authority which will exercise the administration of the trust territory. Such authority, hereinafter called the administering authority, may be one or more states or the Organization itself.

Article 82

There may be designated, in any trusteeship agreement, a strategic area or areas which may include part or all of the trust territory to which the agreement applies, without prejudice to any special agreement or agreements made under Article 43.

Article 83

1. All functions of the United Nations relating to strategic areas, including the approval of the terms of the trusteeship agreements and of their alteration or amendment, shall be exercised by the Security Council.

2. The basic objectives set forth in Article 76 shall be applicable to the people of each strategic area.

3. The Security Council shall, subject to the provisions of the trusteeship agreements and without prejudice to security considerations, avail itself of the assistance of the Trusteeship Council to perform those functions of the United Nations under the trusteeship system relating to political, economic, social, and educational matters in the strategic areas.

Article 84

It shall be the duty of the administering authority to ensure that the trust territory shall play its part in the maintenance of international peace and security. To this end the administering authority may make use of volunteer forces, facilities, and assistance from the trust territory in carrying out the obligations towards the Security Council undertaken in this regard by the administering authority, as well as for local defence and the maintenance of law and order within the trust territory.

Article 85

1. The functions of the United Nations with regard to trusteeship agreements for all areas not designated as strategic, including the approval of the terms of the trusteeship agreements and of their alteration or amendment, shall be exercised by the General Assembly.

2. The Trusteeship Council, operating under the authority of the General Assembly, shall assist the General Assembly in carrying out these functions.

Chapter XIII

THE TRUSTEESHIP COUNCIL

Composition

Article 86

1. The Trusteeship Council shall consist of the following Members of the United Nations:

a. those Members administering trust territories;

b. such of those Members mentioned by name in Article 23 as are not administering trust territories; and

c. as many other Members elected for three-year terms by the General Assembly as may be necessary to ensure that the total number of members of the Trusteeship Council is equally divided between those Members of the United Nations which administer trust territories and those which do not.

2. Each member of the Trusteeship Council shall designate one specially qualified person to represent it therein.

Functions and Powers

Article 87

The General Assembly and, under its authority, the Trusteeship Council, in carrying out their functions, may:

a. consider reports submitted by the administering authority;

b. accept petitions and examine them in consultation with the administering authority;

c. provide for periodic visits to the respective trust territories at times agreed upon with the administering authority; and

d. take these and other actions in conformity with the terms of the trusteeship agreements.

Article 88

The Trusteeship Council shall formulate a questionnaire on the political, economic, social, and educational advancement of the inhabitants of each trust territory, and the administering authority for each trust territory within the competence of the General Assembly shall make an annual report to the General Assembly upon the basis of such questionnaire.

Voting

Article 89

1. Each member of the Trusteeship Council shall have one vote.

2. Decisions of the Trusteeship Council shall be made by a majority of the members present and voting.

Procedure

Article 90

1. The Trusteeship Council shall adopt its own rules of procedure, including the method of selecting its President.

2. The Trusteeship Council shall meet as required in accordance with its rules, which shall include provision for the convening of meetings on the request of a majority of its members.

Article 91

The Trusteeship Council shall, when appropriate, avail itself of the assistance of Economic and Social Council and of the specialized agencies in regard to matters with which they are respectively concerned.

Chapter XIV

THE INTERNATIONAL COURT OF JUSTICE

Article 92

The International Court of Justice shall be the principal judicial organ of the United Nations. It shall function in accordance with the annexed Statute, which is based upon the Statute of the Permanent Court of International Justice and forms an integral part of the present Charter.

Article 93

1. All Members of the United Nations are ipso facto parties to the Statute of the International Court of Justice.

2. A state which is not a Member of the United Nations may become a party to the Statute of the International Court of Justice on conditions to be determined in each case by the General Assembly upon the recommendation of the Security Council.

Article 94

1. Each Member of the United Nations undertakes to comply with the decision of the International Court of Justice in any case to which it is a party.

2. If any party to a case fails to perform the obligations incumbent upon it under a judgment rendered by the Court, the other party may have recourse to the Security Council, which may, if it deems necessary, make recommendations or decide upon measures to be taken to give effect to the judgment.

Article 95

Nothing in the present Charter shall prevent Members of the United Nations from entrusting the solution of their differences to other tribunals by virtue of agreements already in existence or which may be concluded in the future.

Article 96

1. The General Assembly or the Security Council may request the International Court of Justice to give an advisory opinion on any legal question.

2. Other organs of the United Nations and specialized agencies, which may at any time be so authorized by the General Assembly may also request advisory opinions of the Court on legal questions arising within the scope of their activities.

Chapter XV

THE SECRETARIAT

Article 97

The Secretariat shall comprise a Secretary-General and such staff as the Organization may require. The Secretary-General shall be appointed by the General Assembly upon the recommendation of the Security Council. He shall be the chief administrative officer of the Organization.

Article 98

The Secretary-General shall act in that capacity in all meetings of the General Assembly, of the Security Council, of the Economic and Social Council, and of the Trusteeship Council, and shall perform such other functions as are entrusted to him by these organs. The Secretary-General shall make an annual report to the General Assembly on the work of the Organization.

Article 99

The Secretary-General may bring to the attention of the Security Council any matter which in his opinion may threaten the maintenance of international peace and security.

Article 100

1. In the performance of their duties the Secretary-General and the staff shall not seek or receive instructions from any government or from any other authority external to the Organization. They shall refrain from any action which might reflect on their position as international officials responsible only to the Organization.

2. Each Member of the United Nations undertakes to respect the exclusively international character of the responsibilities of the Secretary-General and the staff and not to seek to influence them in the discharge of their responsibilities.

Article 101

1. The staff shall be appointed by the Secretary-General under regulations established by the General Assembly.

2. Appropriate staffs shall be permanently assigned to the Economic and Social Council, the Trusteeship Council, and, as required, to other organs of the United Nations. These staffs shall form a part of the Secretariat.

3. The paramount consideration in the employment of the staff and in the determination of the conditions of service shall be the necessity of securing the highest standards of efficiency, competence, and integrity. Due regard shall be paid to the importance of recruiting the staff on as wide a geographical basis as possible.

Chapter XVI

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

Article 102

1. Every treaty and every international agreement entered into by any Member of the United Nations after the present Charter comes into force shall as soon as possible be registered with the Secretariat and published by it.

2. No party to any such treaty or international agreement which has not been registered in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 1 of this Article may invoke that treaty or agreement before any organ of the United Nations.

Article 103

In the event of a conflict between the obligations of the Members of the United Nations under the present Charter and their obligations under any other international agreement, their obligations under the present Charter shall prevail.

Article 104

The Organization shall enjoy in the territory of each of its Members such legal capacity as may be necessary for the exercise of its functions and the fulfillment of its purposes.

Article 105

1. The Organization shall enjoy in the territory of each of its Members such privileges and immunities as are necessary for the fulfillment of its purposes.

2. Representatives of the Members of the United Nations and officials of the Organization shall similarly enjoy such privileges and immunities as are necessary for the independent exercise of their functions in connexion with the Organization.

3. The General Assembly may make recommendations with a view to determining the details of the application of paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article or may propose conventions to the Members of the United Nations for this purpose.

Chapter XVII

TRANSITIONAL SECURITY ARRANGEMENTS

Article 106

Pending the coming into force of such special agreements referred to in Article 43 as in the opinion of the Security Council enable it to begin the exercise of its responsibilities under Article 42, the parties to the Four-Nation Declaration, signed at Moscow, 30 October 1943, and France, shall, in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 5 of that Declaration, consult with one another and as occasion requires with other Members of the United Nations with a view to such joint action on behalf of the Organization as may be necessary for the purpose of maintaining international peace and security.

Article 107

Nothing in the present Charter shall invalidate or preclude action, in relation to any state which during the Second World War has been an enemy of any signatory to the present Charter, taken or authorized as a result of that war by the Governments having responsibility for such action.

Chapter XVIII

AMENDMENTS

Article 108

Amendments to the present Charter shall come into force for all Members of the United Nations when they have been adopted by a vote of two-thirds of the members of the General Assembly and ratified in accordance with their respective constitutional processes by two-thirds of the Members of the United Nations, including all the permanent members of the Security Council.

Article 109

1. General Conference of the Members of the United Nations for the purpose of reviewing the present Charter may be held at a date and place to be fixed by a two-thirds vote of the members of the General Assembly and by a vote of any nine members of the Security Council. Each Member of the United Nations shall have one vote in the conference.

2. Any alteration of the present Charter recommended by a two-thirds vote of the conference shall take effect when ratified in accordance with their respective constitutional processes by two-thirds of the Members of the United Nations including all the permanent members of the Security Council.

3. If such a conference has not been held before the tenth annual session of the General Assembly following the coming into force of the present Charter, the proposal to call such a conference shall be placed on the agenda of that session of the General Assembly, and the conference shall be held if so decided by a majority vote of the members of the General Assembly and by a vote of any seven members of the Security Council.

Chapter XIX

RATIFICATION AND SIGNATURE

Article 110

1. The present Charter shall be ratified by the signatory states in accordance with their respective constitutional processes.

2. The ratifications shall be deposited with the Government of the United States of America, which shall notify all the signatory states of each deposit as well as the Secretary-General of the Organization when he has been appointed.

3. The present Charter shall come into force upon the deposit of ratifications by the Republic of China, France, the Union of Soviet Socialist Republics, the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, and the United States of America, and by a majority of the other signatory states. A protocol of the ratifications deposited shall thereupon be drawn up by the Government of the United States of America which shall communicate copies thereof to all the signatory states.

4. The states signatory to the present Charter which ratify it after it has come into force will become original Members of the United Nations on the date of the deposit of their respective ratifications.

Article 111

The present Charter, of which the Chinese, French, Russian, English, and Spanish texts are equally authentic, shall remain deposited in the archives of the Government of the United States of America. Duly certified copies thereof shall be transmitted by that Government to the Governments of the other signatory states.

IN FAITH WHEREOF the representatives of the Governments of the United Nations have signed the present Charter.

DONE at the city of San Francisco the twenty-sixth day of June, one thousand nine hundred and forty-five.

STATUTE OF THE INTERNATIONAL COURT OF JUSTICE

ARTICLE 1

THE INTERNATIONAL COURT OF JUSTICE established by the Charter of the United Nations as the principal judicial organ of the United Nations shall be constituted and shall function in accordance with the provisions of the present Statute.

Chapter I

ORGANIZATION OF THE COURT

Article 2

The Court shall be composed of a body of independent judges, elected regardless of their nationality from among persons of high moral character, who possess the qualifications required in their respective countries for appointment to the highest judicial offices, or are jurisconsults of recognized competence in international law.

Article 3

1. The Court shall consist of fifteen members, no two of whom may be nationals of the same state.

2. A person who for the purposes of membership in the Court could be regarded as a national of more than one state shall be deemed to be a national of the one in which he ordinarily exercises civil and political rights.

Article 4

1. The members of the Court shall be elected by the General Assembly and by the Security Council from a list of persons nominated by the national groups in the Permanent Court of Arbitration, in accordance with the following provisions.

2. In the case of Members of the United Nations not represented in the Permanent Court of Arbitration, candidates shall be nominated by national groups appointed for this purpose by their governments under the same conditions as those prescribed for members of the Permanent Court of Arbitration by Article 44 of the Convention of The Hague of 1907 for the pacific settlement of international disputes.

3. The conditions under which a state which is a party to the present Statute but is not a Member of the United Nations may participate in electing the members of the Court shall, in the absence of a special agreement, be laid down by the General Assembly upon recommendation of the Security Council.

Article 5

1. At least three months before the date of the election, the Secretary-General of the United Nations shall address a written request to the members of the Permanent Court of Arbitration belonging to the states which are parties to the present Statute, and to the members of the national groups appointed under Article 4, paragraph 2, inviting them to undertake, within a given time, by national groups, the nomination of persons in a position to accept the duties of a member of the Court.

2. No group may nominate more than four persons, not more than two of whom shall be of their own nationality. In no case may the number of candidates nominated by a group be more than double the number of seats to be filled.

Article 6

Before making these nominations, each national group is recommended to consult its highest court of justice, its legal faculties and schools of law, and its national academics and national sections of international academies devoted to the study of law.

Article 7

1. The Secretary-General shall prepare a list in alphabetical order of all the persons thus nominated. Save as provided in Article 12, paragraph 2, these shall be the only persons eligible.

2. The Secretary-General shall submit this list to the General Assembly and to the Security Council.

Article 8

The General Assembly and the Security Council shall proceed independently of one another to elect the members of the Court.

Article 9

At every election, the electors shall bear in mind not only that the persons to be elected should individually possess the qualifications required, but also that in the body as a whole the representation of the main forms of civilization and of the principal legal systems of the world should be assured.

Article 10

1. Those candidates who obtain an absolute majority of votes in the Security Council shall be considered as elected.

2. Any vote of the Security Council, whether for the election of judges or for the appointment of members of the conference envisaged in Article 12, shall be taken without any distinction between permanent and non-permanent members of the Security Council.

3. In the event of more than one national of the same state obtaining an absolute majority of the votes both of the General Assembly and of the Security Council, the eldest of these only shall be considered as elected.

Article 11

If, after the first meeting held for the purpose of the election, one or more seats remain to be filled, a second and, if necessary, a third meeting shall take place.

Article 12

1. If, after the third meeting, one or more seats still remain unfilled, a joint conference consisting of six members, three appointed by the General Assembly and three by the Security Council, may be formed at any time at the request of either the General Assembly of the Security Council, for the purpose of choosing by the vote of an absolute majority one name for each seat still vacant, to submit to the General Assembly and the Security Council for their respective acceptance.

2. If the joint conference is unanimously agreed upon any person who fulfils the required conditions, he may be included in its list, even though he was not included in the list of nominations referred to in Article 7.

3. If the joint conference is satisfied that it will not be successful in procuring an election, those members of the Court who have already been elected shall, within a period to be fixed by the Security Council, proceed to fill the vacant seats by selection from among those candidates who have obtained votes either in the General Assembly or in the Security Council.

4. In the event of an equality of votes among the judges, the eldest judge shall have a casting vote.

Article 13

1. The members of the Court shall be elected for nine years and may be re-elected; provided, however, that of the judges elected at the first election, the terms of five judges shall expire at the end of three years and the terms of five more judges shall expire at the end of six years.

2. The judges whose terms are to expire at the end of the above-mentioned initial periods of three and six years shall be chosen by lot to be drawn by the Secretary-General immediately after the first election has been completed.

3. The members of the Court shall continue to discharge their duties until their places have been filled. Though replaced, they shall finish any cases which they may have begun.

4. In the case of the resignation of a member of the Court, the resignation shall be addressed to the President of the Court for transmission to the Secretary-General. This last notification makes the place vacant.

Article 14

Vacancies shall be filled by the same method as that laid down for the first election, subject to the following provision: the Secretary-General shall, within one month of the occurrence of the vacancy, proceed to issue the invitations provided for in Article 5, and the date of the election shall be fixed by the Security Council.

Article 15

A member of the Court elected to replace a member whose term of office has not expired shall hold office for the remainder of his predecessor’s term.

Article 16

1. No member of the Court may exercise any political or administrative function, or engage in any other occupation of a professional nature.

2. Any doubt on this point shall be settled by the decision of the Court.

Article 17

1. No member of the Court may act as agent, counsel, or advocate in any case.

2. No member may participate in the decision of any case in which he has previously taken part as agent, counsel, or advocate for one of the parties, or as a member of a national or international court, or of a commission of enquiry, or in any other capacity.

3. Any doubt on this point shall be settled by the decision of the Court.

Article 18

1. No member of the Court can be dismissed unless, in the unanimous opinion of the other members, he has ceased to fulfil the required conditions.

2. Formal notification thereof shall be made to the Secretary-General by the Registrar.

3. This notification makes the place vacant.

Article 19

The members of the Court, when engaged on the business of the Court, shall enjoy diplomatic privileges and immunities.

Article 20

Every member of the court shall, before taking up his duties, make a solemn declaration in open court that he will exercise his powers impartially and conscientiously.

Article 21

1. The Court shall elect its President and Vice-President for three years; they may be re-elected.

2. The Court shall appoint its Registrar and may provide for the appointment of such other officers as may be necessary.

Article 22

1. The seat of the court shall be established at The Hague. This, however, shall not prevent the Court from sitting and exercising its functions elsewhere whenever the Court considers it desirable.

2. The President and the Registrar shall reside at the seat of the Court.

Article 23

1. The Court shall remain permanently in session, except during the judicial vacations, the dates and duration of which shall be fixed by the Court.

2. Members of the Court are entitled to periodic leave, the dates and duration of which shall be fixed by the Court, having in mind the distance between The Hague and the home of each judge.

3. Members of the Court shall be bound, unless they are on leave or prevented from attending by illness or other serious reasons duly explained to the President, to hold themselves permanently at the disposal of the Court.

Article 24

1. If, for some special reason, a member of the Court considers that he should not take part in the decision of a particular case, he shall so inform the President.

2. If the President considers that for some special reason one of the members of the Court should not sit in a particular case, he shall give him notice accordingly.

3. If in any such case the member of the Court and the President disagree, the matter shall be settled by the decision of the Court.

Article 25

1. The full Court shall sit except when it is expressly provided otherwise in the present Statute.

2. Subject to the condition that the number of judges available to constitute the Court is not thereby reduced below eleven, the Rules of the court may provide for allowing one or more judges, according to circumstances and in rotation, to be dispensed from sitting.

3. A quorum of nine judges shall suffice to constitute the Court.

Article 26

1. The Court may from time to time form one or more chambers, composed of three or more judges as the Court may determine, for dealing with particular categories of cases; for example, labour cases and cases relating to transit and communications.

2. The Court may at any time form a chamber for dealing with a particular case. The number of judges to constitute such a chamber shall be determined by the Court with the approval of the parties.

3. Cases shall be heard and determined by the chambers provided for in this Article if the parties so request.

Article 27

A judgment given by any of the chambers provided for in Articles 26 and 29 shall be considered as rendered by the Court.

Article 28

The chambers provided for in Articles 26 and 29 may, with the consent of the parties, sit and exercise their functions elsewhere than at The Hague.

Article 29

With a view to the speedy dispatch of business, the Court shall form annually a chamber composed of five judges which, at the request of the parties, may hear and determine cases by summary procedure. In addition, two judges shall be selected for the purpose of replacing judges who find it impossible to sit.

Article 30

1. The Court shall frame rules for carrying out its functions. In particular, it shall lay down rules of procedure.

2. The Rules of the court may provide for assessors to sit with the Court or with any of its chambers, without the right to vote.

Article 31

1. Judges of the nationality of each of the parties shall retain their right to sit in the case before the Court.

2. If the Court includes upon the Bench a judge of the nationality of one of the parties, any other party may choose a person to sit as judge. Such person shall be chosen preferably from among those persons who have been nominated as candidates as provided in Articles 4 and 5.

3. If the court includes upon the Bench no judge of the nationality of the parties, each of these parties may proceed to choose a judge as provided in paragraph 2 of this Article.

4. The provisions of this Article shall apply to the case of Articles 26 and 29. In such cases, the President shall request one or, if necessary, two of the members of the court forming the chamber to give place to the members of the Court of the nationality of the parties concerned and failing such, or if they are unable to be present, to the judges specially chosen by the parties.

5. Should there be several parties in the same interest, they shall, for the purpose of the preceding provisions, be reckoned as one party only. Any doubt upon this point shall be settled by the decision of the Court.

6. Judges chosen as laid down in paragraphs 2, 3, and 4 of this Article shall fulfil the conditions required by Articles 2, 17 (paragraph 2), 20, and 24 of the present Statute. They shall take part in the decision on terms of complete equality with their colleagues.

Article 32

1. Each member of the court shall receive an annual salary.

2. The President shall receive a special annual allowance.

3. The Vice-President shall receive a special allowance for every day on which he acts as President.

4. The judges chosen under Article 31, other than members of the Court, shall receive compensation for each day on which they exercise their functions.

5. These salaries, allowances, and compensation shall be fixed by the General Assembly. They may not be decreased during the term of office.

6. The salary of the Registrar shall be fixed by the General Assembly on the proposal of the Court.

7. Regulations made by the General Assembly shall fix the conditions under which retirement pensions may be given to members of the Court and to the Registrar, and the conditions under which members of the court and the registrar shall have their travelling expenses refunded.

8. The above salaries, allowances, and compensation shall be free of all taxation.

Article 33

The expenses of the Court shall be borne by the United Nations in such a manner as shall be decided by the General Assembly.

Chapter II

COMPETENCE OF THE COURT

Article 34

1. Only states may be parties in cases before the Court.

2. The Court, subject to and in conformity with its Rules, may request of public international organizations information relevant to cases before it, and shall receive such information presented by such organizations on their own initiative.

3. Whenever the construction of the constituent instrument of a public international organization or of an international convention adopted thereunder is in question in a case before the Court, the Registrar shall so notify the public international organization concerned and shall communicate to it copies of all the written proceedings.

Article 35

1. The Court shall be open to the states parties to the present Statute.

2. The conditions under which the Court shall be open to other states shall, subject to the special provisions contained in treaties in force, be laid down by the Security Council, but in no case shall such conditions place the parties in a position of inequality before the Court.

3. When a state which is not a Member of the United Nations is a party to a case, the Court shall fix the amount which that party is to contribute towards the expenses of the Court. This provision shall not apply if such state is bearing a share of the expenses of the Court.

Article 36

1. The jurisdiction of the Court comprises all cases which the parties refer to it and all matters specially provided for in the Charter of the United Nations or in treaties and conventions in force.

2. The states parties to the present Statute may at any time declare that they recognize as compulsory ipso facto and without special agreement, in relation to any other state accepting the same obligation, jurisdiction of the Court in all legal disputes concerning:

a. the interpretation of a treaty;

b. any question of international law;

c. the existence of any fact which, if established, would constitute a breach of an international obligation;

d. the nature or extent of the reparation to be made for the breach of an international obligation.

3. The declarations referred to above may be made unconditionally or on condition of reciprocity on the part of several or certain states, or for a certain time.

4. Such declarations shall be deposited with the Secretary-General of the United Nations, who shall transmit copies thereof to the parties to the Statute and to the Registrar of the Court.

5. Declarations made under Article 36 of the Statute of the Permanent Court of International Justice and which are still in force shall be deemed, as between the parties to the present Statute, to be acceptances of the compulsory jurisdiction of the International Court of Justice for the period which they still have to run and in accordance with their terms.

6. In the event of a dispute as to whether the Court has jurisdiction, the matter shall be settled by the decision of the court.

Article 37

Whenever a treaty or convention in force provides for reference of a matter to a tribunal to have been instituted by the League of Nations, or to the Permanent Court of International Justice, the matter shall, as between the parties to the present Statute, be referred to the International Court of Justice.

Article 38

1. The Court, whose function is to decide in accordance with international law such disputes as are submitted to it, shall apply:

a. international conventions, whether general or particular, establishing rules expressly recognized by the contesting states;

b. international custom, as evidence of a general practice accepted as law;

c. the general principles of law recognized by civilized nations;

d. subject to the provisions of Article 59, judicial decisions and the teachings of the most highly qualified publicists of the various nations, as subsidiary means for the determination of rules of law.

2. This provision shall not prejudice the power of the Court to decide a case ex aequo et bono, if parties agree thereto.

Chapter III

PROCEDURE

Article 39

1. The official languages of the court shall be French and English. If the parties agree that the case shall be conducted in French, the judgment shall be conducted in French, the judgment shall be delivered in French. If the parties agree that the case shall be conducted in English, the judgment shall be delivered in English.

2. In the absence of an agreement as to which language shall be employed, each party may, in the pleadings, use the language which it prefers; the decision of the court shall be given in French and English. In this case the Court shall at the same time determine which of the two texts shall be considered as authoritative.

3. The Court shall, at the request of any party, authorize a language other than French or English to be used by that party.

Article 40

1. Cases are brought before the Court, as the case may be, either by the notification of the special agreement or by a written application addressed to the Registrar. In either case the subject of the dispute and the parties shall be indicated.

2. The Registrar shall forthwith communicate the application to all concerned.

3. He shall also notify the Members of the United Nations through the Secretary-General, and also any other states entitled to appear before the Court.

Article 41

1. The Court shall have the power to indicate, if it considers that circumstances so require, any provisional measures which ought to be taken to preserve the respective rights of either party.

2. Pending the final decision, notice of the measures suggested shall forthwith be given to the parties and to the Security Council.

Article 42

1. The parties shall be represented by agents.

2. They may have the assistance of counsel or advocates before the Court.

3. The agents, counsel, and advocates of parties before the Court shall enjoy the privileges and immunities necessary to the independent exercise of their duties.

Article 43

1. The procedure shall consist of two parts: written and oral.

2. The written proceedings shall consist of the communication to the Court and to the parties of memorials, counter-memorials and, if necessary, replies; also all papers and documents in support.

3. These communications shall be made through the Registrar, in the order and within the time fixed by the Court.

4. A certified copy of every document produced by one party shall be communicated to the other party.

5. The oral proceedings shall consist of the hearing by the Court of witnesses, experts, agents, counsel, and advocates.

Article 44

1. For the service of all notices upon persons other than the agents, counsel, and advocates, the Court shall apply direct to the government of the state upon whose territory the notice has to be served.

2. The same provision shall apply whenever steps are to be taken to procure evidence on the spot.

Article 45

The hearing shall be under the control of the President or, if he is unable to preside, of the Vice-President; if neither is able to preside, the senior judge present shall preside.

Article 46

The hearing in Court shall be public, unless the court shall decide otherwise, or unless the parties demand that the public be not admitted.

Article 47

1. Minutes shall be made at each hearing and signed by the Registrar and the President.

2. These minutes alone shall be authentic.

Article 48

The Court shall make order for the conduct of the case, shall decide the form and time in which each party must conclude its arguments, and make all arrangements connected with the taking of evidence.

Article 49

The Court may, even before the hearing begins, call upon the agents to produce any document or to supply any explanations. Formal note shall be taken of any refusal.

Article 50

The Court may, at any time, entrust any individual, body, bureau, commission, or other organization that it may select, with the task of carrying out an enquiry or giving an expert opinion.

Article 51

During the hearing any relevant questions are to be put to the witnesses and experts under the conditions laid down by the court in the rules of procedure referred to in Article 30.

Article 52

After the Court has received the proofs and evidence within the time specified for the purpose, it may refuse to accept any further oral or written evidence that one party may desire to present unless the other side consents.

Article 53

1. Whenever one of the parties does not appear before the Court, or fails to defend its case, the other party may call upon the Court to decide in favour of its claim.

2. The court must, before doing so, satisfy itself, not only that it has jurisdiction in accordance with Articles 36 and 37, but also that the claim is well founded in fact and law.

Article 54

1. When, subject to the control of the Court, the agents, counsel, and advocates have completed their presentation of the case, the President shall declare the hearing closed.

2. The Court shall withdraw to consider the judgment.

3. The deliberations of the court shall take place in private and remain secret.

Article 55

1. All questions shall be decided by a majority of the judges present.

2. In the event of an equality of votes, the President or the judge who acts in his place shall have a casting vote.

Article 56

1. The judgment shall state the reasons on which it is based.

2. It shall contain the names of the judges who have taken part in the decision.

Article 57

If the judgment does not represent in whole or in part the unanimous opinion of the judges, any judge shall be entitled to deliver a separate opinion.

Article 58

The judgment shall be signed by the President and by the Registrar. It shall be read in open court, due notice having been given to the agents.

Article 59

The decision of the court has no binding force except between the parties and in respect of that particular case.

Article 60

The judgment is final and without appeal. In the event of dispute as to the meaning or scope of the judgement, the Court shall construe it upon the request of any party.

Article 61

1. An application for revision of a judgment may be made only when it is based upon the discovery of some fact of such a nature as to be a decisive factor, which fact was, when the judgment was given, unknown to the court and also to the party claiming revision, always provided that such ignorance was not due to negligence.

2. The proceedings for revision shall be opened by a judgment of the Court expressly recording the existence of the new fact, recognizing that it has such a character as to lay the case open to revision, and declaring the application admissible on this ground.

3. The Court may require previous compliance with the terms of the judgment before it admits proceedings in revision.

4. The application for revision must be made at latest within six months of the discovery of the new fact.

5. No application for revision may be made after the lapse of ten years from the date of judgment.

Article 62

1. Should a state consider that it has an interest of a legal nature which may be affected by the decision in the case, it may submit a request to the Court to be permitted to intervene.

2. It shall be for the Court to decide upon this request.

Article 63

1. Whenever the construction of a convention to which states other than those concerned in the case are parties is in question, the Registrar shall notify all such states forthwith.

2. Every state so notified has the right to intervene in the proceedings; but if it uses this right, the construction given by the judgment will be equally binding upon it.

Article 64

Unless otherwise decided by the Court, each party shall bear its own costs.

Chapter IV

ADVISORY OPINIONS

Article 65

1. The Court may give an advisory opinion on any legal question at the request of whatever body may be authorized by or in accordance with the Charter of the United Nations to make such a request.

2. Questions upon which the advisory opinion of the Court is asked shall be laid before the Court by means of a written request containing an exact statement of the question upon which an opinion is required, and accompanied by all documents likely to throw light upon the question.

Article 66

1. Registrar shall forthwith give notice of the request for an advisory opinion to all states entitled to appear before the Court.

2. The Registrar shall also, by means of a special and direct communication, notify any state entitled to appear before the Court or international organization considered by the Court, or, should it not be sitting, by the President, as likely to be able to furnish information on the question, that the Court will be prepared to receive, within a time limit to be fixed by the President, written statements, or to hear, at a public sitting to be held for the purpose, oral statements relating to the question.

3. Should any such state entitled to appear before the Court have failed to receive the special communication referred to in paragraph 2 of this Article, such state may express a desire to submit a written statement or to be heard; and the Court will decide.

4. States and organizations having presented written or oral statements or both shall be permitted to comment on the statements made by other states or organizations in the form, to the extent, and within the time limits which the Court, or, should it not be sitting, the President, shall decide in each particular case. Accordingly, the Registrar shall in due time communicate any such written statements to states and organizations having submitted similar statements.

Article 67

The Court shall deliver its advisory opinions in open court, notice having been given to the Secretary-General and to the representatives of Members of the United Nations, of other states and of international organizations immediately concerned.

Article 68

In the exercise of its advisory functions the Court shall further be guided by the provisions of the present Statute which apply in contentious cases to the extent to which it recognizes them to be applicable.

Chapter V

AMENDMENT

Article 69

Amendments to the present Statute shall be effected by the same procedure as is provided by the Charter of the United Nations for amendments to that Charter, subject however to any provisions which the General Assembly upon recommendation of the Security Council may adopt concerning the participation of states which are parties to the present Statute but are not Members of the United Nations.

Article 70

The Court shall have power to propose such amendments to the present Statute as it may deem necessary, through written communications to the Secretary-General, for consideration in conformity with the provisions of Article 69.

END OF UNITED NATIONS CHARTER DOCUMENT

What Are The Phoenix Journals?

Many people have asked us what the PHOENIX JOURNALS are. They contain the true history (His-story) of mankind on this planet as well as detailed information about the most asked about and wondered about subjects (i.e., Spirituality, E.T.s, our origin, our purpose here on this planet, etc.). Commander Hatonn and the other Higher Spiritual Teachers who have authored these JOURNALS, weave spiritual lessons and insights throughout the unveiling of lies which have been deceptively forced upon us, throughout ti me, by the Elite anti-Christ controllers. These JOURNALS are the "DEAD SEA SCROLLS" of our time. Their importance in the growth of mankind cannot be overstated. They are the textbooks of understanding which God promised us we would have, to guide us through the "End Times".

Here is what Commander Hatonn has said about the PHOENIX JOURNALS. Quoting from JOURNAL #40, THE TRILLION DOLLAR LIE, Vol.II, pgs. 47 & 48: "Some day in the far recesses of the future experiences of another human civilization—these JOURNALS will be found and TRUTH will again be given unto the world manifest so that another lost civilization can regain and find its way. God always gives His creations that which they need when the sequence is proper. It is what man DOES WITH THESE THINGS which marks the civilization. WHAT WILL YOUR LEGACY BE????? I focus on current activities which might turn your world about in ti me to save your ecosystems and your sovereignty as nations and peoples. You cannot wait to be filled in on the lies of the generations lest you wait until too late to take control of your circumstance presently within the lies. YOU ARE A PEOPLE OF MASSIVE DECEPTION AND WHAT YOU WILL DO WITH THIS INFORMATION IN ACTION DETERMINES YOUR PURPOSE AND GROWTH IN THIS WONDROUS MANIFESTED EXPERIENCE—WILL YOU PERISH PHYSICALLY OF THE EVIL INTENT, OR WILL YOU MOVE INTO AND WITHIN THE PLACES OF HOLY CREATOR? THE CHOICE IS YOURS."

BOOK LIST

THESE WORKS ARE A SERIES CALLED THE PHOENIX JOURNALS. THEY HAVE BEEN WRITTEN TO ASSIST MAN TO BECOME AWARE OF LONGSTANDING DECEPTIONS AND OTHER MATTERS CRITICAL TO HIS SURVIVAL AS A SPECIES.

1. SIPAPU ODYSSEY ISBN 1-56935-045-0

2. AND THEY CALLED HIS NAME IMMANUEL, I AM SANANDA ISBN 1-56935-014-0

3. SPACE-GATE, THE VEIL REMOVED ISBN 1-56935-015-9

4. SPIRAL TO ECONOMIC DISASTER ISBN 0-922356-07-6

5. FROM HERE TO ARMAGEDDON 1-56935-043-4

6. SURVIVAL IS ONLY TEN FEET FROM HELL ISBN 0-922356-11-4

7. THE RAINBOW MASTERS ISBN 1-56935-017-5

8. AIDS THE LAST GREAT PLAGUE ISBN 0-922356-04-1

9. SATAN'S DRUMMERS ISBN 1-56935-054-X

10. PRIVACY IN A FISHBOWL ISBN 1-56935-042-6

11. CRY OF THE PHOENIX ISBN 1-56935-036-1

12. CRUCIFIXION OF THE PHOENIX ISBN 0-922356-41-9

13. SKELETONS IN THE CLOSET ISBN 0-922356-15-7

14. RRPP* *RAPE, RAVAGE, PLUNDER AND PILLAGE OF THE PHOENIX ISBN 0-922356-16-5

15. RAPE OF THE CONSTITUTION ISBN 0-922356-17-3

16. YOU CAN SLAY THE DRAGON ISBN 0-922356-21-1

17. THE NAKED PHOENIX ISBN 0-922356-22-X

18. BLOOD AND ASHES ISBN 0-922356-25-4

19. FIRESTORM IN BABYLON ISBN 0-922356-27-0

20. THE MOSSAD CONNECTION ISBN 0-922356-28-9

21. CREATION, THE SACRED UNIVERSE ISBN 1-56935-047-7

22. PLEIADES CONNECTION RETURN OF THE PHOENIX VOLUME I ISBN 0-922356-31-9

23. BURNT OFFERINGS ISBN 0-922356-33-5

24. SHROUDS OF THE SEVENTH SEAL ISBN 0-922356-34-3 1

25. THE BITTER COMMUNION ISBN 0-922356-37-8

26. COUNTERFEIT BLESSINGS THE ANTI-CHRIST BY ANY NAME: KHAZARS ISBN 0-922356-36-6

27. PHOENIX OPERATOR-OWNER MANUAL ISBN 1-56935-018-3

28. OPERATION SHANSTORM ISBN 0-922356-39-4

29. END OF THE MASQUERADE ISBN 0-922356-40-8

30. MATTER & ANTI-MATTER WHAT'S THE MATTER ISBN 0-922356-41-6

31. GOD SAID: LET THERE BE LIGHT AND CREATION BECAME ISBN 0-922356-42-4

32. I AND MY FATHER ARE ONE SECRETS OF UNIVERSAL ORDER; ETERNAL QUEST OF MAN ISBN 0-922356-46-7

33. MURDER BY ATOMIC SUICIDE ISBN 0-922356-47-5

34. PHONE HOME, E.T. REACH OUT AND TOUCH SOMEONE-LIKE GOD! ISBN 0-922356-48-3

35. THE SACRED SPIRIT WITHIN ISBN 0-922356-50-5

36. HUMAN SCIENCE OF MAN ISBN 0-922356-51-3

37. SCIENCE OF THE COSMOS TRANSFORMATION OF MAN ISBN 0-922356-52-1

38. THE DARK CHARADE ISBN 0-922356-53-X

39. THE TRILLION DOLLAR LIE THE HOLOCAUST VOL. I ISBN 0-922356-55-6

40. THE TRILLION DOLLAR LIE THE HOLOCAUST VOL. II ISBN 0-922356-56-4

41. THE DESTRUCTION OF A PLANET ZIONISM IS RACISM ISBN 0-922356-60-2

42. UNHOLY ALLIANCE ISBN 0-922356-61-0

43. TANGLED WEBS VOL. I ISBN 0-922356-62-9

44. TANGLED WEBS VOL. II ISBN 0-922356-63-7

45. TANGLED WEBS VOL. III ISBN 0-922356-64-5

46. TANGLED WEBS VOL. IV ISBN 0-922356-65-3

47. PRE-FLIGHT INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PHOENIX VOL I ISBN 0-922356-70-X

48. TANGLED WEBS VOL. V ISBN 0-922356-68-8

49. TANGLED WEBS VOL. VI ISBN 0-922356-69-6

50. DIVINE PLAN VOL. I ISBN 1-56935-29-9

51. TANGLED WEBS VOL. VII ISBN 0-922356-81-5

52. TANGLED WEBS VOL. VIII ISBN 0-922356-83-1

53. TANGLED WEBS VOL. IX ISBN 0-922356-84-X

54. THE FUNNEL'S NECK ISBN 0-922356-86-6

55. MARCHING TO ZION ISBN 0-922356-87-4

56. SEX AND THE LOTTERY ISBN 0-922356-88-2

57. GOD'S PLAN 2000! DIVINE PLAN VOL. II ISBN 1-56935-028-0

58. FROM THE FRYING PAN INTO THE PIT OF FIRE ISBN 0-922356-90-4

59. "REALITY" ALSO HAS A DRUMBEAT ISBN 0-922356-91-2

60. AS THE BLOSSOM OPENS ISBN 0-922356-92-0

61. PROGRAMMING PITFALLS ISBN 1-56935-001-9

62. CHAPARRAL SERENDIPITY ISBN 1-56935-000-0 2

63. THE BEST OF TIMES ISBN 1-56935-002-7

64. TO ALL MY CHILDREN ISBN 1-56935-003-5

65. THE LAST GREAT PLAGUE ISBN 1-56935-004-3

66. ULTIMATE PSYCHOPOLITICS ISBN 1-56935-005-1

67. THE BEAST AT WORK ISBN 1-56935-006-X

68. ECSTASY TO AGONY ISBN 1-56935-007-8

69. TATTERED PAGES ISBN 1-56935-009-4

70. NO THORNLESS ROSES ISBN 1-56935-010-8

71. COALESCENCE ISBN 1-56935-012-4

72. CANDLELIGHT ISBN 1-56935-013-2

73. RELATIVE CONNECTIONS VOL. I ISBN 1-56935-016-7

74. MYSTERIES OF RADIANCE RELATIVE CONNECTIONS VOL. II ISBN 1-56935-019-1

75. TRUTH AND CONSEQUENCES REL. CONNECT. VOL. III ISBN 1-56935-020-5

76. SORTING THE PIECES REL. CONNECT. VOL. IV ISBN 1-56935-021-3

77. PLAYERS IN THE GAME ISBN 1-56935-022-1

78. IRON' TRAP AROUND AMERICA ISBN 1-56935-023-X

79. MARCHING TO ZOG ISBN 1-56935-024-8

80. TRUTH FROM THE "ZOG BOG" ISBN 1-56935-025-6

81. RUSSIAN ROULETTE AMONG OTHER THINGS ISBN 1-56935-026-4

82. RETIREMENT RETREATS OR WHICH CONCENTRATION CAMP DO YOU PREFER? ISBN 1-56935-027-2

83. POLITICAL PSYCHOS ISBN 1-56935-030-2

84. CHANGING PERSPECTIVES ISBN 1-56935-031-0

85. SHOCK THERAPY FOR A BRAIN DEAD WORLD ISBN 1-56935-032-9

86. MISSING THE LIFEBOAT?? ISBN 1-56935-033-7

87. IN GOD'S NAME AWAKEN ISBN 1-56935-034-5

88. ADVANCED DEMOLITION LEGION (THE ADL IN ACTION) ISBN 1-56935-035-3

89. FOCUS OF DEMONS ISBN (REAL GREMLINS IN THE WORKS) 1-56935-037-X

90. TAKING OFF THE BLINDFOLD ISBN 1-56935-038-8 3

91. FOOTSTEPS INTO TRUTH UNCOVERING LIES AND FRAUD ABOUT GOD AND MAN ISBN 1-56935-039-6

92. WALK THE CROOKED ROAD WITH THE CROOKS ISBN 1-56935-040-X

93. CRIMINAL POLITBUROS AND OTHER PLAGUES ISBN 1-56935-041-8

94. WINGING IT... ISBN 1-56935-044-2

95. HEAVE-UP (PHASE ONE) ISBN 1-56935-046-9

96. HEAVE-HO (PHASE TWO) ISBN 1-56935-048-5

97. HEAVE 'EM OUT (PHASE THREE, PART 1) ISBN 1-56935-049-3

98. ASCENSION OR NEVER-EVER LAND ISBN 1-56935-050-7

99. USURPERS OF FREEDOM IN CONSPIRACY ISBN 1-56935-051-5

100. BUTTERFLIES, MIND CONTROL--THE RAZOR'S EDGE IT'S ALL IN THE GAME ISBN 1-56935-052-3

101. THE BREATHING DEAD AND CEMENT CHILDREN ISBN 1-56935-053-1

102. SACRED WISDOM ISBN 1-56935-055-8

103. CONFRONT THE NOW * CREATE THE FUTURE ISBN 1-56935-056-6

104. FIRST STEPS ISBN 1-56935-057-4

105. AMERICA IN PERIL AN UNDERSTATEMENT ISBN 1-56935-058-2

107. RING AROUND THE ROSIE ISBN 1-56935-060-4

130. TRACKING DOWN THE KILLER "AND OTHER FORMS OF MURDER" ISBN 1-56935-083-3

222. BIRTHING THE PHOENIX Vol. 1 ISBN 1-56935-179-1

223. BIRTHING THE PHOENIX Vol. 2 ISBN 1-56935-180-5

224. BIRTHING THE PHOENIX Vol. 3 ISBN 1-56935-181-3

225. BIRTHING THE PHOENIX Vol. 4 ISBN 1-56935-182-1

227. RISE OF ANTICHRIST Vol. 1 ISBN 1-56935-184-8

228. RISE OF ANTICHRIST Vol. 2 ISBN 1-56935-185-6

229. RISE OF ANTICHRIST Vol. 3 ISBN 1-56935-186-4

230. RISE OF ANTICHRIST Vol. 4 ISBN 1-56935-187-2

Table of Contents

DISCLAIMER

COPYRIGHT POSITION STATEMENT AND DISCLAIMER

TO OUR SPONSORS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DEDICATION

FOREWORD

CHAPTER 1

CHAPTER 2

CHAPTER 3

CHAPTER 4

CHAPTER 5

CHAPTER 6

CHAPTER 7

CHAPTER 8

CHAPTER 9

CHAPTER 10

CHAPTER 11

CHAPTER 12

CHAPTER 13

CHAPTER 14

CHAPTER 15

CHAPTER 16

What Are The Phoenix Journals?

BOOK LIST